CT - e - CT Prospeed Ai - Fi Series Component Replacement - SM - 2244773 - 37

GE Healthcare
gehealthcare.com
Technical
Publications
2244773
Revision 37
CT/e, CT ProSpeed AI/FI Series

Component Replacement
Copyright © 1999-2022 by General Electric Company
Operating Documentation
GE HEALTHCARE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
REV 35 2244773
警告 • 本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果维修服务提供商需要非英文版本，客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修人员，操作员或患者造成触电、机械伤害或其他形式的
伤害。
VÝSTRAHA • Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

• V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je
(CS) zajištění překladu do odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní
návod a pochopili jeho obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka
prodejního servisu, obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického
proudu, respektive vlivem mechanických či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL • Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

• Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det
(DA) kundens ansvar at sørge for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret medmindre denne servicemanual har været
konsulteret og er forstået.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af
elektrisk, mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
WAARSCHUWING • Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

• Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant
(NL) verantwoordelijk voor de vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden voordat deze
onderhoudshandleiding werd geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het
onderhoudspersoneel, de operator of een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als
gevolg van een elektrische schok, mechanische of andere gevaren.
WARNING • This Service Manual is available in English only.

• If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the
(EN) customer's responsibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been
consulted and is understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider,
operator, or patient, from electric shock or from mechanical or other hazards.
HOIATUS • Käesolev teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.

• Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles,
(ET) vastutab klient tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt
käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga tutvumist ja sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või
patsiendi vigastamist elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
a
VAROITUS • Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.

• Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia,
(FI) tarvittavan käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt
tämän huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön,
laitteiston käyttäjän tai potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen
vian tai muun vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION • Ce manuel de service n'est disponible qu'en anglais.

• Si le technicien du client a besoin de ce manuel dans une autre langue que
(FR) l'anglais, c'est au client qu'il incombe de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que le manuel service n'a
pas été consulté et compris
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien,
l'opérateur ou le patient des blessures dues à des dangers électriques,
mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG • Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in Englischer Sprache.

• Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es aufgabe
(DE) des Kunden für eine Entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten,
ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des
Kundendiensttechnikers, des Bedieners oder des Patienten durch
stromschläge, Mechanische oder Sonstige gefahren kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ • Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται στα αγγλικά μόνο.

• Εάν το άτομο παροχής σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε
(EL) γλώσσα εκτός των αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει
υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό εκτός εαν
έχετε συμβουλευτεί και έχετε κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Εαν δε λάβετε υπόψη την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί
τραυματισμός στο άτομο παροχής σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από
ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή άλλους κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS • Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

(HU) • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő
felelőssége a fordítás elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási
kézikönyvben leírtakat nem értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a
beteg áramütés, mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését
eredményezheti.
b
AÐVÖRUN • Þessi þjónustuhandbók er eingöngu fáanleg á ensku.

• Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er
(IS) það skylda viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók
hefur verið skoðuð og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda,
stjórnanda eða sjúklings frá raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
AVVERTENZA • Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in inglese.

• Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il
(IT) cliente è tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Si proceda alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il
presente manuale ed averne compreso il contenuto
• Il non rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe far compiere operazioni da
cui derivino lesioni all'addetto, alla manutenzione, all'utilizzatore ed al paziente
per folgorazione elettrica, per urti meccanici od altri rischi.
警告 • このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA) • サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業は
その業者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないで
ください。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さ
んが、感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 • 본 서비스 지침서는 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .

(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우 , 번역 서비스를 제공
하는 것은 고객의 책임입니다 .
• 본 서비스 지침서를 참고했고 이해하지 않는 한은 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시
도하지 마십시오 .
• 이 경고에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크 , 기계상의 혹은 다른 위험으로부터 서비
스 제공자 , 운영자 혹은 환자에게 위해를 가할 수 있습니다 .
BRDINJUMS • Šī apkalpes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

• Ja klienta apkalpes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, nevis
(LV) angļu, klienta pienākums ir nodrošināt tulkošanu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkalpi bez apkalpes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un
saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošana var radīt elektriskās strāvas trieciena, mehānisku
vai citu risku izraisītu traumu apkalpes sniedzējam, operatoram vai pacientam.
c
ĮSPĖJIMAS • Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra prieinamas tik anglų kalba.

• Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, numatyti
(LT) vertimo paslaugas yra kliento atsakomybė.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, nebent atsižvelgėte į šį
eksploatavimo vadovą ir jį supratote.
• Jei neatkreipsite dėmesio į šį perspėjimą, galimi sužalojimai dėl elektros šoko,
mechaninių ar kitų pavojų paslaugų tiekėjui, operatoriui ar pacientui.
ADVARSEL • Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

• Hvis kundens serviceleverandør trenger et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar
(NO) å sørge for oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og
forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren,
operatøren eller pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller
andre farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE • Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

• Jeśli dostawca usług klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie
(PL) usługi tłumaczenia jest obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować wyposażenia bez zapoznania się i zrozumienia
niniejszego podręcznika serwisowego.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może spowodować urazy dostawcy
usług, operatora lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia elektrycznego, zagrożenia
mechanicznego bądź innego.
ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

• Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica, que não a gems, solicitar
(PT-BR) estes manuais noutro idioma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os
serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado ecompreendido este
manual de assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode por em perigo a segurança do técnico,
operador ou paciente devido a choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

• Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica, que não a gems, solicitar
(PT-PT) estes manuais noutro idioma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os
serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado ecompreendido este
manual de assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do
técnico, do operador ou do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos
ou outros.
d
ATENŢIE • Acest manual de service este disponibil numai în limba engleză.

• Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea
(RO) engleză, este de datoria clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii
acestui manual de service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului,
operatorului sau pacientului în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau
de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖНО! • Данное руководство по обслуживанию предлагается только на английском

языке.
(RU) • Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на
английском, а на каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно
обеспечить перевод.
• Перед обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к данному
руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к
тому, что специалист по обслуживанию, оператор или пациент получат
удар электрическим током, механическую травму или другое
повреждение.
UPOZORENJE • Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

• Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi
(SR) prevodilacke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uredaj ako niste procitali i razumeli ovo servisno
uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povredivanja servisera,
rukovaoca ili pacijenta usled strujnog udara ili mehanickih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE • Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

• Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu,
(SK) poskytnutie prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia skôr, ako si neprečítate návod na obluhu
a neporozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže vyústiť do zranenia poskytovateľa
služieb, obsluhujúcej osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, do
mechanického alebo iného nebezpečenstva.
ATENCION • Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

• Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea
(ES) el inglés, el cliente deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y
comprendido este manual de servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de
servicios, el operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas
eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra naturaleza.
e
VARNING • Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.

• Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska
(SV) ansvarar kunden för att tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den
här servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på
serviceteknikern, operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar,
mekaniska faror eller andra faror.
DIKKAT • Bu servis kilavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

• Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kilavuzu ingilizce dişinda bir başka lisandan talep
(TR) ederse, bunu tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kilavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyariya uyulmamasi, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayi
teknisyen, operatör veya hastanin yaralanmasina yol açabilir.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕН • Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

• Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на
ИЕ клиента е да осигури превод.
(BG) • Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали
упътването за работа.
• Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на
доставчика на услугата, оператора или пациент в резултат на токов удар
или механична или друга опасност.
警告 • 本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他
的危險。
警告 • 本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險
而受傷。
UPOZORENJE • Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

(HR) • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati
prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli
ovaj servisni priručnik.
• Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge,
operatera ili pacijenta uslijed strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
f
OPOZORILO • Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora
stranka zagotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in
razumeli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara,
mehanskih ali drugih nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL
copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving
agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event,
within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company
will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
To file a report:
Fill out a report on http://egems.med.ge.com/edq/home.jsp
Contact the local service coordinator.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products,
GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the
requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
g
REV 35 2244773
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should be thoroughly
read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The
General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no practical
design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate
precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that anyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents, and
representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective materials and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.
LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives.
GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this publication.
h
REV 37 2244773
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Tab - Section Page REV GANTRY ROTATIONAL - III 8-1 to 8-27 6

GANTRY ROTATIONAL - IV 9-1 to 9-44 30
Title page 37
-
Title page rear blank 3 (Table) i to ii 37
(Warning and other YMS TABLE (2244226-X) 1-1 to 1-62 37
a to h 35
important information)
LCT TABLE (2297024/2302759) 2-1 to 2-63 37
(Revision Information) A to D 37
4 (DAS/Detector) i 28
1 (Introduction) 1 36 DAS BOARD (FOR NPDAS) 1-1 to 1-17 19
1 (Operator Console) i to iii 31 DAS BOARD (FOR MDAS) 2-1 to 2-13 20
OC TABLE ASSY 1-1 to 1-23 27 DAS BOARD (FOR GDAS) 3-1 to 3-19 28
PERIPHERAL ASSY 2-1 to 2-17 32 DETECTOR 4-1 to 4-4 19
HOST CPU ASSY (FOR O2 COM- 5 (X-ray Generator) i 8
3-1 to 3-22 20
PUTER
X-RAY GENERATOR 1-1 to 1-10 33
(IA) HOST COMPUTER ASSY
4-1 to 4-21 29
(FOR LINUX COMPUTER) AUXILIARY BOX 2-1 to 2-3 2
(IA) RECON COMPUTER ASSY X-RAY TUBE 3-1 to 3-8 33
5-1 to 5-9 27
(FOR LINUX COMPUTER)
X-RAY GENERATOR
NEST ASSY (FOR O2 COMPUT- 4-1 to 4-9 7
6-1 to 6-13 27 COMPONENTS - I
ER)
X-RAY GENERATOR
NEST ASSY (FOR LINUX COM- 5-1 to 5-15 7
7-1 to 7-9 29 COMPONENTS - II
PUTER)
X-RAY GENERATOR
APPENDIX OC-1 to OC-5 10 6-1 to 6-25 33
COMPONENTS - III
2 (Gantry) i to ii 34 X-RAY GENERATOR
7-1 to 7-13 7
COMPONENTS - IV
INTRODUCTION 1-1 to 1-10 26
6 (PDU) i 30
GANTRY STATIONARY - I 2-1 to 2-14 11
PDU1 (2247554-X / 2247557-X) 1-1 to 1-15 12
GANTRY STATIONARY - II 3-1 to 3-24 30
PDU2 (2298852 / 2298849) 2-1 to 2-22 30
GANTRY STATIONARY - III 4-1 to 4-18 12
GANTRY STATIONARY - IV 5-1 to 5-8 35
7 (Appendix)
0
Symbols and Classification A-1 to A-4
GANTRY ROTATIONAL - I 6-1 to 6-6 34
- Blank/Rear cover -
GANTRY ROTATIONAL - II 7-1 to 7-25 30
A
REV 37 2244773
REVISION HISTORY
REV Date Primary Reason for Change
37 05/13/22 Table Added Table Speaker replacement procedure. (Sec. 1 and Sec. 2)
36 08/18/11 Introduction Added introduction for HHS support central web site for FDA 2579 form download.
Table Updated cradle potentiometer resistance from 500±100Ω to 125±50Ω.
35 06/17/10 Warning Added four Languagewarnings for HongKong, Taiwan, Croatian and Slovenian.
Gantry Updated Gantry Tilt Potentiometer replacement procedure. (Sec. 5)
34 06/22/09 Gantry Add Collimator Assy replacement procedure. (Sec. 6)
33 12/23/08 Warning Added new languages for PT-BR (Portuguese-Brazil) and SR (Serbian).
Renamed PT to PT-PT (Portuguese-Portugal).
Gantry Updated resistance from 250Ω to 2.5KΩ for tilt potentiometer replacement. (Sec. 5)
Added figure and torque for Aperture Assy. (Sec. 6)
X-Ray Updated command and path for X-ray Generator replacement (JEDI error definition file and TnT
definition file) according to CR13219265. (Sec. 1)
Added person required and updated special equipment for X-ray Tube replacement. (Sec. 3)
Added screws part number and size for X-ray Tube replacement. (Sec. 3)
Updated command and path for KV Control Board replacement according to CR13219265. (Sec. 6)
32 04/30/08 OC Added Raw Data Disk (5166701) according to PQR13162167. (Sec. 2)
31 11/22/07 OC Added DVD-RAM Drive replacement. (Sec. 2)
30 07/09/07 OC Updated Peripheral Assy -> CD-RW Drive. (Sec. 2)
Gantry Updated error. (Sec. 3)

Updated Axial Drive Belt. (Sec. 7)
Updated Illustration 9-24 Brush Block Jig. (Sec. 9)
PDU Updated CB1 and CB2 replacement for PDU2 400V. (Sec. 2)
B
REV 37 2244773
REVISION HISTORY
29 12/22/06 OC Updated Host Computer Assy (For PC 865) Replacement. (Sec. 4)
Updated Audio Card Replacement. (Sec. 7)
Table Added Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable Replacement. (Sec. 2)
28 09/26/06 OC Added SATA HDD Cable replacement process. (Sec. 4)
DAS/Detector Added illustration of DAS DATA Output Signal Cable connection position. (Sec. 3)
27 04/05/06 OC Added Note for Fan Assy replacement.

Updated the Front Panel Assy replacement. (Sec. 2)
Deleted BIOS information for Recon PC replacement. (Sec. 5)
26 03/06/06 OC Updated (IA) HOST COMPUTER ASSY according to PQR13068346. (Sec. 4)

Updated (IA) Recon COMPUTER ASSY according to PQR13068350. (Sec. 5)
Gantry Updated error. (Sec. 1)

Added GDAS Power Supply information. (Sec. 7)
DAS/Detector Added GDAS information. (Sec. 3)
25 08/30/05 OC Updated (IA) HOST COMPUTER ASSY (FOR LINUX COMPUTER). (Sec. 4)
Updated (IA) Recon COMPUTER ASSY (FOR LINUX COMPUTER). (Sec. 5)
Gantry Updated installation of Gantry Cover. (Sec. 1)
24 05/23/05 Cover Changed contact method of DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION.
Gantry Updated unit of the resistance. (Sec. 5)
X-Ray Added plate screws torque (285kgf.cm) in Illustration 3-5 Mounting Plate Removal. (Sec. 3)
23 11/02/04 Gantry Added contents of SP ROM Assy (Sec. 7)
22 09/20/04 Gantry Added contents of DCP Assy (Sec. 7)
21 02/24/04 OC Added CD-RW info and Data Recovery of Raw Data Disk (Sec. 2)
Changed quantity of the Table Connector (Sec. 2)
Updated 4-1 Host Computer Assy (Sec. 4)
Updated 5-1 Recon Computer Assy (Sec. 5)
20 09/11/03 Operator Console Added a Note for Illustration 2-2 SCSI Bay (Sec. 2)
Changed “[Shift] + [7]” to “[Alt] + [Esc]” (Sec. 2, Sec. 3)
DAS/Detector Added a Notice for Coverter Board Step 9 (Sec. 2)
19 04/20/03 OC Added Linux Computer information (Sec. 2, Sec. 3, Sec.4 )

Added a new section for Host Computer Assy replacement of Linux Computer OC
Added a new section for Recon Computer Assy replacement of Linux Computer OC
Added a new section for Nest replacement of Linux Computer OC
Gantry Updated Slip Ring Replacement Kit (Sec. 9)
DAS/Detector Added a new section for MDAS and it’s Power Supply replacement
18 01/27/03 Gantry Changed: part number of the Slip Ring Replacement Kit (Sec. 9)
Corrected: Step Number (Sec. 9)
17 11/05/02 X-Ray Added: an important notice in Section 3 - X-Ray Tube (Sec. 3)
C
REV 37 2244773
REVISION HISTORY
16 06/20/02 X-Ray Changed: Part No. 2244783 to 2244773 (Sec. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)
Added: 5 steps of the X-Ray Tube (Sec. 3)
Corrected: torque for loosening and removing the four mounting screws from 450kgf.cm to
285kgf.cm (Sec. 3)
PDU Changed: RMT CNT Board Assy part number 2301670 to 2301670-2 (Sec. 2)
15 04/19/02 Table Added : Head Holder Rubber Sheet
14 02/28/02 OC Added : PCI Tray Notice

Updated: Raw Data Disk, Hard Disk Drive, Additional Hard Disk Drive
13 11/22/01 Table Updated: LCT Table, general
12 10/05/01 Gantry Added: Gantry Rotation Counter (2310012)
Table Corrected: Table designation
PDU Corrected: PDU designation
11 8/10/01 Operator Console Added: Enhancements
Table Added: section for 2297024/2302759 Tables
PDU Added: section for 2295872/2295873 PDUs
10 4/12/01 Operator Console Corrected: Replacement procedure of System Module and MOD Drive.
Changed: Software version.
9 3/8/01 Operator Console Corrected: NPRM and NPRIF Assy’s compatibility chart.
Added: MOD installation Appendix.
DAS/Detector Added: DDP board scan test procedure.
8 12/22/00 Operator Console Added: New raw data disk.
Gantry Added: Service Angles handling caution.
Table Added: Foot Switch (Pedal and large Mat type).
X-ray Generator Included the JEDI p5.47 software information to Sec.1 and Sec.6.
7 10/27/00 Operator Console Added: Reconfiguration for CPU Assy.

Added: CPU ASSY connection and Memory module insertion notes.
6 8/18/00 - Torque Conversion Table.
Operator Console Adopted the newrevision control for Sec.1, 2, 3, 4.
Gantry Adopted the new revision control for Sec.2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9.
Table Adopted the new revision control for Sec.1.
X-ray Generator Adopted the new revision control for Sec.1, 3, 4, 5 and 7.
5 5/19/00 - HDD, HSDCD Slip Ring updates.
4 4/20/00 - JEDI; KV Control board.
3 3/10/00 - HSDCD Slip Ring related updates.
2 2/25/00 - New raw data disk; HSDCD Slip Ring related updates; minor updates.
1 2/04/00 - New torque for Jedi screws; minor updates.
0 11/18/99 - Initial Release
D
REV 36 2244773
INTRODUCTION
The following components are CDRH certified. And the replacement must be reported:
Operator Console, Gantry, Table, PDU, X-Ray Tube and Collimator.

Download the FDA 2579 form from the HHS Support Central Web site and complete the form.
http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/sup_products.asp?prod_id=16442
1 INTRODUCTION
2 INTRODUCTION
REV 31 2244773
OPERATOR CONSOLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - OC TABLE ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 OC POWER SUPPLIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 NAA1 ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-3 SPEAKER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-4 NPD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-5 REAR CN1 PANEL ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-6 REAR CN2 PANEL ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-7 DASIFN PANEL ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-8 VSPL PANEL ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-9 AC PS ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-10 FAN ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1-10-1 Front Fan Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1-10-2 FAN L ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-10-3 FAN R ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-11 FILTER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1-12 MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-13 MOUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-14 KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
SECTION 2 - PERIPHERAL ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 MOD DISK DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 CD-ROM DRIVE/CD-RW DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 DVD-RAM DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-4 RAW DATA DISK / HARD DISK DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-5 NPSC ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-6 FRONT PANEL ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-7 SERIAL PORT EXPANDER (ST1800) (FOR O2 COMPUTER ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2-8 PERIPHERAL FAN ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
SECTION 3 - HOST CPU ASSY (FOR O2 COMPUTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 HOST CPU ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 HARD DISK DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-2-1 HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-2-2 9GB (or 4GB) HDD to 18GB HDD (2330758) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-3 ADDITIONAL HARD DISK DRIVE (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-4 SYSTEM MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-5 MEMORY MODULE (DIMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-6 PCI TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
i OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 31 2244773
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
3-7 PCI HOST CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-8 CPU ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-9 AUDIO MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-10 POWER SUPPLY 170W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
SECTION 4 - (IA) HOST COMPUTER ASSY (FOR LINUX COMPUTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 HOST COMPUTER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-1-1 Host Computer Assy (For Linux PC 845) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-1-2 Host Computer Assy (For PC 845 to 865) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-1-3 Host Computer Assy (For PC 865) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-1-4 Replacement from Host Computer 2369082-2 to 2369082-3 for PC 845 . . . 4-7
4-1-5 Replacement from Host Computer 5143136 to 5189991 for PC 865 . . . . . . 4-12
4-1-6 SATA Cables Replacement from 5132578/5132579 to 5189897 for PC 865 4-13
4-2 MEMORY MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-3 PCI HOST CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-4 CPU ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-5 GRAPHIC CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-6 BAREBONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
SECTION 5 - (IA) RECON COMPUTER ASSY (FOR LINUX COMPUTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 RECON COMPUTER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-1-1 Recon Compute Assy (For PC 845) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-1-2 Recon Computer Assy (For PC 845 to 865) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-1-3 Recon Computer Assy (For PC 865) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-1-4 Replacement from Recon Computer 2369690 to 2369690-2 for PC 845 . . . 5-6
5-2 MEMORY MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-3 CPU ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-4 BAREBONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
SECTION 6 - NEST ASSY (FOR O2 COMPUTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 DBPCI ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2 NPRIF ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-3 SCSI CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-4 BP CONTROLLER CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-5 PCI BACKPLANE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-6 NPRS ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6-7 NPRM ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-8 NEST FAN ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
ii OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 31 2244773
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 7 - NEST ASSY (FOR LINUX COMPUTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 DBPCI ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2 AUDIO CARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-3 MULTI-PORT SERIAL CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-4 SCSI CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-5 BP CONTROLLER CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-6 ETHERNET CARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-7 PCI BACKPLANE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
APPENDIX A - AFTER INSTALLED A MOD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

FLOWCHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1 SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSION VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2 CHECKING TRANSFER RATE FOR ALL SCSI DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
3 PATCHING THE FILE MANUALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
4 VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
5 INSTALLING V/R 4.16 (OR LATER) PATCH SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Patch Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
iii OPERATOR CONSOLE

iv OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 27 2244773
SECTION 1 - OC TABLE ASSY
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER BEFORE
YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.
NOTICE
For systems powered from a power distribution box which has a lockout capability, perform
the following steps at appropriate timings in each component replacement procedure:
..........
Turn off and lock out the system power at the main input (Power Distribution Box).
..........
Restore system power.
..........
1-1 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-1 OC POWER SUPPLIES
Special Equipment
• Power Supply (+12VDC, -12VDC, +5VDC)
• Functional Check/Adjustment Manual (CD-ROM)
Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.
1. Turn OFF the OC main power.
2. Remove the OC Right Side Cover by unscrewing its six (6) screws.
3. Pop free and remove the plastic guard from the front of the power supply terminal. (Illustration 1-1)
Illustration 1-1 OC Power Supplies Removal
–12 V Power Supply
+12V Power
Supply
+5V Power
Terminals Supply
Support
Screws
1-2 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-1 OC POWER SUPPLIES (CONTINUED)

4. Mark and remove all the wires connected at the power supplies terminal.
5. Unscrew the two front support screws and slide one or more power supply unit (+12VDC, -12VDC, +5VDC)
forward and out of the OC.
6. Attach the new power supply sliding it into the power supply holder and connect the wires removed from the
old unit.
7. Screw the front support screws into place.
8. Turn ON the OC main power.
9. Perform the following adjustment according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
DC POWER SUPPLIES
10. Install the OC Right cover.
11. END
1-3 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-2 NAA1 ASSY
Special Equipment
• NAA1 Assy
• Tie Wraps
2. Remove the OC front side Cover by unscrewing its two (2) screws.
3. Pull the Speaker Panel Assy by unscrewing its four (4) screws. Pull it partially and with care, because they are
two cables (CN2 and CN3) connected between the OC and the board (NAA1 Assy).
4. Disconnect the cable connectors CN2 and CN3 and remove the Speaker Panel Assy (see in illustration 1-2).
Illustration 1-2 NAA1 Assy and Speaker Assy
CN3 CN2 NAA1 Assy
Speaker Panel
Assy
NAA1 Assy CN2 CN1 Speaker
CN3
Screw (x4)
1-4 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-2 NAA1 ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Check the NAA1 Assy jumper and switch configuration.
6. Disconnect the remaining cable connector (CN1) from the NAA1 Assy (see in illustration 1-2).
7. Remove the NAA1 Assy from the Speaker Panel Assy by unscrewing its 4 screws.
8. Install the new NAA1 Assy by referring to steps 7. through 3.
9. Perform the following check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
AUDIO FUNCTION TEST
10. Restore the OC to original configuration.
11. END
1-5 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-3 SPEAKER ASSY
Special Equipment
• Speaker Assy
• Tie Wraps
2. Remove the OC Front Side Cover by unscrewing its two (2) screws.
3. Pull the Speaker Panel Assy by unscrewing its four (4) screws. Pull the Speaker Panel Assy partially and with
care, because they are two cables, CN3 and CN2, connected between the OC and the board (NAA1 Assy).
4. Disconnect the cable connectors CN2 and CN3 and remove the Speaker Panel Assy (see in illustration 1-2).
5. Cut the tie-wrap holding the cable to the Speaker Panel Assy.
6. Disconnect the remaining cable connector (CN1 SPK OUT) from the NAA1 Assy (see in illustration 1-3).
7. Remove the Speaker Assy from the Speaker Panel Assy by unscrewing its 4 screws (with washers).
8. Install the new Speaker Assy by referring to steps 7. through 3.
AUDIO FUNCTION TEST
11. END
Illustration 1-3 Speaker Assy
CN1 SKP OUT

cable connector
Screw and Washer (x4)
Speaker Panel Assy
1-6 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-4 NPD ASSY
WARNING
Special Equipment
• NPD Assy
• Tie Wraps
2. For system with UPS Assy : Turn OFF the UPS power.
3. Turn OFF the breaker in the Power Distribution Box (hospital supply).
4. Remove the OC Left Side Cover by unscrewing its six (6) screws. (See Illustration 1-4).
5. Disconnect the following wire and cable connectors from NPD Assy:
- J15, J16, J17 wire connectors
- J2, J4, J5, J6, J7, J8, J10, J11, J12, J13, J14 cable connectors
6. Remove the NPD Assy from the AC PS Assy by unscrewing its 5 screws.
7. Install the new NPD Assy by referring to steps 6. through 5.
8. Verify that wiring and cabling are correctly connected.
10. END
1-7 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-4 NPD ASSY (CONTINUED)
Illustration 1-4 NPD Assy
NPD Assy
C5C4
C1 F6
F7
J8 J1
J15
F8 C9
F9 C10
J2
F 1
F 2
C2 J 3
J9
J16 C6
J10 J 4
C11 C7
F 3
J11 J 5
C3 J12 C12 J 6
J17
J13
J 7
F 5
F 4
J14
C8
1-8 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-5 REAR CN1 PANEL ASSY
Special Equipment
• Rear CN1 Panel Assy
• Tie Wraps
2. Remove the OC Rear Connector Cover (with Optical Cable Holder) by unscrewing its four (4) screws.
3. Remove the OC Rear Cover by unscrewing its two (2) screws.
4. Disconnect the following cable connectors from the Rear CN1 Panel Assy:
- J1 ∼ J12 cable connectors
- J13 ∼ J17 cable connectors (rear connector)
5. Remove the two screws, and slide the Rear CN1 Panel Assy out of the Connector Panel assy.
6. Check the Rear CN1 Panel Assy jumper configuration.
Illustration 1-5 Connector Panel Assy
Rear CN1 Panel Assy DAS IFN Panel Assy
VSPL Panel Assy Rear CN2 Panel Assy

DASM Panel Assy
(Option)
1-9 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-5 REAR CN1 PANEL ASSY (CONTINUED)

7. Remove the Film Cover and Studs by unscrewing five (5) screws (Illustration 1-6).
Illustration 1-6 Connector Panel Assy
Rear CN1 Panel Assy

Rear CN2 Panel Assy
VSPL Panel Assy
Film Cover
Film Cover
Screw (x5) Stud (x5)
Socket
Wrench
Screw (x5)
8. Install the new Rear CN1 Panel Assy by referring to steps 7. through 4.
10. END
1-10 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-6 REAR CN2 PANEL ASSY
Special Equipment
• Rear CN2 Panel Assy
• Tie Wraps
3. Disconnect the following cable connectors from the Rear CN2 Panel Assy:
- J1 ∼ J6 cable connectors
- J7 cable connector (rear connector)
- J8 (Ethernet) cable connector (rear connector)
4. Remove the two screws, and slide the Rear CN2 Panel Assy out of the Connector Panel assy (see illustration
1-5).
6. Install the new Rear CN2 Panel Assy by referring to steps 5. through 3.
8. END
1-11 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-7 DASIFN PANEL ASSY
Special Equipment
• DASIFN Panel Assy
• Tie Wraps
4. Disconnect the following cable connectors from the DASIFN Panel Assy:
- J1 and J2 cable connectors
- J3_RX cable connector (rear connector)
5. Remove the two screws, and slide the DAS IFN Panel Assy out of the Connector Panel assy (see illustration
1-5).
6. Check the DASIFN Panel Assy switch configuration.
7. Install the DASIFN Assy by referring to steps 6. through 4.
9. END
1-12 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-8 VSPL PANEL ASSY
Special Equipment
• VSPL Panel Assy
• Tie Wraps
4. Disconnect the following cable connectors from the VSPL Panel Assy:
- J1 and J4 cable connectors
- J2 and J3 cable connectors (rear connector)
5. Remove the two screws, and slide the VSPL Panel Assy out of the Connector Panel assy (see illustration 1-5).
7. Install the new VSPL Panel Assy by referring to steps 6. through 4.
9. END
1-13 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-9 AC PS ASSY
WARNING
Special Equipment
• AC PS Assy
• Tie-Wraps
• Tie-Wrap bases
2. For system with UPS Assy : Turn OFF the UPS power.
4. Remove the following covers and component from the OC:
OC Right Side Cover six (6) Screws

OC Rear Connector Cover four (4) Screws
OC Rear Cover two (2) Screws
5. Disconnect the following cable connectors and wires:
Rear Connectors - All connectors and wires
OC PS 5V - Two wire connectors
- GND cable
AC PS Assy - TM1 wire connectors
- AC1 power cable
- AC2 power cable
- GND cable
NPD Assy - J15, J16, J17 wire connectors
- J2, J4, J5, J6, J7, J8, J10, J11, J12, J13, J14 cable connectors
6. Remove the two cable holders by unscrewing its two (x2) screws.
1-14 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-9 AC PS ASSY (CONTINUED)

7. If installed, remove the Serial Port Expander (ST1800) power supply from over the AC PS Assy by cutting the
tie-wraps. (Illustration 1-7).
Illustration 1-7 Serial Port Expander (ST 1800) Power Supply Removal
AC PS Assy
Serial Port Expander

(ST 1800) Power Supply
Location of Tie–Wrap bases
1-15 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-9 AC PS ASSY (CONTINUED)

8. Remove the AC PS Assy from the OC by unscrewing its 4 screws, located at rear side of the AC PS Assy.
(Illustration 1-8).
9. If removed, install the Serial Port Expander (ST1800) power supply on the top of AC PS Assy using the tie-
wraps and their bases. (Illustration 1-7).
10. Install the new AC PS Assy by referring to steps 9. through 5.
13. END
Illustration 1-8 AC PS Assy Removal
AC PS Assy (rear view)
Screw (x4)
AC PS Assy (side view)
1-16 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-10 FAN ASSY

Note
After Fan Assy replacement, confirm air flow direction is right.
1-10-1 Front Fan Assy
Special Equipment
• Fan Assy
• Tie Wraps
2. Remove the Front Cover by unscrewing its two (2) screws.
3. Disconnect the power cable connector.
4. Cut the tie-wrap holding the power cable to the OC frame.
5. Remove the Fan Assy by unscrewing its 8 nuts and washers.
6. Install the new Fan Assy by referring to steps 5. through 3.
8. END
Illustration 1-9 Fan Assy
Cable Connector
Fan Assy
Note: Indicates air flow direction
1-17 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-10-2 FAN L ASSY
Special Equipment
• Fan L Assy
• Tie Wraps
3. Mark and disconnect all the Rear Connectors
6. Remove the Fan Bracket L from the OC frame by unscrewing its six (6) screws.
7. Remove the Fan L Assy from the Fan Bracket L by unscrewing its two (2) screws and washers.
8. Install the new Fan L Assy by referring to steps 7. through 5.
10. END
Illustration 1-10 Rear Fan L Assy
Rear Fan Bracket L
Rear Fan Bracket R

Screws (x4)
1-18 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-10-3 FAN R ASSY
Special Equipment
• Fan r Assy
• Tie Wraps
3. Mark and disconnect all the Rear Connectors.
6. Remove the Fan Bracket R from the OC frame by unscrewing its four (4) screws.
7. Remove the Fan R Assy from the Fan Bracket R by unscrewing its two (2) screws and washers.
8. Install the new Fan by referring to steps 7. through 5.
10. END
Illustration 1-11 Rear Fan R Assy
Screws (x4)
Rear Fan R Assy
1-19 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-11 FILTER ASSY
Special Equipment
• Filter Assy
1. Remove the Filter Assy by sliding the filter bracket.
2. Remove the Filter from the Filter Assy.
3. Install the new Filter by referring to steps 2. through 1.
5. END
Illustration 1-12 Filter Assy
Filter Assy
1-20 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-12 MONITOR
Special Equipment
• Monitor
• Installation / Functional Check/Adjustment Manual (CD-ROM)
4. Disconnect the signal cable from the back of the Monitor, and connect the cables to new Monitor.
5. Disconnect the power cable from the AC Power Supply.
6. Perform the following adjustment and test according to the CD-ROM manual, Installation.
MONITOR SET-UP
MONITOR FUNCTION TEST
7. END
1-21 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-13 MOUSE
Special Equipment
• Mouse
4. Remove the Mouse Cable Holder by unscrewing its 2 nuts.
5. Disconnect the cable connector (J7) from the Rear CN2 Panel Assy.
6. Install the new Mouse by referring to steps 5. through 4.
7. Verify that Mouse is operating normally.
9. END
1-22 OC
REV 27 2244773
1-14 KEYBOARD
Special Equipment
• Keyboard
4. Disconnect the cable connector (J17) from the Rear CN1 Panel Assy.
5. Install the new Keyboard by referring to steps 4.
6. Perform Keyboard Function Test according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
8. END
1-23 OC
1-24 OC
REV 32 2244773
SECTION 2 - PERIPHERAL ASSY
WARNING
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
2-1 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-1 MOD DISK DRIVE
Special Equipment
• MOD Drive
• Tie Wraps
10. Remove the OC Front Cover by unscrewing its two (2) screws.
11. Remove the SCSI Cover fastened with six (6) screws.
12. Slide the SCSI Bay out. (see illustration 2-1).
Illustration 2-1 SCSI Bay Location
SCSI Bay
2-2 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-1 MOD DISK DRIVE (CONTINUED)

13. Disconnect the rear connectors (signal and power cable connectors) from the MOD.
14. Unscrew the four mounting screws and slide the MOD forward and out of the OC.
15. Check the MOD Assy jumper configuration.
16. Install the new MOD assy by referring to steps 7. through 5.
17. Go to the Appendix - ”After installed a MOD”, at the end of this tab and perform the checking procedures.
Illustration 2-2 SCSI Bay
Signal Cable DASM Support

Connector Bracket Mounting
Screws
CD–ROM
Drive
Power Cable
Connector
5" MOD Drive (Option)
3.5" MOD Drive
Mounting
Screws
3.5" HDD
(Raw Data 1, for O2 Computer, SCSI)
(System Disk, for Linux Computer, IDE&SATA)
3.5" HDD
(Raw Data, for Linux Computer, IDE&SATA)
Note
In this Illustration, the locations of the CD-ROM Drive and the 5” MOD Drive are for O2 Computer.
For Linux Computer, the locations of the CD-ROM Drive and the 5” MOD Drive are exchanged.
2-3 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-1 MOD DISK DRIVE (CONTINUED)

18. Perform the following:
a. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.
Few seconds later, in the black screen, “Please wait... System is being started.” message appears.
b. Press [Alt] + [Esc] to display the desktop menu.
c. On the desktop menu, click on Shell icon located on the upper right of the screen. The shell window
appears.
d. Type as follows:
% su <Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> install.mod <Enter>
e. Enter Exit to terminate the shell.
f. Click on Startup icon on the screen, then system starts up automatically.
19. Perform an image archive test. (Read an image of the MOD and verify that no error occur.)
21. END
2-4 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-2 CD-ROM DRIVE/CD-RW DRIVE
Special Equipment
• CD-ROM Drive/CD-RW Drive
• Tie Wraps
5. Disconnect the rear connectors (signal and power cable connectors) from the CD-ROM/CD-RW (see
illustration 2-2).
6. Unscrew the four mounting screws and slide the CD-ROM/CD-RW forward and out of the OC (see illustration
2-2).
7. Install the new CD-ROM/CD-RW assy by referring to steps 6. through 5.
Note
Before install the new CD-RW drive, verify that the jumper is set as below:
jumper
2-5 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-2 CD-ROM DRIVE/CD-RW DRIVE (CONTINUED)
NOTICE
When replacing 2355488 with 5140287, if the pin number of Audio Cable receptor on the CD-
RW driver does not match with that of the cable connector, it is not necessary to connect
audio cable with CD-RW driver. (See Illustration 2-3)
Illustration 2-3 Difference of CD-RW
CD-RW
2355488
Audio Cable
Connector (4 Pins)
8. This step is only necessary when replacing CD-ROM drive with CD-RW drive.
b. After a few seconds, “You have 5 seconds to cancel Application startup...“ message appears.
Click on Cancel quickly.
2-6 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-2 CD-ROM DRIVE/CD-RW DRIVE (CONTINUED)

c. On the desktop menu, click on Reconfig icon located on the upper right of the screen. The System config-
uration screen appears.
d. Select Hardware to proceed to the Hardware settings screen.
e. Select CDRW-SCSI. Then click on Accept.

f. The system automatically reboots.
g. After a few seconds, “ProSpeed Applications do not autostart after system configuration changes.“ mes-
sage appears.
Click on OK.
h. On the desktop menu, click on Startup icon located on the upper right of the screen
i. Verify that the system starts up without error.
10. END
2-7 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-3 DVD-RAM DRIVE
Special Equipment
• DVD-RAM Drive
• Tie Wraps
3. Remove the six (6) screws at the front of the SCSI Bay and the two (2) screws at the rear of the SCSI Bay that
fasten the SCSI Bay.
4. Remove the SCSI Bay right dust cover by unscrewing its four (4) screws.
5. Slide the SCSI Bay out.
6. Disconnect the signal cable and power cable connectors from the DVD-RAM Drive.
7. Unscrew the four mounting screws and slide the DVD-RAM Drive forward and out of the OC.
8. Check the jumper settings of the new DVD-RAM Drive.
Illustration 2-4 DVD-RAM Drive

JP2 (Disable)
(Remove the below block)
Power Cable
connector to Adapter
Power Cable connector

to DVD-RAM Drive
Power Cable for SCSI DVD-RAM Drive
ID=1
Connect Audio Cable here
2-8 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-3 DVD-RAM DRIVE (CONTINUED)

9. Respectively connect the two Power Cable connectors to the DVD-RAM Drive and the Adapter. (See Illustra-
tion 2-4)
10. Install the DVD-RAM Drive by securing four mounting screws.
11. Connect the SCSI Signal Cable and Power Cable to the DVD-RAM Drive.
Illustration 2-5 Cable Connection to DVD-RAM Drive
DVD-RAM Drive
SCSI Signal Cable

to Adaptor

to DVD-RAM Drive
12. Turn on the OC main Power, system boots up and begins detecting SCSI Devices. Make sure DVD-RAM is
shown in the list of SCSI Device.
14. END
2-9 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-4 RAW DATA DISK / HARD DISK DRIVE
Special Equipment
• HDD(s) (Hard Disk Drive: Raw Data Disk and System Disk)
• One MOD
• Tie Wraps
1. Perform Saving State Data according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, System tab.
6. Disconnect the rear connectors (signal and power cable connectors) from the HDD(s) (see illustration 2-2).
7. Unscrew the HDD(s) mounting screws and slide the HDD(s) backward and out of the OC (see illustration 2-2).
8. Check the new HDD(s) jumper configuration.
• Raw Data Disk is 2282749, 2329957, 2376479 or 5166701 (For O2 Computer, SCSI)
Verify that the terminator should be connected to the end of the SCSI cable.
• Hard Disk Drive (Raw Data Disk and System Disk) is 2369083 (For Linux Computer 845, IDE) or
5133747 (For Linux Computer 865, SATA)
9. Install the new HDD(s) Assy by referring to steps 8. through 6.
11. Perform LFC (Load-From-Cold) according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, System
tab.
12. END
Data Recovery of Raw Data Disk ( Only for Linux system V/R 2.30 or later)
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Do not perform this procedure unless it is very necessary.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Disconnect the power cable connector from the Raw Data Disk (see illustration 2-2).
6. Switch ON the OC.
2-10 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-4 RAW DATA DISK / HARD DISK DRIVE (CONTINUED)

7. After a few seconds, “You have 5 seconds to cancel Application startup...“ message appears.
8. On the desktop menu, click on Shell icon located on the upper right of the screen. The shell window appears.
9. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
% su <Enter>
> recover_rawdisk -p <Enter>
10. “Do you really want to change RAWDISK?“ message appears.

Click on Yes.
11. Enter Exit to terminate the shell.
12. On the desktop menu, click on Shutdown icon located on the upper right of the screen.
13. Disconnect all the connectors from the Raw Data Disk.
14. Unscrew the Raw Data Disk mounting screws and slide the Raw Data Disk backward and out of the OC.
15. Check the Raw Data Disk jumper configuration.
16. Install the new Raw Data Disk by referring to steps 15. through 13.
18. Swich ON the OC.
19. After a few seconds, “You have 5 seconds to cancel Application startup...“ message appears.
20. On the desktop menu, click on Shell icon located on the upper right of the screen. The shell window appears.
% su <Enter>
> recover_rawdisk <Enter>
22. “Reformat RAWDISK (Click on No to cancel the process)?“ message appears.

Click on Yes.
23. About 2 minutes later, “Reboot the system?“ message appears.
Click on OK.
24. “Please confirm raid recovery has finished before reboot. The recovery procedure will take at least 1 hour.
Please open a shell and use “cat /proc/mdstat“ to check. Press Reboot to reboot the system.“ message ap-
pears.
Click on Reboot. The system reboots automatically.
25. END
2-11 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-4 RAW DATA DISK / HARD DISK DRIVE (CONTINUED)
Illustration 2-6 Raw Data Disk /Hard Disk Drive
For 2205368 Only:

Connect the end of the signal
cable to the HDD. This HDD is
internally terminated.
To NPSC board J16
Signal Cable
Blank connector
Terminator
(2282749)
Power Cable
3.5" HDD
Connector
(System Disk, for Linux Computer, IDE&SATA)
Mounting
Screws 3.5" HDD
(Raw Data, for Linux Computer, IDE&SATA)
2-12 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-5 NPSC ASSY
Special Equipment
• NPSC Assy
• Tie Wraps
6. Remove the SCSI Dust Cover by unscrewing its four (4) screws (see Illustration 2-7).
7. Disconnect the following wire and cable connectors from the NPSC Assy:
- J18, J19, J20 wire connectors
- J2, J4, J7, J13, J14, J16, J17 cable connectors
- J3 (MOD Option)
8. Remove the NPSC Assy by unscrewing its 5 screws.
9. Install the new NPSC Assy by referring to steps 8. through 7.
12. END
Illustration 2-7 NPSC Assy location
TH5
SCSI Bay J18 J19 J20

C6
F10
C5 C7
F1
NPSC Assy
J1
J
F2
F 8
J 2
13
F3
14
J 3
F4 TH3
J 4
F5
J 5
F6
J
J
J 6
F 9
F 7
17
16
J 7
J 8
SCSI Dust Cover J9 J10 TH4
2-13 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-6 FRONT PANEL ASSY
Special Equipment
• Front Panel Assy
• Tie Wraps
4. Slide the SCSI Bay out (see illustration 2-1).
5. Disconnect the cable connectors from the Front Panel Assy (see illustration 2-8).
6. Remove the Front Panel Assy by unscrewing its four (4) bolts.
7. Install the new Front Panel Assy by referring to steps 6. through 5.
9. END
2-14 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-6 FRONT PANEL ASSY (CONTINUED)
Illustration 2-8 Front Panel Assy Removal

For O2 Computer
J1 Connector
SCSI Bay
Front Panel Assy
Bolts (x4)
For Linux Computer
Front Panel Assy

Bolts (x4)
Front Panel Assy

Bolts (x4)
2-15 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-7 SERIAL PORT EXPANDER (ST1800) (FOR O2 COMPUTER ONLY)
Special Equipment
• Serial Port Expander (ST1800)
• Tie Wraps
2. Remove the Left Cover by unscrewing its six (6) screws.
3. Mark and disconnect the cables and power cable connectors from the ST1800 Serial Port Expander.
4. Cut the tie-wraps that hold the cables connected to the ST1800 Serial Port Expander.
5. Remove the ST1800 bracket from the OC by unscrewing its 4 screws, remove the ST1800 Assy (see
Illustration 2-9).
6. Install the new ST1800 Assy by referring to steps 5. through 3.
8. END
Illustration 2-9 Serial Port Expander (ST1800)
Serial Port Expander

(ST1800)
Screw (x4)
2-16 OC
REV 32 2244773
2-8 PERIPHERAL FAN ASSY

Note
After the Fan Assy replacement, confirm the air flow direction is right.
Special Equipment
• Peripheral Fan Assy
• Tie Wraps
4. Cut the tie-wrap holding the power cable to the OC frame.
5. Remove the Peripheral Fan Assy by unscrewing its 4 screws and washers.
6. Install the new Peripheral Fan Assy by referring to steps 5. through 3.
8. END
Illustration 2-10 Peripheral Fan Assy Removal
Peripheral Fan Assy
Screw (x4)
2-17 OC
2-18 OC
REV 20 2244773
SECTION 3 - HOST CPU ASSY (FOR O2 COMPUTER)
WARNING
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
3-1 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-1 HOST CPU ASSY
Special Equipment
• Host CPU Assy
• Tie Wraps
11. Loosen the two (2) screws (not necessary to remove) that fasten the lower part of the SCSI Bay (see Illustration
3-1).
12. Remove the OC Host Cover by unscrewing its four (6) screws (Illustration 3-1).
Illustration 3-1 OC Host Cover
SCSI Bay
Host CPU Assy
Loosen the two screws that fasten

the lower part of the SCSI Bay
OC Host Cover
OC Host Cover Screws (x6)
3-2 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-1 HOST CPU ASSY (CONTINUED)

13. Remove the Right Side Cover by unscrewing its four (4) screws.
14. Mark and disconnect the Audio connectors located on the right side of the CPU Assy (Illustration 3-3).
15. Mark and disconnect the remaining connectors (Host Video, SCSI, Ethernet, Serial 1, Serial 2, Keyboard,
Mouse, HDD connectors).
16. Remove the 2 screws that fasten the Host CPU Assy (Illustration 3-2).
Illustration 3-2 CPU Assy (front view)
Screws (x2)
Host CPU Assy
3-3 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-1 HOST CPU ASSY (CONTINUED)

17. Slide the Host CPU out, avoiding that the cables and connectors obstruct the Host CPU Assy removal
(Illustration 3-3).
Illustration 3-3 CPU Assy Removal
Host CPU Assy
Audio
Connectors
Screws (x2)
18. Install the new Host CPU Assy by referring to steps 17. through 14.
20. Perform the test scan and verify that the scanned image shows normally.
21. END
3-4 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-2 HARD DISK DRIVE
3-2-1 HDD
Special Equipment
• Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
• Tie Wraps
3-1).
4. Remove the OC Host Cover by unscrewing its six (6) screws (see Illustration 3-1).
5. Mark and disconnect the front connectors (signal and power cable connectors) of Host CPU Assy.
6. Slide down Ejection Lever of the HDD CPU assy and remove it from the Host CPU Assy (Illustration 3-4).
Illustration 3-4 Removing the Hard Disk Drive
Pull Ring
Power Supply
Lock Lever
Power Cable
Additional
Hard Disk Drive
(Option)
Audio Assy
Hard Disk Drive

Ejection Lever
Ejection Lever
System Module
3-5 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-2 HARD DISK DRIVE (CONTINUED)

7. Check the disk drive jumper configuration.
8. Install the new HDD by referring to steps 7. through 5.
(No jumper settings required)
10. Load the system software according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, System tab.,
Software Loading.
11. END
3-2-2 9GB (or 4GB) HDD to 18GB HDD (2330758) Replacement
NOTICE
System Software does not support HDD capacity of more than 18GB. HDD already installed
in the first HDD slot should be replaced by 18GB HDD and discarded.
Understand and follow the Safety Guidance Manual.
1. Refer to EXTENDED IMAGE DISK 20K OPTION FOR 18GB HDD manual (2334073)
3-6 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-3 ADDITIONAL HARD DISK DRIVE (OPTION)
NOTICE
System Software does not support HDD capacity of more than 18GB. If you use 18GB HDD,
refer to EXTENED IMAGE DISK 20K OPTION FOR 18GB HDD manual(2334073).
Special Equipment
• Hard Disk Drive (Option)
• Tie Wraps
1. Perform the similar way as for Hard Disk Drive to replace the HDD.
2. Perform the repartition and LFC as follows:
How to repartition and LFC for the sytem with V/R 4.x or later
1. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.
Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).
Starting up the system

Stop for maintenance
2. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.
3. Insert the CD-ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD-ROM drive of the OC.
4. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.
5. Type the following responses.
> boot -f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>

.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>
SGI Version xxxx, xxxxxx
fx: ”device-name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) 2 <ENTER>
fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)
After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)
3-7 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-3 ADDITIONAL HARD DISK DRIVE (CONTINUED)
----- please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)-----

[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> o <ENTER>
fx/repartition/optiondrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>

Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>

[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> exi <ENTER>
6. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot to perform LFC.
How to repartition and LFC for the sytem with V/R 3.x or lower
1. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.
Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).
Starting up the system

Stop for maintenance
2. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.
3. Cick on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.
3-8 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-3 ADDITIONAL HARD DISK DRIVE (CONTINUED)

4. Insert the CD-ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD-ROM drive of the OC.
5. Type the following responses.
> boot -f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>

.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>
SGI Version 6.3 ARCS Nov 26, 1996
fx: ”device-name” = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) 2 <ENTER>
fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)
After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)

[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/ [f]ormat
fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

fx/repartition> o <ENTER>
fx/repartition/optiondrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>

Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>
.................

fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>
6. Click on Done buttton located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not be
used at this time.)
7. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot to perform LFC.
3-9 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-4 SYSTEM MODULE
NOTICE
Before touching any of the components, attach the wrist strap to your wrist and to the metal
part of the chassis.
Special Equipment
• System Module
• Tie Wraps
3-1).
5. Mark and disconnect the front connectors (signal and power cable connectors) of CPU Assy.
6. Push the ejection lever down of System Module to unseat the System Module from the backplane of the Host
CPU assy (Illustration 3-5).
Illustration 3-5 Removing the System Module
Pull Ring
CPU Assy
Power Supply
Audio Assy
System Module
Ejection Lever
3-10 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-4 SYSTEM MODULE (CONTINUED)

7. Slide the System Module out of the Host CPU assy.
8. Remove a PCI Tray and Memory Module (DIMMs) from the old System Module, and transfer them to the new
System Module.
9. Install the new System Module by referring to steps 7. through 6.
10. Turn ON the OC main power.
Verify that the LEDs on the rear of the Host CPU Assy are lit. If not, push the power switch on the Host CPU
Assy (see illustration 3-6).
12. END
Illustration 3-6 Power Switch on the Host CPU Assy
Power
Switch
LEDs
3-11 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-5 MEMORY MODULE (DIMM)
Special Equipment
• Memory Module (DIMM)
3-1).
NOTICE
5. Mark and disconnect the front connectors (signal and power cable connectors) of Host CPU Assy.
6. Remove the System Module (refer to System Module).
7. Push the ejection lever down to unseat the System Module from the backplane of the Host CPU assy
(Illustration 3-5).
8. Remove the DIMM by pushing down the latches on both sides to release it, and pick up the DIMM and set it
aside.
3-12 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-5 MEMORY MODULE (DIMM) (CONTINUED)

IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
32MB or 64 MB DIMM replacement must follow the conditions below:
i. Memory modules should be replaced in pairs. Each memory bank pair must contain a
matched pair of DIMMs having the same size.
ii. Pairs of memory modules should be replaced starting from odd memory socket bank
number, e.g., Bank 1 and 2, Bank 3 and 4, etc., and not Bank 2 and 3 or Bank 6 and 7.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Illustration 3-7 Memory Module (DIMM) Location
Memory
Module
(DIMM)
DIMM
Sockets
9. Install the new DIMM as follows:

a. Hold the DIMM over the socket without tilting it.
b. Lower the DIMM, pushing it straight down into the socket gently but firmly.
c. You hear click as it is seated and the latches on each side of the module snap up.
10. Check the DIMMs visually to make sure they are installed correctly:
- The tops of the DIMMs of the same capacity should be even.
- The DIMMs should all be absolutely vertical (no leaning).
- The catches on the sides should be fitting snugly against the DIMM.
11. Install the System Module (refer to System Module).
13. END
3-13 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-6 PCI TRAY
Special Equipment
• PCI Tray
3-1).
NOTICE
6. Push up the ejection lever on the side of the PCI Tray to release it.
7. Push down slightly on the rear of the PCI Tray and remove it from the System Module.
8. Install the new PCI Tray by referring to steps 7. through 5.
Illustration 3-8 PCI Try Removal
Ejection Lever
3-14 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-6 PCI TRAY (CONTINUED)
Set-up
The Option key (Option Software) for each system is administrated by an unique number of the PCI Tray. Therefore,
after replacing the PCI Tray with a new one, the following procedures must be required to use the options. If it is
NOT, the option already installed can NOT be used on the new PCI Tray.
Notice:
The PCI Tray includes the unique system serial Number and it is written on the key MOD when installing the
Opion. When replacing the PCI tray with a new one, a mismatch between the system serial Numbers in a
new PCI tray and key MOD occurs. In this case, when reloading the key MOD, you must use a savestate
MOD. (In other words, you can not use a key MOD.)
10. To display the desktop menu:
Few seconds later, in the black screen, “Please wait... System is being started.” message appears.
b. Press [Alt] + [Esc] to display the desktop menu.
11. On the desktop menu, click on Shell icon located on the upper right of the screen.
The shell window appears.
12. Type as follows:
# revokeId <Enter>
Note
“I” must be entered as a capital letter.
“The smok.cfg file is from another host and will be reset. (This will take about 30 seconds.)” message appear.
3-15 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-6 PCI TRAY (CONTINUED)

13. Click on OK.
The “CT/e Software Options” or “ProSpeed CT Software Options” screen appears.
14. Select the Option to be installed using “Available Options” box.

15. Click on Install.
The option loading is started, then the options installed are displayed at “Installed Option” box.
Note
To remove the installed option(s), select the option(s) in the Installed Option box, then click on
Remove.
16. Click on Quit.
17. Click on OK.
18. Click on shutdown icon in desktop menu.
The system automatically reboots, then login as root.
19. END
3-16 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-7 PCI HOST CARD
Special Equipment
• PCI Host Card
3-1).
NOTICE
6. Remove the PCI Tray (refer to PCI Tray).
7. Remove the screw that secures the PCI Host Card, and slide the PCI Host card out of the PCI Tray.
8. Install the new PCI Host Card by referring to steps 7. through 5.
(Verify that PCI Host Card is completely seated.)
10. END
Illustration 3-9 PCI Host Card Removal
Screw
PCI Host Card
PCI Tray
3-17 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-8 CPU ASSY
Special Equipment
• CPU Assy
• Tie Wraps
• MOD (including the system state data)
(Option key information must be required to a new CPU board. The current Option key MOD cannot be
used to a new CPU board.)
3-1).
4. Remove the OC Host Cover by unscrewing its six (6) screws (Illustration 3-1).
NOTICE
6. Remove the PCI Tray (refer to PCI Tray).
7. Remove the CPU assy from the motherboard by unscrewing its two screws.
8. Install the new CPU assy by referring to steps 7. through 5.
Note
Make sure that the both board-to-board connectors stays properly connected between the CPU
Assy and main board.
Illustration 3-10 CPU Assy Location
CPU Assy
3-18 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-8 CPU ASSY (CONTINUED)
Reconfiguration
10. Power ON the OC main switch.
11. Approx. 30 seconds later the desktop menu and “Auto-Start” red window appears. Click on Cancel in the Auto-
Start window to enter the desktop menu.
Note
If you miss clicking the button, press [Alt]+[Esc] in the next black screen.
12. On the desktop menu, click on Reconfig located on the upper right of the screen.
The system configuration screen appears.
13. Click on Accept.

The system will be rebooted. It takes approx. 7 minutes.
14. END
3-19 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-9 AUDIO MODULE
Special Equipment
• Audio Module
3. Remove the Right Side Cover by unscrewing its four (4) screws.
3-1).
NOTICE
6. Push the ejection lever down to unseat the Audio Module from the backplane of the Host CPU assy (see
illustration 3-4).
7. Slide the Audio Module out of the Host CPU assy (Illustration 3-11).
8. Disconnect the Audio connector located on the right side of the Audio Module.
Illustration 3-11 Power Switch on the Host CPU Assy
Audio Module
Audio
Module
Ejection Lever Audio connector
3-20 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-9 AUDIO MODULE (CONTINUED)

9. Install the new Audio Module by referring to steps 8. through 6.
AUDIO FUNCTION TEST
12. END
3-21 OC
REV 20 2244773
3-10 POWER SUPPLY 170W
Special Equipment
• Power Supply 170W
3-1).
5. Disconnect the power cable from the Power Supply (see illustration 3-4).
6. Slide the lock lever to the right to release the Power Supply (see illustration 3-4).
7. Grasp the pull ring and slide the Power Supply out of Host CPU assy (see illustration 3-4).
8. Install the new Power Supply by referring to steps 7. through 5.
10. END
3-22 OC
REV 29 2244773
SECTION 4 - (IA) HOST COMPUTER ASSY (FOR LINUX

COMPUTER)
WARNING
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
4-1 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-1 HOST COMPUTER ASSY
Special Equipment
• Host Computer Assy
• Tie Wraps
4-1-1 Host Computer Assy (For Linux PC 845)

1. Saving System State Data by referring to Functional Check/Adjustment (CD-ROM) -> Introduction -> 3-4 Basic
Operation.
2. Shut down system.
4. Remove the front and right covers from the OC.
5. Turn off CB1, CB2 at right side of the OC.
6. Remove the six (6) screws that fasten the SCSI Bay (see Illustration 4-1).
7. Remove the OC Host PC Front Cover by unscrewing its four (4) screws (Illustration 4-1).
Illustration 4-1 OC Host Cover
Host Computer Assy
SCSI Bay
Loosen the six screws

that fasten the SCSI Bay
Host PC Front Cover

Screws (x4)
Host PC Support Screws (x2)

Host PC Front Cover
4-2 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-1-1 Host Computer Assy (For PC 845) (continued)

8. Remove the two (2) screws that fasten the Host PC Support (Illustration 4-1).
9. Move forward the Peripheral Assy and the OC Host Computer Assy to a position which is convenient to dis-
connect the related cables (Illustration 4-3).
10. Mark and disconnect the cable connectors.
Note
There are two types of Host Computer: 2369082-2 and 2369082-3. The connectors are different
between the two types of Host Computer.
For Host PC (2369082-2)
a. Disconnect the connectors on the rear panel of the Host Computer (Host Video, Ethernet, Serial 1, Serial
2, Keyboard, Mouse, Power Supply Cable, Bit3 Cable).
b. Disconnect the IDE cable connectors from the CD-ROM Drive and two Hard Disk Drives, two Power cable
connectors from Hard Disk Drives, the Outside Sense cable and the Outside Control cable from the Front
Panel.
For Host PC (2369082-3)
a. Disconnect the connectors on the rear panel of Host Computer (Host Video, Bit3 Cable, Ethernet, Serial 1,
Serial 2, Keyboard, Mouse, Power Supply Cable, Outside Control cable).
b. Disconnect the IDE cable connectors from CD-ROM Drive and two Hard Disk Drives.
Note
For the replacement between Host Computer 2369082-2 and 2369082-3, refer to section 4-1-4.
11. Slide the Host Computer and the Host PC Support out, ensure that no cables and connectors obstruct the Host
Computer Assy removal.
12. Unscrew the 4 screws and loosen the 2 straps that fix the Host Computer Assy.
13. Remove the Host Computer Assy from the Host PC Support. (Illustration 4-2)
Illustration 4-2 Host Computer Assy (Front View)

Host Computer ASSY
Screws (x4)
Strap (x2)
4-3 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-1-1 Host Computer Assy (For PC 845) (continued)
Illustration 4-3 Host Computer Assy Removal
Peripheral Assy
Host Computer
Assy
14. Install the new Host Computer Assy by referring to steps 13. through 4.
15. Check BIOS setting. Power ON the OC, press Meas Dist to reach BIOS set screen when the Pentium Logo
displayed on the screen.
Refer to Advanced Diagnostics -> OC -> HOST COMPUTER BIOS STANDARD SETTING.
16. Softeware installation:
Refer to CD-ROM, Functional Check/Adjustment -> System -> Software Loading to reinstall Software.
17. Restore OC to original configuration, then perform the test scan and verify that the scanned image shows
normally.
18. END
4-1-2 Host Computer Assy (For PC 845 to 865)

Refer to PC845 TO 865 UPGRADE INSTRUCTION (5143830) provided in the Upgrade Kit (5150475).
4-4 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-1-3 Host Computer Assy (For PC 865)

1. Saving System State Data by referring to Functional Check/Adjustment (CD-ROM) -> Introduction -> 3-4 Basic
Operation.
2. Shut down system.
4. If system with UPS, turn OFF the UPS power.
5. Cut off the power from the hospital Power Distribution Box and perform LOTO procedure.
6. Remove the front and right Covers from OC.
8. Remove the six (6) screws that fasten the SCSI Bay (See Illustration 4-1).
9. Remove the SCSI Bay right dust cover by unscrewing its four (4) screws.
10. Remove the OC Host PC Front Cover by unscrewing its four (4) screws (See Illustration 4-1).
11. Remove the two (2) screws that fasten the Host PC Support (See Illustration 4-1).
12. Move forward the Peripheral Assy and the OC Host Computer Assy to a position which is convenient to dis-
connect the related cables. (Illustration 4-4)
Illustration 4-4 Host Computer Assy Removal
Host Computer ASSY

6&6,%D\
Screws (x4)
Strap (x2)
13. Mark and disconnect the connectors on the rear panel of computer (Host Video, Bit3 Cable, Ethernet, Serial 2,
Keyboard, Mouse, Power Supply Cable and Outside Control cable).
4-5 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-1-3 Host Computer Assy (For PC 865) (Continued)

14. Mark and disconnect the connectors on the front panel of computer (2 SATA Hard Disk Cables, USB-IDE Cable
and Power Cable).
Illustration 4-5 Host PC865 Front Panel

SATA Hard Disk
SATA Hard Disk
5143136 Power Cable 5189991 Cables (x2)
SATA Hard Disk

Power Cable
SATA Hard Disk

Cables (x2)
USB-IDE
Cable
Note: Connect the SATA cable connectors to the front panel of the
Host Computer by fastening tightly screws with screwdriver.
15. Slide the Host Computer and the Host PC Support out, ensure that no cables and connectors obstruct the Host
Computer Assy removal.
16. Unscrew the 4 screws and loosen the 2 straps that fix the Host Computer Assy.
17. Remove the Host Computer from the Host PC Support (Illustration 4-4).
18. Place the new Host Computer Assy on the Host PC Support, fasten the four(4) screws and tighten the two
straps to fix the Host PC.
19. Slide the Host PC backward half in the OC.
20. Connect the cables to the rear panel of the Host PC (Host Video, Bit3 Cable, Serial 2, Ethernet, Keyboard,
Mouse, Power Supply Cable, Outside Control Cable).
21. Connect the cables to the Front panel of the Host PC (2 SATA Hard Disk Cables, USB-IDE Cable and Power
Cable).
22. Refer to Step 12 to Step 6 to restore the OC.
23. Check BIOS setting. Power ON the OC, press Meas Dist to reach BIOS set screen when the Pentium Logo
displayed on the screen.
Refer to Advanced Diagnostics -> OC -> HOST COMPUTER BIOS STANDARD SETTING.
24. Softeware installation:
Refer to CD-ROM, Functional Check/Adjustment -> System -> Software Loading to reinstall Software.
25. Restore OC to original configuration, then perform the test scan and verify that the scanned image shows
normally.
26. END
4-6 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-1-4 Replacement from Host Computer 2369082-2 to 2369082-3 for PC 845

Note
Service kit 2401213 is needed.
1. Remove the Host Computer Assy 2369082-2 from the OC Table by referring to step 3. through 13. in section
4-1-1.
2. Open the computer cover.
3. Remove the rack.
rack
4-7 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-1-4 Replacement from Host Computer 2369082-2 to 2369082-3 for PC 845 (continued)
4. Disconnect the two IDE power cables and the old PC inside control cable.
PC inside control cable power cable connector IDE power cable
5. Remove the baffle on the rear panel by pushing the baffle toward the inside of the computer.
baffle
4-8 OC
REV 29 2244773
6. Connect the new PC inside control cable provided in the service kit. Fix the DB25 connector to the port on the
rear panel of the computer. Connect the other two connectors to the right position inside the computer.
PC inside control cable
connectors
DB25 connector
7. Use a tie wrap to tie up the PC inside control cable and the original PC front panel control cable.
original PC front panel

control cable
tie wrap
4-9 OC
REV 29 2244773
8. Connect one of the two power connectors of computer to the power connector of the new PC inside control
cable.
power connectors of
computer
power connector of
PC inside control cable
9. Connect the new Host PC outside control cable to the new PC inside control cable through the DB25 connector
on the rear panel of the computer.
inside control cable
Host PC outside control cable
4-10 OC
REV 29 2244773
10. Be sure that only two IDE cables are left outside through the front panel of the computer. Now the Host
computer is changed to new type of 2369082-3.
IDE Cable
11. Install the Rack.

12. Install the computer cover.
13. Check to verify that the Recon Computer is replaced from 2369690 to 2369690-2.
14. Check to verify that the Front Panel is the same as the one in service kit 2401213.
15. Install the new Host Computer Assy back to the OC Table by referring to Step 13. through 6. in section 4-1-1.
17. Perform the test scan and verify that the scanned image shows normally.
18. END
4-11 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-1-5 Replacement from Host Computer 5143136 to 5189991 for PC 865

1. Remove the Host Computer (5143136) from the OC by refer to Step1. through Step17. in section 4-1-3.
2. Remove the two SATA Cables from the HDDs.
Illustration 4-6 Connect the SATA Cables

SATA Cable (5189897)
To HDDs
To Host Computer
Front Panel
Direction
Hole (x2)
Note: 5189897 includes two SATA cables

Inserted the screws in the holes of the SATA Cable Connector.
3. Connect the new SATA Cable (5189897) to the HDDs.
Note
Insert SATA Cable connector with reed , "click" is heard when it is well plugged in. Press the reed
on the SATA Cable connector to pull it out, otherwise the connector may be destroyed. (See Illus-
tration 4-6)
4. Install the new Host Computer (5189991) by referring to Step18. through Step26. in section 4-1-3.
Illustration 4-7 Host Computer (5189991)
Note: Connect the SATA cable connectors to the front panel of the
Host Computer by fastening tightly screws with screwdriver.
4-12 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-1-6 SATA Cables Replacement from 5132578/5132579 to 5189897 for PC 865

1. Remove the Host Computer (5143136) from the OC by referring to Step1. through Step17. in section 4-1-3.
2. Open the Host Computer Cover.
Illustration 4-8 Open the Host Computer Cover.
3. Disconnect the two inner SATA cable connectors from the Mainboard.
Illustration 4-9 Disconnect Cables from the Mainboard
Left Side View
SATA Cable (x2)
4-13 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-1-6 SATA Cables Replacement from 5132578/5132579 to 5189897 for PC 865 (Continued)
4. Unscrew the four (4) screws that fix the two inner SATA cable connectors on the panel.
5. Remove the two inner SATA cables from the panel.
Illustration 4-10 Remove the inner SATA Cables
Inner SATA Cable (x2)
6. Install the two new inner SATA cables by referring to Step5. through Stpe3.
Note
on the SATA Cable connector to pull it out, otherwise the connector may be destroyed.
4-14 OC
REV 29 2244773
Cable From (See illustration 4-11) To (See illustration 4-11)

1 Panel - SATA 0 (up) Mainboard - out
2 Panel - SATA 1 (lower) Mainboard - in
Illustration 4-11 Install new inner SATA Cables
Note: Because the inner SATA Cables fastened on the panel by screws, so
when the install the inner SATA Cables to the panel, adjust their position to
make easy to connect the SATA Cables (5189897).
Screw (x4)
New the Inner SATA Cable (x2)

Mainboard
Left Side View Top View
Out In
Inner View
Up
Lower
New the Inner SATA Cable Connector (x2)
4-15 OC
REV 29 2244773
7. Install the Host Computer Cover.
8. Stick labels to update P/N of Host Computer.
Note
Stick labels on both sides of the Host Computer, they should overlap the original labels, but don’t
overlay the MAC address.
9. Remove the old SATA Cables from the HDDs.
10. Connect the new SATA Cable (5189897) to the HDDs.
Note
on the SATA Cable connector to pull it out, otherwise the connector may be destroyed.
SATA Cable (5189897)
To HDDs
Note: Inserted the screws in the holes

To Host Computer of the SATA Cable Connector.
Front Panel
Direction
Hole (x2)
11. Install the Host Computer back to the OC by referring to Step18. through Step26. in section 4-1-3. (refer to
Illustration 4-7)
4-16 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-2 MEMORY MODULE
Special Equipment
• Memory Module
1. Remove the Host Computer according to 4-1.
3. Remove the Memory Module (see Illustration 4-12).
4. Install the new Memory Module by referring to step 3 through step 1.
Illustration 4-12 Memory Module Location
Memory Module
4-17 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-3 PCI HOST CARD
Special Equipment
• PCI Host Card
3. Remove the PCI Host Card (see Illustration 4-13).
4. Install the new PCI Host Card by referring to step 3 through step 1.
Illustration 4-13 PCI Host Card Removal
PCI Host Card
4-18 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-4 CPU ASSY
Special Equipment
• CPU Assy
3. Remove the CPU ASSY (see Illustration 4-14).
4. Install the new CPU ASSY by referring to step 3 through step 1.
CPU and Cooler
4-19 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-5 GRAPHIC CARD
Special Equipment
• Graphic Card
3. Remove the Graphic Card (see Illustration 4-15).
4. Install the new Graphic Card by referring to step 3 through step 1.
Illustration 4-15 Graphic Card
Graphic Card
4-20 OC
REV 29 2244773
4-6 BAREBONE
NOTICE
Special Equipment
• Barebone (Host Computer except PCI Host Card, Memory Card, CPU Assy and Graphic Card)
• Tie Wraps
• Attached Installation Guide from the supplier: Shuttle Inc.
1. Remove Host Computer Assy according to 4-1.
2. Remove Memory Module according to 4-2.
3. Remove PCI Host Card according to 4-3.
4. Remove CPU Assy according to 4-4.
5. Remove Graphic Card according to 4-5.
6. Install new Barebone by referring to step 5 through step 1.
7. Restore the OC to original configuartion.
Illustration 4-16 Barebone
IDE Cables PC Power

Connector
IDE Power Cable

PC Inside Reset Control Cable
4-21 OC
4-22 OC
REV 27 2244773
SECTION 5 - (IA) RECON COMPUTER ASSY (FOR LINUX

COMPUTER)
WARNING
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
5-1 OC
REV 27 2244773
5-1 RECON COMPUTER ASSY
Special Equipment
• Recon Computer Assy
• Tie Wraps
• Standard Keyboard
5-1-1 Recon Compute Assy (For PC 845)

2. Remove the Left and Right Side Covers.
4. Remove the two (2) screws that fasten the Recon PC Base (Illustration 5-1).
Illustration 5-1 OC Recon Computer Assy
Screws (x4)
Straps (x2)
Recon PC Base Screws (x2)
Recon PC Base
5-2 OC
REV 27 2244773
5-1-1 Recon Computer Assy (For PC 845) (Continued)

5. Slide the Recon PC Base out (Illustration 5-1).
Note
Do not damage the cable connectors on the front and rear panel of the Recon Computer.
Note
There are two types of Recon Computer: 2369690 and 2369690-2. The connectors are different be-
tween the two types of Recon Computer.
6. Mark and disconnect the cable connectors.
For Recon PC (2369690) (Illustration 5-2)
a. Disconnect the Outside Sense cable and the Outside Control cable from the Front Panel.
b. Disconnect the Power cable and the Net cable from the rear panel of the Recon computer.
Illustration 5-2 Cable Connectors
Front Rear
Outside Recon PC Power Cable

Sense Cable
Recon PC Inside Net Cable
Control Cable
Recon PC Outside
Control Cable
For Recon PC (2369690-2)

a. Disconnect the Power cable, the Net cable and the Outside Control cable from the rear panel of the Recon
computer.
Note
For the replacement between Recon Computer 2369690 and 2369690-2, refer to section 5-1-4.
7. Unscrew the 4 screws and loosen the 2 straps that fix the Recon Computer Assy .
8. Remove the Recon Computer from the Recon PC Base.
9. Install the new Recon Computer Assy by referring to steps 8. through 2.
10. Power On the OC, in desktop menu, click Reconfig located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration screen appears.
5-3 OC
REV 27 2244773
5-1-1 Recon Computer Assy (For PC 845) (Continued)

11. Select Network, the network setting screen appears, input new MAC Address. The MAC Address is the phys-
ical address of the Recon Computer. The MAC Address is on a Label attached on the cover of Recon Com-
puter.
Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment -> System -> Configuration Setup -> Network Setting.
Note
The MAC Address is devided by several colons. Be sure to type in the colons according to the La-
bel attached on the cover of Recon Computer.
Illustration 5-3 Network Setting
00:1B:AC:36:E9
L E
M P
X A
E
12. Click Accept after completing the configuration, then the system is rebooted.
13. END
5-1-2 Recon Computer Assy (For PC 845 to 865)

Refer to PC845 TO 865 UPGRADE INSTRUCTION (5143830) provided in the Upgrade Kit (5150475).
5-4 OC
REV 27 2244773
5-1-3 Recon Computer Assy (For PC 865)

2. If system with UPS, turn OFF the UPS power.
3. Cut off the power from the hospital Power Distribution Box and perform LOTO procedure.
4. Remove the Left and Right Covers from OC.
6. Remove the two (2) screws that fasten the Recon PC Base. (See Illustration 5-1).
7. Slide the Recon PC Base out (Illustration 5-1).
Note
Do not damage the cable connectors on the front and rear panel of the Recon Computer.
8. Mark and disconnect the cable connectors from the rear panel of the Recon Computer (Power Cable, Net Ca-
ble, Outside Control Cable)
9. Unscrew the 4 screws and loosen the 2 straps that fix the Recon Computer Assy (Illustration 5-1).
10. Remove the Recon Computer Assy from the Recon PC Base.
11. Install the new Recon Computer Assy by referring to steps 10. through 4.
12. Power On the OC, in desktop menu, click on Reconfig located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration screen appears.
13. Select Network, the network setting screen appears, input new MAC Address. The MAC Address is the phys-
ical address of the Recon Computer. The MAC Address is on a Label attached on the cover of Recon Com-
puter. (Illustration 5-3)
Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment -> System -> Configuration Setup -> Network Setting.
Note
The MAC Address is devided by several colons. Be sure to type in the colons according to the La-
bel attached on the cover of Recon Computer.
14. Click Accept after completing the configuration, then he system is rebooted.
15. END
5-5 OC
REV 27 2244773
5-1-4 Replacement from Recon Computer 2369690 to 2369690-2 for PC 845

Note
Service kit 2401213 is needed.
1. Remove the Recon Computer Assy 2369690 from the OC Table by referring to step 1. through 8. in section 5-
1-1.
3. Remove the rack.
4. Replace the PC inside control cable by refering to step 3. through 7. in section 4-1-4.
5. Connect the new Recon PC outside control cable to the new PC inside control cable through the DB25 con-
nector on the rear panel of the computer.
Recon PC outside control cable inside control cable
6. Be sure that no cables are left outside through the front panel of the computer. Now the Recon computer is
changed to new type of 2369690-2.
7. Install the rack.
8. Install the computer cover.
9. Check to verify that the Host Computer is replaced from 2369082-2 to 2369082-3.
10. Check to verify that the Front Panel is the same as the one in service kit 2401213.
11. Install the new Recon Computer Assy back to the OC Table by refering to step 8. through 2. in section 5-1-1.
12. END
5-6 OC
REV 27 2244773
5-2 MEMORY MODULE
Special Equipment
• Memory Module
1. Remove the Recon Computer according to 5-1.
3. Remove the Memory Module.
4. Install the new Memory Module by refering to step 3 through step 1.
5-7 OC
REV 27 2244773
5-3 CPU ASSY
Special Equipment
• CPU Assy
1. Remove the Recon Computer according to 5-1.
3. Remove the CPU ASSY (see Illustration 5-4).
4. Install the new CPU ASSY by refering to step 3 through step 1.
CPU and Cooler
5-8 OC
REV 27 2244773
5-4 BAREBONE
NOTICE
Special Equipment
• Barebone (Recon Computer except Memory Card and CPU Assy)
• Tie Wraps
• Attached Installation Guide from the supplier: Shuttle Inc.
1. Remove Recon Computer Assy according to 5-1.
2. Remove Memory Module according to 5-2.
3. Remove CPU Assy according to 5-3.
4. Install new Barebone by refering to step 5 through step 1.
5. Restore the OC to original configuartion.
Illustration 5-5 Barebone
5-9 OC
blank
5-10 OC
REV 27 2244773
SECTION 6 - NEST ASSY (FOR O2 COMPUTER)
WARNING
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
6-1 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-1 DBPCI ASSY
Special Equipment
• DBPCI Assy
• Tie Wraps
NOTICE
8. Remove the PCI board bracket by unscrewing its 3 screws.
9. Remove the DBPCI Assy from the PCI Backplane.
10. Check the Rear DBPCI Assy switch configuration.
11. Install the new DBPCI Assy by referring to steps 4. through 3.
Note
Slowly pushing the board, until its reaches the backplane.
13. END
Illustration 6-1 DBPCI Assy
DBPCI Assy
PCI Backplane
NPRIF Assy
PCI Board Bracket
6-2 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-2 NPRIF ASSY
Special Equipment
• NPRIF Assy
• Tie Wraps
• Service Note (YMS-SN079)
NOTICE
Verify the Parts No. (Revision) of NPRIF Assy, NPRM Assy and Software version when you
replace the NPRIF Assy. (Related information, refer to Service Note YMS-SN079.)
This Table shows that their combination and each combination will work correctly or not.
NPRIF Assy
P/N (Revision) 2177243 2177243-2
2177145-3 - -
NPRM Assy 2177245-4 (or Higher) X -
2251554 (or Higher) X -
6-3 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-2 NPRIF ASSY (CONTINUED)

NOTICE
3. Disconnect the two cable connectors (J1 and J2) from the NPRIF Assy.
4. Remove the NPRIF Assy (with sub-board and board bracket) from the PCI Backplane by unscrewing its 3
screws.
5. Check the Rear NPRIF Assy jumper configuration.
6. Install the new NPRIF Assy by referring to steps 5. through 3.
Note
8. END
6-4 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-3 SCSI CARD
Special Equipment
• SCSI Card
• Tie Wraps
NOTICE
3. Disconnect the cable connector (J5) from the SCSI Card.
4. Remove the SCSI Card from the PCI Backplane by unscrewing its 1 screw.
5. Install the new SCSI Card by referring to steps 4. through 3.
Note
7. END
Illustration 6-2 SCSI Card
SCSI Card
6-5 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-4 BP CONTROLLER CARD
Special Equipment
• BP Controller Card
• Tie Wraps
NOTICE
3. Disconnect the cable connector from the BP Controller Card.
4. Remove the BP Controller Card from the PCI Backplane by unscrewing its 1 screw.
5. Install the new BP Controller Card by referring to steps 4. through 3.
Note
7. END
Illustration 6-3 BP Controller Card
BP Controller Card
6-6 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-5 PCI BACKPLANE
Special Equipment
• PCI Backplane
• Tie Wraps
3. Remove the following components from the OC:
• DBPCI Assy Refer to DBPCI Assy
• NPRIF Assy Refer to NPRIF Assy
• SCSI Card Refer to SCSI Card
• BP Controller Card Refer to BP Controller Card
• If exists, other installed Option Card.
NOTICE
4. Disconnect the cable connectors (P8, P9 and PS3) from the PCI Backplane. (Illustration 6-4).
5. Remove the PCI Backplane by unscrewing its 7 screws.
6. Install the new PCI Backplane by referring to steps 5. through 4.
7. Install the following component:
• NPRIF Assy Refer to NPRIF Assy
• If exists, other Option Card.
9. END
6-7 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-5 PCI BACKPLANE (CONTINUED)
Illustration 6-4 PCI Backplane
PCI Backplane
6-8 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-6 NPRS ASSY
Special Equipment
• NPRS Assy
NOTICE
3. Mark and disconnect the cables and power cable connectors from the ST1800 Serial Port Expander.
5. Remove the NEST Cover from the OC by unscrewing its 4 screws (see Illustration 6-5).
Illustration 6-5 Serial Port Expander (ST1800)
Serial Port Expander (ST1800)
NEST Cover
6-9 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-6 NPRS ASSY (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the NPRS Assy from the NPRM Assy connector (see Illustration 6-6).
7. Check the NPRS Assy jumper configuration.
8. Install the new NPRS Assy by referring to steps 7. through 6.
Note
The CT ProSpeed FI systems come with two (2) NPRS boards, where the second one is conected
in the next slot below (Illustration 4-6).
Note
10. END
Illustration 6-6 NPRS Assy
NPRS Assy
J 1
C23 U 6 U 7 U35
U16 U35
U17
C22
U18 U19 U20
C47
NPRS Assy
U5 U9
U8
U15
U3 U4 U13 U14
C26
C25
U1 U2 U11 U12
C24
DS14
DS6
DS16
DS8
DS3
DS1
DS11
DS9
U19 U19
DS13
DS15
DS5
DS4
DS2
DS12
DS12
DS7
6-10 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-7 NPRM ASSY
Special Equipment
• NPRM Assy
• Service Note (YMS-SN079)
NOTICE
Verify the Parts No. (Revision) of NPRIF Assy, NPRM Assy and Software version when you
replace the NPRIF Assy. (Related information, refer to Service Note YMS-SN079.)
This Table shows that their combination and each combination will work correctly or not.
NPRIF Assy
P/N (Revision) 2177243 2177243-2
2177145-3 - -
NPRM Assy 2177245-4 (or Higher) X -
2251554 (or Higher) X -

NOTICE
3. Mark and disconnect the cables and power cable connectors from the ST1800 Serial Port Expander (see
Illustration 4-5).
5. Remove the NEST Cover from the OC by unscrewing its 4 screws.
6-11 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-7 NPRM ASSY (CONTINUED)

6. Remove all NPRS Assy from the NPRM Assy connector
7. Disconnect the two wire connectors (+5V Line, GND) from the NPRM Assy.
8. Remove the NPRM Assy by unscrewing its 9 screws.
9. Check the NPRM Assy jumper and Dip-switch configuration.
10. Install the new NPRM Assy by referring to steps 9. through 6.
12. END
Illustration 6-7 NPRM Assy
NPRM Assy
J 2 1 J 2 2
J27
J26
J28
J25
J24
J23
C2
C3
3
3
3
3
3
C41 C34
U8
U9
U 7 U11U12
JC243
C1
DL1 U23 U22 JP8
U10
U2 U5
U1 U4
J
J
U6
U24 U127
U17U18
u25
U13U14
U15U16
U3
C85
U38 U37
U128
C58
C59
U129
U155
U27
U31 U29
U28
s1 U26
U35
UI59
C81
C73
U36
2
1
U34 U32 U30
C60
C89
J 1 0 J 1 3
U163 U161 U139 U142 U145 U148
U169 U168 U141 U144 U147 U150
U165 U164 U140 U143 U146 U149
C93 C75
C94
J 1 9 J 1 4 C76
C95
J 1 8 J 1 5 C77
C96 J 1 7 J 1 6 C78
6-12 OC
REV 27 2244773
6-8 NEST FAN ASSY

Note
After the Fan Assy replacement, confirm the air flow direction is right.
Special Equipment
• Nest Fan Assy
• Tie Wraps
3. Disconnect the power cable connector (J11) from the NPD Assy.
4. Remove the Nest Fan Assy by unscrewing its 2 screws.
5. Install the new Nest Fan Assy by referring to steps 4. through 3.
7. END
Illustration 6-8 Nest Fan Assy Removal
Nest Fan Assy
6-13 OC
6-14 OC
REV 29 2244773
SECTION 7 - NEST ASSY (FOR LINUX COMPUTER)
WARNING
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
7-1 OC
REV 29 2244773
7-1 DBPCI ASSY
Special Equipment
• DBPCI Assy
• Tie Wraps
NOTICE
3. Remove the PCI board bracket by unscrewing its 3 screws that fasten the DBPCI on the Nest Assy (Illustration
7-1).
4. Remove the DBPCI Assy from the PCI Backplane.
Illustration 7-1 Nest Assy
Audio Card
Multi-Port Serial Card PCI Backplane
SCSI Card
BP Controller Card
Ethernet Card PCI Board Bracket
DBPCI Assy
7-2 OC
REV 29 2244773
7-1 DBPCI ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Assemble the new DBPCI Assy (Illustration 7-2).
Note
For assembling new DBPCI Assy, the PCI board bracket attached in the old DBPCI will be reused.
The steps a to c explain how to replace the bracket.
a. Remove the old PCI board bracket (which is shorter than the new one) from the old PCI board, by unscrew-
ing its 4 screws that fasten the bracket and the board.
b. Remove the new PCI board bracket from the new PCI board, by unscrewing its 4 screws that fasten the
bracket and the board.
c. Install the old PCI board bracket onto the new PCI board, to assemble the new DBPCI Assy.
6. Check the Rear DBPCI Assy switch configuration.
7. Install the new DBPCI Assy by referring to steps 4. through 3.
Note
9. END
Illustration 7-2 DBPCI Assy
DBPCI which need to be removed DBPCI (2135617-2) which need to be installed

A (PCI Board) A' (PCI Board)
B' (PCI board bracket)

B (PCI board bracket,
also called: DBPCI Support Step b
Part Number: 2382779)
Unscrew the four screws
Note: B will be always on the OC Nest
that fasten the metal bracket
System, and B is shorter than any B'
Step a
New DBPCI A'
Step c
7-3 OC
REV 29 2244773
7-2 AUDIO CARD
Special Equipment
• Audio Card (Illustration 7-1)
• Tie Wraps
NOTICE
3. Disconnect the cable connector from the Audio Card.
4. Remove the Audio Card from the PCI Backplane by unscrewing its 1 screw.
5. Install the new Audio Card by referring to steps 4. through 3.
Note
Slowly pushing the board, until its reaches the backplane. If the board is blocked during inserting,
remove the cable connection screw shown as below.
Illustration 7-3 Audio Card
Remove this Cable Connection Screw

7. END
7-4 OC
REV 29 2244773
7-3 MULTI-PORT SERIAL CARD
Special Equipment
• Multi-Port Serial Card (Illustration 7-1)
• Tie Wraps
NOTICE
3. Disconnect the cable connector from the Multi-Port Serial Card.
4. Remove the Multi-Port Serial Card from the PCI Backplane by unscrewing its 1 screw.
5. Install the new Multi-Port Serial Card by referring to steps 4. through 3.
Note
6. Connect the Multi-Port Serial card cable according to the labels on the cable connectors.
8. END
7-5 OC
REV 29 2244773
7-4 SCSI CARD
Special Equipment
• SCSI Card (Illustration 7-1)
- 2202402 (one channel)
- 5132060 (two channel)
• Tie Wraps
NOTICE
3. Mark and disconnect the cable connector (J5 or CH1/A) from the SCSI Card.
4. Remove the SCSI Card from the PCI Backplane by unscrewing its one(1) screw.
5. Slowly pushing the SCSI Card, until its reaches the backplane.
6. Install its one(1) screw that fasten the SCSI Card.
7. Reconnect the cable connector to SCSI Card.
Note
For SCSI Card with two channels, connect the cable connector to channel A.
If the Card is blocked during inserting, remove the cable connection screw of channel B. (See Il-
lustration 7-4)
Illustration 7-4 SCSI Card with Two Channels
Remove this
Screw
Ch1/A Ch2/B
9. END
7-6 OC
REV 29 2244773
7-5 BP CONTROLLER CARD
Special Equipment
• BP Controller Card (Illustration 7-1)
• Tie Wraps
NOTICE
3. Disconnect the cable connector from the BP Controller Card.
4. Remove the BP Controller Card from the PCI Backplane by unscrewing its 1 screw.
5. Install the new BP Controller Card by referring to steps 4. through 3.
Note
7. END
7-7 OC
REV 29 2244773
7-6 ETHERNET CARD
Special Equipment
• Ethernet Card (Illustration 7-1)
• Tie Wraps
NOTICE
3. Disconnect the cable connector from the Ethernet Card.
4. Remove the Ethernet Card from the PCI Backplane by unscrewing its 1 screw.
5. Install the new Ethernet Card by referring to steps 4. through 3.
Note
7. END
7-8 OC
REV 29 2244773
7-7 PCI BACKPLANE
Special Equipment
• PCI Backplane (Illustration 7-1)
• Tie Wraps
3. Remove the following components from the OC:
• Audio Card Refer to Audio Card
• Multi-Port Serial Card Refer to Multi-Port Serial Card
• Ethernet Card Refer to Ethernet Card
• If exists, other installed Option Card.
NOTICE
4. Disconnect the cable connectors (P8, P9 and PS3) from the PCI Backplane. (Illustration 7-1).
5. Remove the PCI Backplane by unscrewing its 7 screws.
6. Install the new PCI Backplane by referring to steps 5. through 4.
7. Install the following component:
• Audio Card Refer to Audio Card
• Multi-Port Serial Card Refer to Multi-Port Serial Card
• Ethernet Card Refer to Ethernet Card
• If exists, other Option Card.
9. END
7-9 OC
7-10 OC
REV 10 2244773
APPENDIX A - AFTER INSTALLED A MOD
After the 3.5 inch MOD or Option MOD installation, is indispensable to proceed the system functional check, due to
the differences of data transfer rate that exist between the SCSI devices. Moreover, it depends on the System
Software version installed on it.
This Appendix describes how to check the transfer rate of SCSI devices and how to proceed an adjustment if
required.
FLOWCHART
The illustration below shows the main flow of the checking and adjustment procedures.
START (After MOD installation)
Check the software version

V/R 4.16 or later
V/R 4.14 or lower

Checking transfer rate for all SCSI devices
25 nS or slower
24 nS or faster
Patching the file Manually
Verification
Installing V/R 4.16 (or later) Patch Software

(See the Note below.)
END
Note
As the manual patch procedure is a temporary solution, V/R 4.16 (or later) patch software
installation must be performed later to fix the bug thoroughly.
OC-1 OC
REV 10 2244773
1 SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSION VERIFICATION

Check the System Software version of your system:
• When the system is in V/R 4.16 or later, go to Section 4, Functional Check.
• When the system is in V/R 4.14 or lower, perform the following sections then go to Section 4, Functional
Check.
- Checking Transfer Rate for all SCSI devices
- Patching the File Manually
- Verification
- Installing V/R 4.16 (or later) Patch Software
2 CHECKING TRANSFER RATE FOR ALL SCSI DEVICES

1. Select Service -> System Tools -> Application shutdown -> OK -> Shell.
% su <Enter>
> scsiha -t 1 <Enter>
************************** Displayed (example)***************************

TARGET PARMS :[1] sync.period: 37 nS, sync. offset: 15, MARROW
:[2] sync.period: 12 nS, sync. offset: 15, MARROW
************************************************************************
Note this value!!! For this example, the transfer rate is fast
er than 24 nS, so the manual patch procedure and V/R
4.16 patch software installation are recommended.
Note
The TARGET PARMS (parameters) mean:
1: CD-ROM, 2: 3.5 inch MOD, 3: DASM, 4: ST-1800, 5: Pioneer 5 inch MOD, 6: Hitachi/Sony/(Max
Optix) 5 inch MOD
3. The transfer rate of the SCSI devices connected to the OC CPU will appear.
• If it is slower than 25 nS (≥25 nS), the problem may NOT occur. You need to do nothing. Enter exit
twice to exit from the unix shell. Then go to go to Section 4, Functional Check.
• If it is faster than 24 nS (≤24 nS), proceed to this procedure; first patch a specific file manually, then install
the V/R 4.16 (or later) patch software. Do not exit from a super user mode of Unix shell.
OC-2 OC
REV 10 2244773
3 PATCHING THE FILE MANUALLY

Note
If you have the CD-ROM V/R 4.16 (or later) Patch Software, skip ‘Patching the file manually’ and
‘Verification’ and go to ‘Installing V/R 4.16 (or later) Patch Software’. If you do not have it, this
procedure must be performed as a temporary solution until V/R 4.16 (or later) Patch software is
installed.
NOTICE
System Revision is NOT changed even if this manual patch procedure is performed. You
must order/install V/R 4.16 (or later) Patch Software ASAP!!!
1. Move the mouse in the shell window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
> cd /var/sysgen/master.d <Enter>

> nedit adp78 <Enter>
2. Move the screen so that 80 - 90 lines are displayed.

3. Modify ‘0x83’ to ‘0x43’ of the line just under ‘/*adapter 1*/’:
******************************* Displayed *******************************

u_char adp_device_options[ADP78_NUMADAPTERS][16] = {
/* adapter 0 */
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x00, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
/* adapter 1 */
0x83, 0x43, 0x83, 0x03, 0x03, 0x03, 0x83, 0x83,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
/* adapter 2 */
.
.
/* adapter 6 */
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83,
0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83, 0x83};
************************************************************************
0x83, 0x43, 0x83, 0x03, 0x03, 0x03, 0x83, 0x83
0x43, 0x43, 0x43, 0x03, 0x03, 0x03, 0x43, 0x43
4. Select File -> Save.

5. Select File -> Exit to terminate the nedit window.
6. Move the mouse in the shell window, then type the following to change configuration.
Verify that auto configuration is completed with no error message. If an error occurs, repeat steps 1 to 5
described above.
> autoconfig -f <Enter>
OC-3 OC
REV 10 2244773
3 PATCHING THE FILE MANUALLY (CONTINUED)

7. In the shell window, type exit twice to terminate from a shell.
8. Click on shutdown to reboot the system. Verify that the system starts up with no error.
4 VERIFICATION
1. Select Service -> System Tools -> Application shutdown -> OK -> Shell.
% su <Enter>
> scsiha -t 1 <Enter>
************************** Displayed (example)***************************

TARGET PARMS :[1] sync.period: 37 nS, sync. offset: 15, MARROW
:[2] sync. period: 33 nS
, sync. offset: 15, MARROW
************************************************************************
Note this value!!! The transfer rate is modified to the value

slower than 25 nS.
3. Verify that the transfer rate is modified to the value slower than 25 nS.
4. In the shell window, type exit twice to terminate from a shell.
5. Click on Startup.
6. Perform the following permanent solutions ASAP.
OC-4 OC
REV 10 2244773
5 INSTALLING V/R 4.16 (OR LATER) PATCH SOFTWARE

Note
As the manual patch procedure is a temporary solution, this V/R 4.16 (or later) patch software
installation must be performed later to fix the bug thoroughly.
Prerequisite
• CD-ROM V/R 4.16 (or later) Patch Software
Procedure
1. Prepare the CD-ROM V/R 4.16 (or later) Patch Software.
2. Select Service -> System Tools -> Application shutdown -> OK.
3. Insert the CD-ROM (application Patch Software) into the CD-ROM drive of the OC.
4. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software located on the upper right of the screen.
5. “Do you install software from CD-ROM?” message appears. Click on Yes.
6. “Do you install selected Patch?” message appears. Click on Yes.
The patch installation procedures are automatically started.
7. Click on OK in response to “Installation Successful. xxxxxxx”.
8. After completion of the patch installation, Click on Shell located on the upper right of the screen.
9. Type the following to eject the CD-ROM.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
Patch Verification
10. Click on List S/W Package.
11. Click on Patch.
12. Verify that information for the patch installed are displayed. (Example)
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Patch NPP41001: HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Patch Software 4.11
************************************************************************
13. Click on Close.
14. Click on shutdown to reboot the system. Verify that the system starts up with no error.
OC-5 OC
blank
OC-6 OC
REV 34 2244773
GANTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 SAFETY SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF GANTRY COVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2-1 Gantry Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2-2 Gantry Rear Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-2-3 Gantry Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
SECTION 2 - GANTRY STATIONARY - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 GNT DISP BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 FCV BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 RCV BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-4 SW BOARD ASSY (OF SW PANEL ASSY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-5 EMERGENCY SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-6 X-DISP BOARD ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-7 GANTRY MICROPHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8 POSITIONING LIGHT WINDOW ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-9 LOOK GUIDE ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-10 GANTRY FAN ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-11 REAR TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
SECTION 3 - GANTRY STATIONARY - II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 SLIP RING RECEIVER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1-1 RF RECEIVER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1-1-1 RF SHOE ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-1-2 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-1-2-1 HSDCD Receiver Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-1-2-2 HSDCD ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-2 BRUSH ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-2-1 RF Brush Assy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-2-2 HSDCD Brush Assy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-3 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (RF RECEIVER - DASIFN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
i GANTRY
REV 34 2244773
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 4 - GANTRY STATIONARY - III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 POWER SUPPLY (PS1) / (PS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 NAA2 ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3 COVER SWITCH ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-4 SDS BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-5 SERVO AMPLIFIER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-6 GANTRY MAIN BEARING GREASE-UP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-7 SERVO MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-8 TGP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-9 SUB BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-10 GANTRY ROTATION COUNTER (2310012) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
SECTION 5 - GANTRY STATIONARY - IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 TILT POTENTIOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
SECTION 6 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 COLLIMATOR FILTER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2 COLLIMATOR ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-3 APERTURE ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-4 APERTURE MOTOR DRIVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
SECTION 7 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 POWER SUPPLY ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-1-1 Power Supply For NPDAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-1-2 Power Supply (MDAS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-1-3 Power Supply For (GDAS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-2 OGP BOARD ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-2-1 SP ROM Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-3 DTRF ASSY (NPDAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-4 DCP ASSY (MDAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7-5 PHOTO SENSOR (GPLS1, GPLS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7-6 AXIAL DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-7 HV CABLE (ANODE / CATHODE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
ii GANTRY
REV 34 2244773
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 8 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8-1 RF TRANSMITTER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-2 HSDCD TRANSMITTER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3 SIGNAL INTERFACE BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-4 BALUN ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (DTRF - RF XMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-6 SLIP RING ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-6-1 RF Slip Ring Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-6-2 HSDCD Slip Ring Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
SECTION 9 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9-1 RF SLIP RING TO HSDCD SLIP RING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
iii GANTRY
iv GANTRY
REV 26 2244773
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
CAUTION
Possible injury! If the service angles fall over, they can injure persons. Therefore, after using
the service angles, keep them in a safe place and/or secure them from falling over even when
the customer or other persons accidentally hit the service angles.
1-1 GANTRY
REV 26 2244773
1-1 SAFETY SWITCH

Note
If the Right Side cover is removed the safety switch is triggered and the Gantry can not rotate. To
allow the Gantry to rotate, attach the bracket as shown illustration below.
DANGER
DEATH OR SEVERE INJURY!
THE SAFETY SWITCH OF RIGHT MAINTENANCE COVER MUST NOT BE
ACTIVATED BY THE WAY OTHER THAN CLOSING THE RIGHT
MAINTENANCE COVER (E.G. BY ATTACHING A PIECE OF TAPE). ONCE
THIS SWITCH IS ACTIVATED, THE GANTRY MAY ROTATE AND POTENTIAL
DANGER IS PRESENT IF RIGHT MAINTENANCE COVER REMAINS OPENED.
Illustration 1-1 Safety Switches

Front Rear
1 Gantry Safety
Switch
1
Buzzer
Allen
Screw
Power
Supply
Gantry Safety Bracket Gantry Safety
Switch OFF Switch ON
1-2 GANTRY
REV 26 2244773
1-2 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF GANTRY COVERS
Special Equipment
• Cover Stand
1-2-1 Gantry Front Cover
Removal of Front Cover

1. Set the Gantry to the 0° position and lower the table to the lowest position.
2. Switch OFF the OC power and the “Rotate”, “XG Power”, “Safety Loop” and ”Table/Tilt” switches at the Gantry
rear base.
3. Remove the four rubber caps from each Side Cover.
4. Remove the four Side Cover mounting bolts.
5. Remove the Side Covers.
6. Remove the dust-proof.
7. Install the four service angle studs onto the Gantry Front Cover.
8. Install the two service angle to the Studs. See Illustration 1-2.
9. Remove the four Front Cover mounting bolts.
10. Slightly disengage the Gantry Front Cover and disconnect the Microphone and Gantry Operating SW
connection from the Gantry Front Cover.
Illustration 1-2 Attaching the Service Angles
STUDS
SERVICE
ANGLE
1-3 GANTRY
REV 26 2244773
1-2 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF GANTRY COVERS (CONTINUED)
1-2-1 Gantry Front Cover (continued)

11. Connect the Gantry Operating SW and the Display connector to the inner Gantry Service Board. Refer to
illustration 1-3.
12. Hold the service angles, lift and move the Front Cover away from the Gantry as shown in illustration 1-4.
13. END
Illustration 1-3 Service Switch (front) Connection

SDS BD
FCV BD (on the CN1 Gantry Service
Gantry Cover) Board
Emergency
Switch
Front Gantry Cover
Illustration 1-4 Gantry Cover Removal
3 Vertical
2 Horizontal
1-4 GANTRY
REV 26 2244773
1-2 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF GANTRY COVERS (CONTINUED)
Installation of Front Cover
Special Equipment
• Glue 52# for Metal Ceramic attaching
• 30’ dry glue for Metal Ceramic attaching

2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power”, “Safety Loop” and ”Table/Tilt” switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Install the service angle onto the new Gantry Front Cover.
4. Attach the Gantry emblem and GE Logo which come with the Logo Kit to the location shown in Illustration 1-5.
5. To correctly attach the emblem.
a. Clean the surface on the Gantry.
b. Remove the backing paper of the emblem.
c. Carefully position the label (align the left and bottom sidelines of the label to the positioning tape, see Illus-
tration 1-5).
d. Rub adequately on the label surface so that the letters properly adhere to the Gantry surface.
1-5 GANTRY
REV 26 2244773

e. Remove carefully the front paper and positioning tape.
Illustration 1-5 Attach the Gantry Emblem
70mm
ProSpeed AI
35mm
70mm
CT/e
35mm
6. Install the new Gantry Front Cover (without Support (2238364)) to the Gantry temporarily, adjust it to proper
location.
7. Temporarily place the dust-proof based on the Gantry Rear Cover.
8. According to the distance between the dust-proof and the Gantry Front Cover, decide where to locate the Sup-
port on the Gantry Front Cover, avoid big gap between the Support and the dust-proof.
9. Estimate the location of the Support on the Gantry Front Cover, mark up with a pencil.
11. Clean surface of the Support and the Gantry Front Cover, adhere double-face pastern to the Support, then at-
tach it to the Gantry Front Cover according to the mark at Step 9.
Note
Seam of the Support locates in horizontal with positioning light.
1-6 GANTRY
REV 26 2244773

12. Mark with pencil along edge of the Support on the Gantry Front Cover.
Illustration 1-6 Mark sign on the Gantry Front Cover
Support
Positioning
Light
6HDP
13. Properly adjust position of the Support.

14. Use glue 52# to attach the Ring Cover (2143353) to the seam of the Support.
Note
Smear the glue 52# on the Ring Cover only to the overlap area with the Support.
15. Remove the Gantry Front Cover.
16. Use the 30’ glue to fix the Support onto the Gantry Front Cover, then wait about 30 minutes until glue becomes
dry.
17. Perform step 12 through step 3 of Removal of Front Cover procedure in their reverse order.
18. END
Note
For Front Cover location adjustment, refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, INTRODUCTION, 3-2-
3 Gantry Cover Adjustment.
1-7 GANTRY
REV 26 2244773
1-2-2 Gantry Rear Cover
Removal of Rear Cover

1. Set the Gantry to the 0° position.
rear base.
3. Remove the four rubber caps from each Side Cover.
4. Remove the four Side Cover mounting bolts.
6. Install the service angle studs onto the Rear Cover, repeat steps 7 to 8 (Front Cover Removal).
7. Remove the six Rear Cover mounting bolts.
8. Slightly disengage the rear cover and disconnect the Gantry control panel cables from the following connectors
of the RCV BD Assy of the rear cover.
• CN1
• CN9
9. Connect the Gantry control panel cables to the dummy connector of the inner gantry display board. Refer to
illustration 1-7.
10. END
Illustration 1-7 Service Switch (rear) Connection
RCV BD
Dummy Connector
CN1
Gantry Rear Cover
1-8 GANTRY
REV 26 2244773
1-2-2 Gantry Rear Cover (Continued)
Installation of Rear Cover
Special Equipment
• Glue 52# for Metal Ceramic attaching
• 30’ dry glue for Metal Ceramic attaching

3. Perform step 9 through step 3 of Removal of Rear Cover procedure in their reverse order.
4. END
Note
For the installation of the Gantry Support, refer to Installation of Front Cover.
Note
For Rear Cover location adjustment, refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, INTRODUCTION, 3-2-
3 Gantry Cover Adjustment.
1-9 GANTRY
REV 26 2244773
1-2-3 Gantry Side Cover
Removal of Side Covers

rear base.
3. Remove the two screw caps and mounting bolts, then move the cover forward or rearward to remove the cover.
4. Remove the right (or left) side cover.
5. END
Illustration 1-8 Side Covers Removal
Right Side Cover
Installation of Side Covers

3. Perform step 4 through step 3 of Removal of Side Cover procedure in their reverse order.
4. END
NOTICE
If the gap between the Side Cover and the Rear Cover is too big, adjust Side Cover vertically
to reduce this gap, refer to Functional Check/Adjustment, INTRODUCTION, 3-2-3 Gantry
Cover Adjustment.
1-10 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
SECTION 2 - GANTRY STATIONARY - I
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
2-1 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-1 GNT DISP BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• GNT Disp Board Assy
1. Set the Gantry to the 0° position and lower the Table to its lowest position.
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the Gantry front cover.
4. Disconnect the cable connector (SW Bd CN1, SW Bd CN2 and GNT Disp Bd CN1) from the Switch Board Assy.
(Illustration 2-2).
5. Hold the Switch Panel Assy and remove it by unscrewing its nine screws.
6. Remove the GNT Disp Board Assy from the Switch Panel Assy by unscrewing its 10 (ten) screws.
7. Install the new GNT Disp Board Assy by referring to steps 6. through 4.
8. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.
9. END
2-2 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-2 FCV BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• FCV Board Assy
4. Disconnect the cable connector (CN1, CN2, CN3, CN4, CN5, CN6, CN7 and CN8) from the DISP Board Assy.
(CN5:Breath Navi Option, CN6:Touch Sensor Option)
5. Remove the FCV Board Assy from the Gantry front cover by unscrewing its seven screws.
6. Install the new FCV Board Assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
7. Retie any tie wraps which were removed in step 4.
9. END
Illustration 2-1 FCV Board Assy Removal
Gantry Front Cover
FCV Board Assy
Screw
2-3 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-3 RCV BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• RCV Board Assy
3. Remove the Gantry rear cover.
4. Perform the similar way as for FCV BD Assy.
a. Disconnect the cable connector (CN1, CN3 ~ CN10) from the DISP Board Assy.
(CN3, CN4 and CN10:Rear SW Option, CN5:Breath Navi Option, CN6:Prescribed Tilt Option)
b. Remove the RCV Board Assy from the Gantry rear cover by unscrewing its seven screws.
c. Install the new RCV Board Assy by referring to steps b. through a.
6. END
2-4 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-4 SW BOARD ASSY (OF SW PANEL ASSY)
Special Equipment
• Switch Board Assy
4. Disconnect the cable connector (SW Bd CN1, SW Bd CN2 and GNT Disp Bd CN1) from the Switch Board Assy.
(Illustration 2-2).
5. Hold the Switch Panel Assy and remove it by unscrewing its nine screws.
6. Remove the Switch Board Assy from the Switch Panel Assy by unscrewing its 11 (eleven) screws.
7. Install the new Switch Board Assy by referring to steps 6. through 4.
9. END
Illustration 2-2 SW Board Assy and GNT Disp Board Assy
SW Panel Assy
Screws (x10) GNT Disp Board Assy

Screws (x9) SW Bd CN2 DISP Bd CN1
SW Board Assy
Screws (x11)
SW Bd CN1
Gantry Cover
2-5 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-5 EMERGENCY SWITCH
Special Equipment
• Emergency Switch Assy
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’and ’Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the Gantry Front Cover.
4. Mark and remove the wires from the Emergency Switch.
5. Remove the Emergency Switch with support plate from the ESW base by unscrewing its four nuts.
6. Unscrew the ring nut, and remove the Emergency Switch from the support plate.
7. Install the new Emergency Switch by referring to steps 6. through 4.
9. END
Illustration 2-3 Gantry Emergency Switch Removal
Gantry Cover
Ring/Nut
ESW Base
and Rubber Switch
Support Plate
Nut
2-6 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-6 X-DISP BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• X-Disp Board Assy
3. Remove the Gantry Rear cover.
4. Disconnect the cable connector from the X-Disp Board Assy.
5. Remove the X-Disp Board Assy from the IND Support Bracket by unscrewing its four screws.
6. Install the new X-Disp Board Assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
8. END
2-7 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-7 GANTRY MICROPHONE
Special Equipment
• Microphone
3. Remove the Gantry Front (or/and Rear) cover.
4. Disconnect the cable connector from the microphone assy.
5. Remove the microphone assy by pulling the device straight out from the Look Guide assy.
6. Install the new microphone assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
8. END
Illustration 2-4 Gantry Microphone Removal
Gantry Rear Cover

Gantry Front Cover
Look Guide (Rear)
Look Guide
Connector (Front)
Microphone Assy
Look Guide Assy
2-8 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-8 POSITIONING LIGHT WINDOW ASSY
Special Equipment
• Positioning Light Window Assy
4. Remove the Positioning Light Window assy by unscrewing its four screws.
5. Install the new Positioning Light Window assy.
7. END
Illustration 2-5 Positioning Light Window Assy Removal
Gantry Front Cover
Positioning Light
Window Assy
Screws (x4)
2-9 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-9 LOOK GUIDE ASSY
Special Equipment
• Look Guide Assy (Front / Rear)
FRU Primary Component

Microphone Look Guide BD1 Look Guide BD2
Positioning Light Window Assy - - -
Front/Rear Look Guide 2 ) - -
Front/Rear Look Guide 1 ) ) )
3. Remove and replace the Look Guide Assy (Front) as follows:
a. Remove the Gantry both side cover and front cover.
b. Disconnect the cable connectors (CN1 on the FBN Board and microphone) from the Look Guide Assy.
c. Remove the Look Guide Assy (Front) by unscrewing its four screws.
d. Install the new Look Guide Assy by referring to steps c. through b.
Illustration 2-6 Look Guide Assy (Front) Removal
Gantry Front Cover Screws (x4)

Microphone
FBN Board
Positioning Light
Window Assy
2-10 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-9 LOOK GUIDE ASSY (CONTINUED)

4. Remove and replace the Look Guide Assy (Rear) as follows:
a. Remove the Gantry rear cover.
b. Disconnect the cable connectors (CN1 on the RBN Board) from the Look Guide Assy.
c. Remove the Cable Support by unscrewing its two screws.
d. Remove the Look Guide Assy (Rear) by unscrewing its four screws.
e. Install the new Look Guide Assy by referring to steps d. through b.
6. END
Illustration 2-7 Look Guide Assy (Rear) Removal
Screws (x2)
Gantry Rear Cover
Cable Support
Look Guide Assy (Rear)
RBN Board
Screws (x4)
2-11 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-10 GANTRY FAN ASSY
Special Equipment
• Gantry FAN Assy
• Tie wraps
1. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Table/Tilt’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the both side and front covers from the Gantry.
3. Rotate the Gantry until the AUX. box reaches the 12 o’clock position.
4. Remove the two front holding screws from the Gantry front frame (see illustration 2-8).
5. Disconnect the power cable connector from the Fan assy (see illustration 2-8).
6. Install the new Gantry Fan assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
7. Switch ON the ‘Table/Tilt’. Verify that the Fan is operating normally.
9. END
Illustration 2-8 Gantry Fan Assy Removal
Gantry Top Cover
Power Cable Connector
Gantry Front Frame
Gantry Fan Front

Assy Holding
Screws
2-12 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-11 REAR TSW
1. Set the Gantry to the 0° tilt position and lower the Table to its lowest position.
2. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, ‘Table/Tilt’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove right and left side covers.
4. Install the Cover Stands on each side of Gantry and check that they are fixed secure.
5. Remove the rear cover from the Gantry
6. Mark and disconnect the Rear TSW connectors (x3) from the Gantry. (Illlustration 2-9).
Illustration 2-9 Rear TSW connectors
RCV
Board
Connectors (x3)
2-13 GANTRY
REV 11 2244773
2-11 REAR TSW (CONTINUED)

7. Remove the nuts and washers (x6) as shown in the Illustration 2-10.
Illustration 2-10 Nut and washer
Nut (x6)
Washer (x6)
Cables
8. Remove the Rear TSW from the Gantry cover.

9. Install and connect the new Rear TSW by following the steps above in reverse order.
10. Adjust the Rear TSW Assy position and fasten all nuts.
Note
The clearance between the Rear TSW edges and the Gantry cover should be minimum.
Note
Fasten the cables in excess to the Gantry rear cover with tie-wraps.
Make sure that the cables and connectors are fixed secure.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Certify that the Rear TSW is horizontally, vertically and center aligned.
Adjust the Rear TSW so that there is no clearance between its edge and the cover.
----------------------------------------------------------------------

a. Reinstall the rear cover.
b. Remove the cover stands.
2-14 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
SECTION 3 - GANTRY STATIONARY - II
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
3-1 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
3-1 SLIP RING RECEIVER ASSY
3-1-1 RF RECEIVER ASSY
Special Equipment
• RF Receiver Assy
3. Remove the both side and the rear covers from the Gantry.
4. Disconnect the RF cable from the RF Receive assy.
5. Remove the RF Receiver Assy by unscrewing its four screws.
6. Install the new RF Receiver Assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
8. END
Illustration 3-1 RF Receiver Assy Removal
Gantry Rear
Mounting Plate
Mounting
Screws
RF Receiver Assy
RF Cable
RF Shoe Assy
3-2 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
3-1-1-1 RF SHOE ASSY
Special Equipment
• RF Shoe Assy
1. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the RF Shoe assy as follows:
a. Disconnect the RF cable connector from RF Shoe.
b. Remove the RF Shoe by unscrewing its one screw.
4. Install the new RF Shoe assy by referring to previous step.
5. Perform following adjustment and check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment,
Gantry and DAS/Detector.
RF SHOE POSITION
DATA TRANSFER CHECK
7. END
Illustration 3-2 Removal of the RF Shoe
D3 (LED) U8
Slip Ring
RF Cable
Screw
RF Shoe
3-3 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
3-1-2 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY
3-1-2-1 HSDCD Receiver Replacement
NOTICE
Special Equipment
• HSDCD Receiver
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Cover by unscrewing its 4 screws.
5. Disconnect the RF cables from the HSDCD Receiver.
6. Remove the HSDCD Receiver by unscrewing its two screws. (Illustration 3-3).
NOTICE
Do not loosen any other screws from HSDCD Receiver assy than mentioned in the step 6. If
loosened other screws, the Receiver position must be readjusted.
Illustration 3-3 HSDCD Receiver replacement
HSDCD Receiver
RF Cables
Screw (x2)
3-4 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
3-1 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY (CONTINUED)

7. Replace the new HSDCD Receiver.
8. Reconnect the RF cables to the HSDCD Receiver.
9. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
10. Rotate the Gantry manually to perform the following checks:
Check to make sure that the HSDCD Antenna does not touch the Slip Ring during its revolution.
Check to make sure that the cables does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.
Check if the movement is smooth and there is no abnormal noise. Make more than one complete rotation.
11. Switch ON the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
12. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
13. Press Reset switch on the TGP Board.
14. Perform the Gantry rotation using TGP service switches and verify if the movement is smooth.
15. Install the rear, right side, and left maintenance covers.
17. Switch ON the ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
18. Perform Data Transfer Check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, DAS/Detec-
tor.
19. END
3-5 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
3-1-2-2 HSDCD ANTENNA
Special Equipment
• HSDCD Antenna
Note
The probability of a HSDCD Receiver failure is greater than HSDCD Antenna failure. Before
replacing the HSDCD Antenna replace only HSDCD Receiver and proceed the functional check.
NOTICE
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the HSDCD Receiver by unscrewing its four screws.
Illustration 3-4 HSDCD Antenna replacement

HSDCD Antenna
HSDCD Receiver
RF Cables
Screw (x2)
3-6 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
3-1 HSDCD ANTENNA (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Assy by unscrewing its two screws. (Illustration 3-5).
7. Remove the HSDCD Support 3, 4 from HSDCD Antenna (Illustration 9-17).
8. Remove the HSDCD Support 1 by unscrewing its three screws and washers (Illustration 9-15).
9. Install the new HSDCD Antenna.
10. Perfom the Assembling the HSDCD Receiver Assy (Section 9-1, RF Slip Ring to HSDCD Slip Ring
Replacement).
Gantry.
HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION
Illustration 3-5 HSDCD Receiver Assy
M6x12
Screws (x2)
HSDCD
Antenna
3-7 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
3-1 HSDCD ANTENNA (CONTINUED)

12. Reconnect the RF cables.
13. Attach the RF cable with tie-wrap.
14. Place the RF Cables close by HSDCD Antenna. (Illustration 3-6).
Illustration 3-6 RF cables and tie-wrap.
RF Cables close by
HSDCD Antenna
RF Cables
Screw (x2) tie-wrap
dispose the
cable
horizontally
17. Switch ON the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
22. Switch ON the ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
23. Perform following check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, DAS/Detector.
DATA TRANSFER CHECK
25. END
3-8 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
3-2 BRUSH ASSY
3-2-1 RF Brush Assy
Special Equipment
• Brush Assy
• Tie wraps
• Kim Wipe
CAUTION
When servicing the Slip Rings and Brushes, wait approximately five minutes after switching
OFF the CB1 in the PDU for all capacitors in the XG Unit to discharge.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when working with slip ring components to avoid contact, inhalation, and
ingestion of slip ring brush powder.
Gloves : Large size : 46-194427P400, X-Large size : 46-194427P401

HEPA Vacuum Cleaner : 46-297933P1 to remove brush block powder (dust).
Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The powder inside the glove can
contaminate the ring.

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the PDU front cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
b. Switch OFF the CB1 and CB5 breakers in the PDU.
c. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
d. Remove the Gantry both side and rear covers.
3-9 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
3-2 BRUSH ASSY (CONTINUED)

2. Remove the Brush Block Assy from the Gantry as follows:
a. Disconnect the cable connector CN1 connected to the Signal Brush board.
b. Remove the protect cover from the Brush Block Assy by unscrewing its 4 screws.
c. Mark and disconnect all power cables (including the GND cable) from the power bars.
d. Remove the Brush Block assy by unscrewing its four(4) Allen screws.
Illustration 3-7 Brush Block Assy
Power Cables
(M6:48kgf.cm)
(M4:20kgr.cm) Allen Screw (x4)
Protect Cover
Power Bar
Adjustment
Screws
Signal Brush Board

CN1
Brush Block Assy
Mounting Plate
3-10 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
NOTICE
Do not touch the slip ring surfaces. Also, do not touch the brush surfaces.
Signal Brush Board Replacement

1. Remove the Signal Brush Board from the Brush Block Assy by unscrewing its 6 screws.
2. Attach the new Signal Brush Board to the Brush Block Assy using the 6 screws removed in the previous step.
Power Brush Replacement

1. Unscrew the four studs from the old Brush Block assy, then install them to the new one.
2. Remove the Signal Brush Board from the Brush Block Assy by unscrewing its 6 screws.
3. Attach the Signal Brush Board removed previous step to the new Brush Block Assy .
Illustration 3-8 Power Brush / Signal Brush Board Removal
Brush Block Assy

Stud (x4)
(20kgf.cm)
Signal Brushes
Power Brushes
Screw (x6)
(20kgf.cm)
Pin
Signal Brush Board
3-11 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

4. Hold the Brush Block Assy in position, and align the pin on the back face of the Brush Block Assy to the
corresponding hole.
Visually inspect the brush position. (Verify that the brushes are centered between the slip ring track barriers.)
5. Restore the Brush Block Assy to original configuration by referring to step 2.
6. Rotate the Gantry manually to check if the movement is smooth and there is no abnormal noise. Make more
than one complete rotation.
7. Perform the following checks according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, Gantry.
SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT
GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT
MOVEMENT CHECK
8. Perform following check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, DAS/Detector.
DATA TRANSFER CHECK
9. Restore the Gantry and the PDU to the original configuration.
10. END
3-12 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
3-2-2 HSDCD Brush Assy
Special Equipment
• Brush Assy
• Tie wraps
• Kim Wipe
CAUTION
CAUTION

Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The power inside the glove can
3-13 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
NOTICE
The Brushes are very fragile. Handle the Brush Block with care.
For an eventual brush breakage, check the type and replace it provided in the
FieldEmergency Kit Assy.
1. Preparation:
d. Remove the Gantry rear cover.
3-14 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
REMOVAL
1. Remove the HSDCD Brush Block Assy from the Gantry as follows:
a. Disconnect the cable connector CN1 connected to the Signal Brush board.
b. Remove the Terminal cover from the HSDCD Brush Block Assy by unscrewing its 2 screws.
d. Remove the HSDCD Brush Block assy by unscrewing its 2 border allen screws. (Illustration 3-9).
e. Replace the removed screws for Pin Jigs provided in the Service Tool kit.
f. Remove the remaining 2 middle allen screws.
NOTICE
Do not screw (or unscrew) the Adjustment Screws and Nuts. The Gantry design fixes the
Brush Block position.
Illustration 3-9 HSDCD Brush Block Assy removal
Power Cables
(M6:6N.m)
Terminal Cover
(M4:1.8N.m)
Power Cables
DO NOT
Screws (x2)
SCREW/
UNSCREW THE
ADJUSMENT
SCREWS AND
NUTS
Connector
Signal CN1
Middle Power
Screws (x2) Brushes
Signal
Brushes
DO NOT
SCREW/
UNSCREW THE
ADJUSMENT
SCREWS AND
NUTS Border Screws (x2)
3-15 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

g. Remove the HSDCD Brush Block always keeping in the perpendicular direction with the Slip Ring to avoid
a brush breakage.
Illustration 3-10 HSDCD Brush Block Removal
MOVE THE BRUSH BLOCK IN

PERPENDICULAR DIRECTION
IN RELATION WITH SLIP RING
HSDCD
Slip Ring
Remove the Brush
Block with care
Slip Ring
Guide HSDCD Barrier Slip Ring
Pins Brush
Block
Brush Brush
Block
h. Remove the Guide Pins (x2).
NOTICE
Do not touch the slip ring surfaces. Also, do not touch the brush surfaces.
NOTICE
Do not polish the slip ring surfaces and the brush surfaces using an Abrasive (or
equivalent).
3-16 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
SIGNAL BRUSH REPLACEMENT
NOTICE
For an eventual brush breakage, check the type and replace it provided in the Field
Emergency Kit Assy.
There are two types of Signal Brushes as follows. Verify the color of terminal to distinguish each type . (Illustration
3-11).
• CAG Signal Brush Tip: Installed at the lowest two rows (6 Signal Brushes), with RED colored Terminal.
• CA40 Signal Brush Tip: the remaining Signal Brushes. (Terminal not colored).
Illustration 3-11 Signal Brush types
CA40 Signal Brush Tip
CAG Signal Brush Tip

(Only these 6 Signal
Brushes, in RED)
Red colored
3-17 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

1. Replace the Signal Brush Tip as follows:
a. Remove the Brush Cap of Signal Brush that will be replaced.
b. Identify the type of Signal Brush Tip.
c. Remove the Signal Brush from the HSDCD Brush Block Assy.
d. Insert the new Signal Brush.
e. Fasten the Brush Cap.
Illustration 3-12 Signal Brush replacement
Signal Brush
Brush Cap
Power Brush
3-18 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
POWER BRUSH REPLACEMENT
NOTICE
For an eventual brush breakage, check the type and replace it provided in the Field
Emergency Kit Assy.
1. Replace the Power Brush Tip as follows:
a. Remove the Brush Cap of Power Brush that will be replaced.
b. Remove the Power Brush from the HSDCD Brush Block Assy.
c. Insert the new Power Brush.
d. Fasten the Brush Cap.
3-19 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Rubbing the brushes
NOTICE
1. Rub the brushes to glide smoothly as follows:
a. Push and free few times the replaced brushes by finger with a kim wipe between the finger and brush and
check whether they glide into the brush holder. (Illustration 3-13).
Illustration 3-13 Gliding the brushes
Brushes
3-20 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
INSTALLATION
1. Install the Brush Block Assy as follows:
a. Insert the Guide Pins (x2) in the Brush Block. (Illustration 3-14).
NOTICE
Certify that the brushes of the Brush Block Assy are correctly in contact and centered with
the groove of Slip Ring.
Move the Brush Block always in perpendicular direction in relation with the Slip Ring
surface.
b. Insert the Brush Block Assy through the Guide Pins. Take care to not to damage the brushes.
Illustration 3-14 Brush Block and guide pins
Guide Pins
3-21 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Illustration 3-15 Brush Block install

HSDCD Slip Ring
Guide
Pins HSDCD Brush Block
c. When inserting the Brush Block, certify that the Brushes are positioned in the middle of Slip Ring Track and
not in contact with Slip Ring Barrier.
Illustration 3-16 Certify that the Brushes are in contact with the middle of Slip Ring Track
Slip Ring
Slip Ring Barrier
Slip Ring Track
Brush
Brush Block
3-22 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

d. Push the Brush Block against the Slip Ring and the Brush Block Plate.
e. Fasten the 2 Allen screws gradually. (Illustration 3-17).
Illustration 3-17 Brush Block Assy install
M6x35 Allen Screw pushing si-

screws (x4) multaneously the
Brush Block
Torque=11.5N.m
against the Slip
Ring and the Brush
Block Plate
NOTICE
Certify that the brushes of the Brush Block Assy are correctly in contact with the groove of
Slipring.
f. Remove the Guide Pins.
g. Fasten the remaining 2 Allen screws gradually.
2. Restore the Brush Block Assy to original configuration by referring to step 2.
4. Perform the following checks according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, Gantry and
DAS/Detector.
SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT
MOVEMENT CHECK
DATA TRANSFER CHECK
5. Restore the Gantry and the PDU to the original configuration.
6. END
3-23 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
3-3 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (RF RECEIVER - DASIFN)
Special Equipment
• Gantry FAN Assy
• Tie wraps
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, and ’Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the Gantry both side and rear covers.
4. Remove the OC rear cover by unscrewing its 4 screws.
5. Disconnect the Optical Fiber Cable connector (J13) from the DASIFN Assy.
6. Disconnect the cable connector from the RF Receiver Assy.
7. Cut the tie-wraps holding the cable to the Gantry frame, and remove it from the Gantry.
8. Install the new Optical Fiber Cable by referring to steps 7. through 5.
9. Restore the Gantry to the original configuration.
10. Restore the OC to the original configuration.
11. END
3-24 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
SECTION 4 - GANTRY STATIONARY - III
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
4-1 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-1 POWER SUPPLY (PS1) / (PS2)
Special Equipment
• Power Supply (PS1) / Power Supply (PS2)
• Tie wraps
Power Supply (PS1)

1. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Table/Tilt’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the rear and left side Gantry covers.
3. Pop free and remove the plastic guard from the front of the power supply terminal.
4. Mark and remove the wires from the terminal.
5. Unscrew the three front support screws, and slide it forward and out of the Gantry side frame.
6. Slide the new power supply into place, and screw the front support screws into place.
7. Attach the wires removed from the removed from the old unit.
DC POWER SUPPLIES
10. END
Power Supply (PS2)

1. Perform the similar way as for Power Supply (PS1).
2. END
4-2 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-1 POWER SUPPLY (PS1) / (PS2) (CONTINUED)
Illustration 4-1 Power Supply (PS1) / (PS2) Removal
Gantry Left Side
Power Supply (PS1)
Screw (x 3)
Power Supply (PS1)
Screw (x 3)
4-3 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-2 NAA2 ASSY
Special Equipment
• NAA2 Assy
2. Remove the left side Gantry cover.
3. Remove the four cable connectors (CN2, CN3, CN4 and CN6) from the NAA2 Assy.
4. Unscrew four screws, and remove the NAA2 Assy by pulling the device straight out from the TGP connector
(CN6).
5. Install the new NAA2 Assy by referring to steps 4. through 3.
AUDIO FUNCTION TEST
8. END
4-4 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-3 COVER SWITCH ASSY
Special Equipment
• Cover Switch Assy
• Tie wraps
2. Remove the right side Gantry cover.
3. Disconnect the cable connector (CN34) leading from the Cover Switch Assy.
4. Cut the tie-wraps holding the cables to the Gantry side frame.
5. Remove the cover switch (x 5) by unscrewing its two screws (x5), and remove the Cover Switch Assy.
6. Install the new Cover Switch Assy by referring to step 5 to 3.
7. Verify that cover switches are operating normally.
9. END
4-5 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-4 SDS BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• SDS Board Assy
3. Remove the Gantry both side and front covers.
4. Disconnect the two cable connectors (CN1 and CN2) from the SDS Board assy.
5. Remove the SDS Board Assy by unscrewing its four screws.
6. Install the new SDS Board Assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
7. Check that the switches on the SDS Board Assy can be operated normally.
9. END
Illustration 4-2 SDS Board Assy Location
CN1
SDS Board
Assy
4-6 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-5 SERVO AMPLIFIER
Special Equipment
• Servo Amplifier Assy
• Tie wraps
1. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Table/Tilt’and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Turn OFF the power from the OC.
3. Remove the Gantry left side cover.
4. Label and remove the wires attached to terminals ‘TB2’ of the Servo Amplifier.
5. Disconnect the two cable connectors from CN1 and CN2.
Note
Before disconnecting CN1 and CN2, loosen the locking screws (see illustration 4-3).
6. Remove the amplifier by unscrewing its four screws with a long Phillips (plus) screw driver.
Illustration 4-3 Servo Amplifier Cable Disconnection
Screws (x 4)
Push Tab
CN1
CN2
Lock Screw
Push Tab
TB2
Lock Screw
4-7 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-5 SERVO AMPLIFIER (CONTINUED)

7. Attach the furnished amplifier using the screws removed in step 6.
8. Connect all wires removed from the terminal ’TB2’ to the new Servo Amplifier terminals according to their
labels.
9. Connect the two cable connectors to CN1 and CN2.
10. Switch ON the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Table/Tilt’and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
11. Turn ON the power from the OC.
12. Perform the minor adjustments in the following order according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check &
Adjustment, Gantry, Rotation Operation:
MOVEMENT CHECK
ROTATION VELOCITY OFFSET
ROTATION SPEED
ROTATION DECELERATION
13. END
4-8 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-6 GANTRY MAIN BEARING GREASE-UP
Special Equipment
• Grease Gun
• Grease Cartridge : Shell Alvania grease#2 NEW (U0411BD)
1. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ and ’XG Power’ switches at the rear Gantry base.
2. Remove the both side covers from the Gantry.
Note
New grease must be used. Do NOT reuse a grease cartridge; open a brand new grease cartridge
every time you perform this operation.
4. Input the grease(SHELL ALVANIA grease #2) into the grease gun.
5. Attach the grease gun to the bearing grease nipple (see illustration 4-4).
Illustration 4-4 Grease Nipple (fitting)
Grease Nipple
Tilt Cylinder
4-9 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-6 GANTRY MAIN BEARING GREASE-UP (CONTINUED)
NOTICE
Slow pumping operation is required.
If pumped fast, new grease will be soon ejected so that new grease can NOT reach the main
bearing.
6. Inject the grease (one cartridge) while rotating the Gantry slowly by hand. Any grease which leaks between the
shaft of main bearing and housing must be wiped clean.
8. Switch ON the ’Rotate’ and ’XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
10. Rotate the Gantry for approximately 10 minutes using the toggle switches on the TGP board and verify that the
Gantry rotation is smooth.
11. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ and ’XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
12. Wipe clean any grease which has leaked between the bearing and the housing.
13. Install the Gantry rear and both side covers.
14. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
15. END
4-10 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-7 SERVO MOTOR
Special Equipment
• Axial Motor Assy
• Tie wraps
• CRC of equivalent (WD40, etc...)
2. Remove the front, rear and both side covers from the Gantry.
3. Switch on the Service Switch on the SUB Board near the TGP Board.
4. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 6 o’clock position.
a. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board.
b. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 6 o’clock position by hand.
c. Insert the Azimuth lock pin.
d. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board.
5. Remove the bottom side cover.
6. Remove the Axial Motor Pulley cover by unscrewing its 3 screws.
7. Remove the Axial Drive Belt from the Axial Motor Pulley (see illustration 7-7).
a. Loosen the three mounting plate bolts
b. Loosen the lock nut of the belt tension adjuster.
c. Loosen the adjustment bolt to relieve drive belt tension.
d. Remove the axial drive belt from the axial motor pulley.
4-11 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-7 SERVO MOTOR (CONTINUED)

8. Disconnect the encoder cable connector connected to the Axial Motor assy.
9. Disconnect the power cable connector connected to the Axial Motor assy.
10. Remove the GND cable from the Axial Motor assy.
11. Remove the Axial Motor from the mounting plate by unscrewing its 4 Allen screws.
12. Remove the Sleeve and Axial Motor Pulley.
a. Remove the three Allen screws.
b. Insert the two Allen screws into the ’Release Hole’ at the Sleeve.
c. Release the Sleeve by screwing down the two Allen screws and remove the Sleeve from the Axial Motor
shaft.
d. Remove the Axial Motor Pulley from the Axial Motor shaft.
Illustration 4-5 Removal of the Axial Motor
Allen Screws
Encoder Cable
Connector Pulley
Sleeve
GND Cable
Release
Power Cable Hole
Connector
Release Allen Screws
Hole
4-12 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-7 SERVO MOTOR (CONTINUED)

13. Clean and lubricate the Axial Motor shaft surface using the light grade machine oil such as CRC, WD40, etc.
14. Insert and push the Axial Motor Pulley all the way onto the shaft of the new Axial Motor assy.
15. Insert the Sleeve and progressively tighten each screw using the repeated sequence show in illustration 4-6.
a. Tighten each screw with 2N.m.
b. Tighten each screw with 4N.m.
c. Tighten each screw with 8N.m.
Illustration 4-6 Sleeve Tightening
Sleeve Release Hole

1
Pulley
Release Hole
16. Install the new Axial Motor assy by referring to steps 10. through 6.
17. Adjust the belt tension according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, Gantry.
18. Perform the following checks according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, Gantry.
MOVEMENT CHECK
ROTATION SPEED
19. Install the Axial Motor Pulley cover
21. END
4-13 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-8 TGP BOARD
Special Equipment
• TGP Board
1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, ‘Table/Tilt’ and ‘Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the Gantry left side cover.
3. Write down the following dip switch settings. Refer to the CD-ROM manual, Functional check & Adjustment,
Switch/Jumper Setting of Boars/Devices.
Switch Setting (ON or OFF)

S1 - T2
S1 - T4
S2 - G4
4. Remove TGP board assy by removing all the screws and connectors.
5. Install new TGP board assy using the screws removed in step 4.
6. Check the TGP board switch and jumper configuration according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional check &
Adjustment, Switch/Jumper Setting of Boars/Devices.
For the dip switch settings of S1 - T2, S1 - T4, and S2 - G4, set them according to the table at step 3.
7. Connect all the connectors removed in step 4.
8. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, ‘Table/Tilt’ and ‘Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
9. Perform the following adjustments in the following order according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check
& Adjustment, Gantry or Table.
MOVEMENT CHECK
ROTATION SPEED
SHORT-FOOT-PRINT FUNCTION (Table tab; for systems with dip switch S1 - T2 or S1 - T4 being set
to ON only)
10. Install the front and left side Gantry covers.
11. END
4-14 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-9 SUB BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• SUB Board Assy
1. Set the Gantry to the 0 degree position and lower the Table to its lowest position.
2. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the left side cover from the Gantry.
4. Disconnect the all cable connectors from the SUB Board Assy.
5. Remove the SUB Board Assy by unscrewing its six screws.
6. Install the new SUB Board Assy by using the screws removed in step 5.
7. Connect all the connectors removed in step 4.
8. Check that the following functions are operating normally.
• Gantry Tilt Function (FWD ↔ BWD)
• Table Elevation Function (UP ↔ DOWN)
• Cradle Longitudinal Function (IN ↔ OUT)
9. Restore the Gantry to original configuration. END
4-15 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-10 GANTRY ROTATION COUNTER (2310012)

The rotation counter (2310012) must be installed following the procedure below.
1. Set the Gantry to the 0 degree tilt position.
2. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the Gantry front cover and the left side cover.
4. Remove the rotation counter to be replaced from the Gantry.
5. Check the rotation counter cable terminals:
If the cable terminals are too big to connect the new counter, cut the side edge of the terminals.
Illustration 4-7 Cutting the cable terminal
Cut !
6. Remove the counter holder from the new counter, then remove the two screws from the holder. Discard the
two screws. (The counter holder will be re-used later.)
Illustration 4-8 Removing the Counter Holder
Counter Holder
Screws
4-16 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-10 GANTRY ROTATION COUNTER (2310012) (CONTINUED)

7. Set the rotation counter as follows:
a. Remove the insulation sheet from the new rotation counter to activate the battery installed into the counter.
(The counter indication will be ramdomly displayed.)
b. Set the SW2 to the terminal side. (1 kHz selected)
c. Press the RST (Reset) button to set the counter to “0”. Verify that the counter indication is “0”.
d. Set the SW1 to the terminal side. (Key protection - ON selected)
Illustration 4-9 Setting the Counter
Step a. Step b.
Insulation Sheet
2 1
Step c. Step d.
2 1
Reset Button
4-17 GANTRY
REV 12 2244773
4-10 GANTRY ROTATION COUNTER (2310012) (CONTINUED)

8. Put the counter holder into the cables, disconnected at step 4, then pull the cables outward through the Gantry
frame hole where the counter will be installed.
9. Put the rubber seal into the counter.
10. Connect the cables to the terminals of the counters; Red cable to No.1 terminal, and Black cable to No.2
terminal.
11. Install the new rotation counter until the counter holder holds the counter securely.
12. Install the terminal protector (plastic) onto the terminal.
Illustration 4-10 Installing the Counter to the Gantry
Holder
Counter
Protector
1 2 3 4
Rubber
Seal
Gantry
Frame
Red
Black
14. END
4-18 GANTRY
REV 35 2244773
SECTION 5 - GANTRY STATIONARY - IV
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
5-1 GANTRY
REV 35 2244773
5-1 TILT POTENTIOMETER
Special Equipment
• Tilt Potentiometer Assy
• DVM (Digital Volt Meter)
• Tiewraps
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ‘Table/Tilt’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the front and left side covers from the Gantry.
4. Remove the wiring duct cover by unscrewing its six screws. (Illustration 5-1)
5. Cut the tie wrap securing the wires leading to the Tilt Potentiometer and disconnect connector CN15 from the
TGP Board.
Illustration 5-1 Tilt Potentiometer Location
Screws (x6)
Wiring Duct Cover
Tilt Potentiometer
5-2 GANTRY
REV 35 2244773
5-1 TILT POTENTIOMETER (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the Tilt Potentiometer Assy from the Support Bracket by loosening the nut.(Illustration 5-2).
Illustration 5-2 Tilt Potentiometer
Nut
Tilt Potentiometer Arm (cut view)
CN15
1
2 Rack
3
4
Support Bracket
Gear
5-3 GANTRY
REV 35 2244773
5-1 TILT POTENTIOMETER (CONTINUED)

7. Before installing the new Tilt Potentiometer, turn the potentiometer pivot clockwise until minimum resistance
and then turn about 5 turns counter-clockwise. This will help to find the 2.5KΩ resistance, explained in the next
step.
8. Attach a DVM between Pin 2 and Pin 3 (Illustration 5-2) of the connector CN15 and measure the total
resistance over the new Potentiometer. Rotate the potentiometer pivot until the DVM value is 2.5KΩ +/- 30Ω.
9. Install the Potentiometer and verify that the resistance is the same as before installed, attach the DVM between
Pin 2 and Pin 3 of the Connector CN15 again and measure the total resistance. If the resistance is not 2.5KΩ
+/- 30Ω, then loosen the two nuts that hold the potentiometer assy and repeat step 8.
10. Verify that the Tilt Potentiometer gear and Rack gear are in constant mesh. (Illustration 5-3).
11. Feed the connector CN15 up the outboard side of the Gantry frame and connect it to the TGP Board.
Illustration 5-3 Gears in mesh

Tilt Potentiometer
Rack gear
Tilt Potentiometer gear
12. Switch ON the “Table/Tilt” switches.

13. Tilt the Gantry from the FWD 20° to the BWD 20° position, and verify that Tilt POT rotates smoothly.
14. Retie the tie wraps which were removed in step 5.
15. Install the wiring duct cover by screwing its six screws.
16. Switch ON the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Table/Tilt’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
17. Perform T0, TG Adjustment. (Refer to CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, Gantry)
18. END
5-4 GANTRY
REV 35 2244773
5-2 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
Special Equipment
• Hydraulic Cylinder Assy
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape (PTFE)
• Tilt Stopper/Shipping Lock
• Tie wraps
WARNING
CRASH HAZARD!
DO NOT ADJUST THE THROTTLE DIALS OF THE SOLENOID VALVE OR REPLACE BOTH
CYLINDERS TOGETHER AT THE SAME TIME.

1. Set the Gantry to the home position.
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ and ’XG Power’ and switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the rear and both side covers from the Gantry.
4. Move the Table to approximately the -150mm position.
5. Lock the Gantry from tilting using the shipping locks. If the cylinders are not fully functional proceed according
to the following trouble situation chart.
Current Tilt Angle Procedure
Tilt adjusting holes

Remove the Tilt Stopper from the cover stand.
Remove a Allen screw fastening the tilt rail to the tilt arm.
Attach the EM Tilt Stopper to the tilt rail at both sides using the
Allen screw removed in the previous step, then lock the
Gantry tilt.
The tilt angle is ajustable by using the proper tilt adjusting
holes.
Tilt Rail
EM Tilt
Stopper
5-5 GANTRY
REV 35 2244773
5-2 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER (CONTINUED)

6. Switch OFF the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
7. Cut the tie wraps holding the oil hoses to the inboard (inside) side of the Gantry side frame.
8. Remove the cylinder bracket by unscrewing its 2 Allen screws.
9. Remove the Allen screw holding the cylinder in place at bottom end, and pull free the cylinder assembly.
10. Remove the oil input and output hoses by unscrewing the hose nuts.
Note
When removing the oil hoses, keep the input(bottom inlet) hose vertical so that no oil drips out of it.
Any oil which drips out will be replaced by air which will enter the new cylinder during reinstallation.
11. Remove the two elbow joints, one from each end, and wrap sealing tape around the sends which are screwed
into the cylinder. These elbows will be attached to the new cylinder later.
Note
When applying sealing tape to elbow joints wrap the tape about one and a half times in the opposite
direction of the thread.
Illustration 5-4 Tilt Cylinder Location
Bracket
Allen
Screws(2)
Rod End
Bracket
Hose
Nut Allen Screw
and Washer
5-6 GANTRY
REV 35 2244773

12. Remove the rod end from the old cylinder and attach it to the new cylinder as show in illustration 5-5.
Illustration 5-5 Hydraulic Cylinder Rod End
13mm + 1mm
Rod End
Fix Nut
New Cylinder
13. Fill a clean receptacle with enough Oil (Z9807QD) to cover the end of the cylinder as shown in illustration 5-6.
Place the oil input end of the cylinder assembly into the oil and pull the rod end so as to suck oil onto the
cylinder. Stop when the length of the cylinder assembly is about 40cm longer than the distance needed to reach
from the holding pivot to the support bracket.
14. Turn the cylinder around so that the input end is pointing skyward and wait 1∼2 minutes for any air to settle to
the top.
15. Push the rod end into the cylinder while holding the cylinder firmly. A mixture of air and oil should come out of
the skyward hole. Continue until only oil comes out and all air is removed from the cylinder.
Illustration 5-6 Tilt Cylinder Oil Filling Procedure
Air Hole
Oil
5-7 GANTRY
REV 35 2244773

16. Attach the elbow joints removed from the old cylinder to the new one.
17. Connect all oil hoses to the new cylinder.
18. Rest the cylinder on the pivot support and open the air hole by rotating it CCW approximately three times.
Note
Do not unscrew the air hole screw. Simply turning it approximately three times is sufficient for it to
allow air or oil to escape.
19. Push down on the rod end until the cylinder assembly fits neatly into the bracket and the pivot. A firm force will
be required to push the rod end down and force the excess oil to drip out of the air hole.
20. Close the air hole by rotating its plug CW fully.
21. Attach the cylinder assembly and secure it with the double nuts at both the pivot and bracket ends.
22. Fasten the oil hoses to the inboard (inside) side of the Gantry side base with tie wraps.
23. Check if the Gantry tilt is operating correctly.
a. Remove the shipping locks and any residual oil left on the cylinder.
b. Switch ON the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
c. Tilt the Gantry FWD 20 deg. and verify that it operates smoothly.
d. Tilt the Gantry BWD 20 deg. and verify that the operation is smooth.
e. Repeat step 23c. and 23d. a few times to remove any air in the pump or cylinder.
25. Perform a Tilt Speed Adjustment. (Refer to CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment)
26. END
5-8 GANTRY
REV 34 2244773
SECTION 6 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - I
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
6-1 GANTRY
REV 34 2244773
6-1 COLLIMATOR FILTER ASSY
Special Equipment
• Filter
1. Set the Gantry to the 0° tilt and the HOME position.
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate” and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the both side and the front covers from the Gantry.
4. Remove the collimator cover by removing the 4 nuts(Torque: 3.5Nm) securing the cover.
NOTICE
Fragile part. The Photo Sensors are very sensitive. Be careful not to bend them.
5. Remove the two long hexa screws and the filter indicated in illustration 6-1.
6. Install the new FILTER by referring steps 5. through 4.
7. Perform the following check/adjustment procedures according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check &
Adjustment, System:
FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT
CALIBRATION (Air and Phantom)
CT NO. ADJUSTMENT
8. END
Illustration 6-1 Filter
Photo Sensor Long hexa Screws Filter Assy
Protect Bracket
Stepping Motor Filter
FILTER REMOVAL PATH
COLLIMATOR FRONT VIEW (SIDE VIEW)
6-2 GANTRY
REV 34 2244773
6-2 COLLIMATOR ASSY
Special Equipment
• Collimator Assy
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “Slipring 115V” and “XG Power” switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the X-Ray Tube from the Collimator Assy refer to X-Ray Tube replacement procedure.
X-RAY GENERATOR -> Section 3 X-Ray Tube
5. Rotate the Gantry to 180° position by hand.
6. Insert the azimuth lock pin.
7. Disconnect the Positioning Light Cable Connector.
8. Cut any tie-wraps holding the cables under the Positioning Light.
9. Remove the Position Light from the Collimator Assy by unscrewing its 5 screws.
Illustration 6-2 Screws Positioning Light
Allen Screws for Collimator Assy

Torque: 563kgf.cm
Screws for Positioning Light

Torque: 70kgf.cm
6-3 GANTRY
REV 34 2244773
6-2 COLLIMATOR ASSY (CONTINUED)

10. Cut any tie-wrap holding cables and disconnect all cable connectors from the Collimator Assy.
Illustration 6-3 Disconnect Cable Connectors from the Collimator Assy

Encoder Cable Motor Cable
GND Cable Sensor Cable

11. Remove the Collimator Assy from the support frame by unscrewing its four Allen screws. (See illustration 6-2)
12. Install the new Collimator Assy in reverse order of removal. (Torque: 563kgf.cm)
13. Reinstall the X-Ray Tube (Torque: 285kgf.cm) and Positioning Light (Torque: 70kgf.cm) in reverse order of re-
moval.
14. Retie any tie-wraps which were removed.
15. Perform the following check/adjustment procedures according to manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS
POSITIONING LIGHTS ADJUSTMENT
X-RAY ALIGNMENT
KV AND mA CHECK
DAS COUNT CHECK
Q CALIBRATION (Q-Cal)
SYSTEM CALIBRATION
CT NO. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
17. END.
6-4 GANTRY
REV 34 2244773
6-3 APERTURE ASSY
Special Equipment
• Aperture
4. Remove the collimator cover by unscrewing the 4 nuts securing the cover.
Illustration 6-4 Collimator Cover Removal
Nut (x4)
(Torque: 31Kgf.cm)
5. Switch ON the Service Switch located on the left side ofthe TGP board, and rotate the Gantry (CW) to the 180°
position by hand.
6. Switch OFF the Service Switch.
7. Disconnect the Stepping Motor’s, Photo sensor’s and Encoder’s connectors (see illustration 6-5).
8. Remove the Aperture Assy from the Collimator by unscrewing its 4 nuts (see illustration 6-5).
9. Install the new Aperture Assy to the Collimator by screwing its 4 nuts. (Torque: 31Kgf.cm)
10. Reconnect the cable connectors of the Stepping Motor, Photo Sensor and Encoder.
11. Install the Collimator Cover by screwing its 4 nuts. (Torque: 31Kgf.com)
12. Perform Aperture Ratio check and Image Performance verification according to Functional Check &
Adjustment manual.
13. END
6-5 GANTRY
REV 34 2244773
6-3 APERTURE ASSY (CONTINUED)
Illustration 6-5 Aperture
Motor
Stepping Motor Connector
Sensor
Connector
Nut (x4)
(Torque: 31Kgf.cm)
Encoder
6-6 GANTRY
REV 34 2244773
6-4 APERTURE MOTOR DRIVER

1. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
2. Remove the both side and front covers from the Gantry.
3. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ switch at rear Gantry base.
5. Disconnect the two connectors of the Aperture Motor Driver Assy (Illustration 6-6).
6. Remove the four nuts shown in illustration 6-6 to remove the Aperture Motor Driver mounting bracket.
Illustration 6-6 Aperture Motor Driver Removal
Aperture Motor
Driver
Mounting Plate
Cover
6-7 GANTRY
REV 34 2244773
6-4 APERTURE MOTOR DRIVER (CONTINUED)

7. Remove two screws that secure Aperture Motor Driver Assy to the mounting bracket, at the back side
(Illustration 6-7).
8. Install new Aperture Motor Driver Assy by referring to steps 7 through 2.
10. END
Illustration 6-7 Aperture Motor Driver Assy Removal from the mounting bracket
Screws
Mounting Bracket
Aperture Motor Driver
6-8 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
SECTION 7 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - II
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
7-1 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-1 POWER SUPPLY ASSY
7-1-1 Power Supply For NPDAS
Special Equipment
• Power Supply Module
1. Remove the front and right side covers from the Gantry.
2. Rotate the Gantry to approximately 190° tube position.
3. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.
4. Insert the Azimuth lock pin.
5. Remove the Power Supply cover by removing four nuts (Illustration 7-1).
Illustration 7-1 Power Supply PS L Cover Removal
PS6
PS7
RED GRY YEL
1 4 7
WHT 2 5 8 BLK
3 6 9 ORG
GRN
BLU
DAS POWER CABLE CONNECTOR
The denominations PS1~ PS7 are only for reference in this procedure. They do not correspond to
the part name in Renewal Parts.
7-2 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-1 POWER SUPPLY PS L ASSY (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the wires of the Power Supply Module to be replaced by loosening correspondig screws.
7. Remove the bar screws of the Power Supply Module do be replaced.
8. Remove the Power Supply Module to be replaced by removing the mounting screws.
9. Install the new module by performing steps 8 to 6 in their reverse order.
10. Adjust the output voltage of the replaced Power Supply Modulte. Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment
manual.
Illustration 7-2 Power Supply PS L Cover Removal
Bar Screw
Bar
PS1
PS6
PS7 PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
7-3 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-1-2 Power Supply (MDAS)
Sepcial Equipment
• Power Supply (2369490)
1. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring 115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.
2. Remove the front, left and right side covers from the Gantry.
3. Switch ON the Service Switch, then rotate the Gantry to approximately 190° tube position.
Illustration 7-3 Power Supply position
Gantry Rear Mounting Plate
Power Supply Trans Box
Temp Cont
Screws
7-4 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-1-2 Power Supply (MDAS) (Continued)

6. Disconnect the cable connectors from the Power Supply.
7. Remove the two screws on the Top Side and the two screws on the Bottom Side (Illustration 7-4).
Note
When all the screws are removed, push the Power Supply onto the Plate to prevent it from falling
down from the orientation pins.
Illustration 7-4 DAS Power Supply Cables Removal
Cables
Cables
Bottom Side of
the Power Supply
Screw
Top Side of
the Power Supply
Orientation Pin Screw Orientation Pin
8. Remove the Power Supply from the Gantry.

9. Install the new Power Supply by performing steps 8 to 1 in their reverse order.
Note
When put the Power Supply on the Gantry, firstly locate the holes (on the Top and the Bottom sides
of the Power Supply) on the orientation pins and push the Power Supply onto the Plate with one
hand, to prevent it from falling down.
11. END
7-5 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-1-3 Power Supply For (GDAS)
Sepcial Equipment
6. Disconnect the cable connectors from the Power Supply. (Illustration 7-5)
Illustration 7-5 Cables of PS
Power Cable (Input)
Mounting Plate
DAS Power
RF Cable Cable (Output)
(Output)
Collimator
OGP Cable (Output)
(Output)
7-6 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-1-3 Power Supply (GDAS) (Continued)

7. Cut the tie-wrap fixed on the hole of Power Supply handle shown as below.
CAUTION
Be care not to snip the cables bound on the hole of the Power Supply handle with tie-wrap.
Illustration 7-6 Hole of the PS Handle
Left
Orientation
Pin
Right
Right
Front Hole for binding Power Supply

Front Cables Handle
8. Remove the Power Supply by unscrewing its four screws from the Mounting Plate. (See Illustration 7-3)
Note
9. Install the new Power Supply and connect the cable connectors.
Note
10. Bind the cables beside the Power Supply to the hole of Power Supply handle with tie-wrap according to step 7.
NOTICE
Be sure that the cables are far from the bearing, and do not bind them tightly with tie-wrap
to avoid cutting cable during future possible replacement.
12. END
7-7 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-2 OGP BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• OGP Assy
• Tie wraps
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
4. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board near the TGP board, and rotate the Gantry until the OGP Assy
reaches the 2 o’clock position by hand, then switch OFF the service switch. (Illustration 7-7).
5. Cut the tie-wraps holding the cables to the OGP cover.
6. Remove the OGP assy cover by unscrewing its four nuts and two screws.
7. Disconnect the ten cable connectors (CN1 ∼ CN10) from the OGP board.
8. Remove the two Allen screws and one nut that fasten the connector frame to the OGP support frame.
9. Remove the OGP board with connector frame by unscrewing eight screws.
10. Remove the connector frame by unscrewing the four studs, and transfer the connector frame to the new OGP
board.
11. Install the new OGP board (with connector frame) by referring to step 9 to 5.
12. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
13. Rotate the Gantry manually to check if the movement is smooth and the cables do not catch on any stationary
components. Make more than one complete rotation.
15. Perform Test Scan according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, System.
17. END
7-8 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-2 OGP BOARD ASSY (CONTINUED)
Illustration 7-7 OGP Board Assy Removal
OGP Cover
Connector Bracket OGP Board Assy
OGP Support
Frame
7-9 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-2-1 SP ROM Assy
NOTICE
Follow ALL Electro-Static Discharge procedures. Always use ESD Wrist Strap and
grounding cords. The use of a ground Monitor is suggested.
Special Equipment
• SP ROM Assy
2. Remove the right side and left side covers from the Gantry.
3. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board near the TGP board, and rotate the Gantry until the OGP Assy
reaches the 9 o’clock position by hand (Illustration 7-7).
4. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power”, “Table/Tilt” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the Gantry rear base.
5. Remove the OGP assy cover by loosening its four nuts (Illustration 7-7)
6. Remove the old SP ROM Assy.
7. Carefully press in the new SP ROM Assy with care (Illustration 7-8).
8. Rotate the Gantry manually to check if the movement is smooth and the cables do not catch on any stationary
components. Make more than one complete rotation.
10. Switch OFF the service switch .
11. Perform Test Scan according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, System.
13. END
7-10 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-2-1 SP ROM Assy (Continued)
Illustration 7-8 SP ROM Assy
SP ROM
7-11 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-3 DTRF ASSY (NPDAS)
Special Equipment
• DTRF Assy
2. Remove the front,right side, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
3. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board near the TGP board, and rotate the Gantry to 5 o’clock position
by hand, then switch OFF the service switch.
4. Remove the DTRF assy cover by unscrewing its 6 nuts (see illustration 7-9).
5. Disconnect the three cable connectors (CN1, CN2, J4) from DTRF assy.
6. Remove the connector bracket together with the DTRF assy by unscrewing 4 screws and 2 Allen screws (see
illustration 7-9).
7. Remove the 2 set nuts and transfer the connector bracket to the new DTRF assy. Tighten the bracket in place
using the set nuts (see illustration 7-9).
8. Install the new DTRF assy/connector bracket by referring to steps 6. through 4.
12. Perform Data Transfer Check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, Gantry.
13. Install the front and both side Gantry covers.
14. Switch ON the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the Gantry rear base.
15. END
7-12 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-3 DTRF ASSY (CONTINUED)
Illustration 7-9 DTRF Assy Removal
Behind Gantry DTRF Assy

Rotational Frame Connector
Bracket
OGP Assy Set Nuts
Connector
Bracket
DTRF Assy
Allen Screw
Gantry DTRF Assy Cover

Rotational
Frame DTRF Assy Cover
DTRF Assy
Connector Bracket
7-13 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-4 DCP ASSY (MDAS)
Special Equipment
• DCP Assy
2. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
4. Remove the DCP assy cover by unscrewing its 6 nuts (see illustration 7-10).
5. Disconnect the three cable connectors (CN1, CN2, J4) from DCP assy.
6. Remove the connector bracket together with the DCP assy by unscrewing 4 screws and 2 Allen screws (see
illustration 7-10).
7. Remove the 2 set nuts and transfer the connector bracket to the new DCP assy. Tighten the bracket in place
using the set nuts (see illustration 7-10).
8. Install the new DCP assy/connector bracket by referring to steps 6. through 4.
13. Install the front and both side Gantry covers.
15. END
7-14 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-4 DCP ASSY (CONTINUED)
Illustration 7-10 DCP Assy Removal
Behind Gantry DCP Assy

Rotational Frame Connector
Bracket
OGP Assy Set Nuts
Connector
Bracket
DCP Assy
Allen Screw
Gantry DCP Assy Cover

Rotational
Frame DCP Assy Cover
DCP Assy
Connector Bracket
7-15 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-5 PHOTO SENSOR (GPLS1, GPLS2)
Special Equipment
• Photo Sensor
• Tie wraps
3. Remove the front, rear, right side and left maintenance covers.
4. Disconnect the cable connector from the defective Photo Sensor.
5. Remove the defective Photo Sensor by unscrewing its 2 screws.
6. Install the new Photo Sensor by referring steps 5. through 4.
8. END
Illustration 7-11 Photo Sensor
Plate Gantry Frame
STATIONARY SIDE
Photo Sensor
(G. Pulse 2)
ROTATIONAL SIDE
Photo Sensor
(G. Pulse 1)
7-16 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-6 AXIAL DRIVE BELT
Special Equipment
• Axial Drive Belt
• Tie wraps
1. Remove the PDU front cover by inscrewing its 2 screws.
2. Switch OFF the CB1 and CB5 breakers in the PDU.
3. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the following covers:
Gantry Rear Cover...............................Rerer to 1-2-2 Gantry Rear Cover

Both Side maintenance Covers..............Rerer to 1-2-3 Gantry Side Cover
All Slip Ring Covers
Axial Motor Pulley Cover............................Four(4) Screws (See Illustration 7-17)
5. Unscrew respectively the two(2) screws holding each of the six Slip Ring Support Plate.
Illustration 7-12 Remove the Slip Ring Support Plate
Gantry Rear
Slip Ring Support Slip Ring Support

(x6) Plate (X6)
Screw (x2)
7-17 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-6 AXIAL DRIVE BELT (CONTINUED)

7. For RF Receiver Assy:
a. Disconnect the RF cable connector from RF Shoe (see illustration 3-1).
b. Remove the RF Shoe by unscrewing its one screw (see illustration 3-1).
For HSDCD Receiver Assy:
a. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Cover by unscrewing its four(4) screws.
Illustration 7-13 Remove the HSDCD Receiver Cover
Gantry Rear
Screw (x4)
Receiver Cover
b. Disconnect the power cable and the optical fiber cable connectors from HSDCD Receiver Assy. (See Illus-
tration 7-14)
c. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Assy (includes antenna and bracket) by unscrewing its two screws. (See
Illustration 7-14)
Illustration 7-14 Remove the HSDCD Receiver Assy
Gantry Frame
Screw (x2)
HSDCD Receiver
Cables (Power Cable and

Optical Fiber Cable)
Screw (x2) HSDCD Receiver RF Cables (Optical Fiber Cable_J1

and Power Cable_J2)
7-18 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
CAUTION
8. For RF Brush Assy:

Remove the Slip Ring Brush Block Assy from the brush mounting plate.
a. Disconnect the cable connector CN1 connected to the signal brush board.
d. Remove the brush block assy by unscrewing its four(4) Allen screws.
Slip Ring
Power Cables Brush Block Assy
Brush Mounting Plate
CN1
Signal Brush Board
7-19 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

For HSDCD Brush Assy:
Remove the Slip Ring Brush Block Assy from the brush mounting plate, detailed processes refer to 3-2-2 HS-
DCD Brush Assy -> Brush Block Removal.
b. Remove the Terminal cover from the HSDCD Brush Block Assy by unscrewing its 2 screws.
c. Mark and disconnect all power cables (including the GND cable )from the power bars.
d. Remove the Brush Block Assy by unscrewing its 2 border allen screws.
e. Remove the HSDCD Brush Block always keeping in the perpendiclar direction with the Slip Ring to avoid a
brush breakage.
Power Cables
(M6:6N.m)
Terminal Cover
(M4:1.8N.m)
Power Cables
DO NOT
Screws (x2)
SCREW/
UNSCREW THE
ADJUSMENT
SCREWS AND
NUTS
Connector
Signal CN1
Middle Power
Screws (x2) Brushes
Signal
Brushes
DO NOT
SCREW/
UNSCREW THE
ADJUSMENT
SCREWS AND
NUTS Border Screws (x2)
7-20 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

9. Remove the tension spring.
a. Loosen the three mounting plate bolts
b. Loosen the lock nut of the belt tension adjuster.
c. Remove the adjustment bolt and support bolt, then remove the tension spring.
Illustration 7-17 Belt Tension Adjuster
Support Bolt
Tension Spring
Lock Nut
Adjustment Bolt
Adjuster
Mounting Plate
Axial Belt
Mounting
Plate Bolts
Axial Motor Pulley

Pulley Cover
7-21 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

10. Left the mounting plate, and then remove the axial drive belt from the axial motor pulley (see illustration 7-17).
11. Remove the axial drive belt from the Gantry.
12. Install the new axial drive belt by referring to steps 11. through 5.
(Properly position the drive belt on and around the Gantry rotational gear ring and axial motor pulley.)
13. Perform the following adjustment and check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check &
Adjustment.
AZIMUTH BELT TENSION
RF SHOE POSITION
MOVEMENT CHECK
14. Restore the Gantry and the PDU to original configuration.
15. END
7-22 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-7 HV CABLE (ANODE / CATHODE)
Special Equipment
• HV Cable (Anode/Cathode)
• Silicone Oil
• Candle Stick HV lead Wrench
• Tie-wraps
• Kim Wipe
CAUTION
BURN/SHOCK HAZARD!
Wait more than five minutes following the last scan before performing the following
procedure.
CAUTION
Wait approximately five minutes after switching OFF the CB1 in the PDU for all capacitors in
the XG Unit to discharge.

1. Preparation:
a. Set the Gantry to the 0° tilt and the HOME position.

b. Remove the PDU front cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
c. Switch OFF the CB1 breaker in the PDU.
d. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’ and ‘Slip Ring115V’ switches at the rear Gantry base.
e. Remove the front and left maintenance covers.
f. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
g. Insert the azimuth lock pin.
7-23 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-7 HV CABLE (ANODE/CATHODE) (CONTINUED)

2. Remove the HV cable (Anode/Cathode) as follows:
a. Use the HV lead wrench to loosen the HV cable connector.
b. Remove the cable from the HV Tank.
c. Ground the end of the cable to the Gantry Frame to verify no voltage.
d. Wipe excess oil from the HV cable connector, and out of the HV Tank connector well.
e. Remove the azimuth lock pin, and rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 3 o’clock position.
f. Insert the azimuth lock pin.
g. Use the HV lead wrench to loosen the HV cable connector.
h. Remove the cable from the x-ray tube.
i. Ground the end of the cable to the Gantry frame to verify no voltage.
j. Wipe excess oil from the HV cable connector.
k. Cut the tie-wraps holding the HV cable to the Gantry, and remove the cable from the Gantry.
3. Install the HV cable (Anode/Cathode) as follows:
a. Replenish the HV connector well of the x-ray tube with silicone oil.
b. Insert the HV cable connector into the HV connector well of the x-ray tube.
c. Tighten the HV cable connector with HV lead wrench.
d. Wipe excess oil from the x-ray tube.
e. Remove the azimuth lock pin, and rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
f. Insert the azimuth lock pin.
g. Replenish the well of the HV Tank with silicone oil.
h. Insert the HV cable connector into the well of the HV Tank.
i. Tighten the HV cable connector with HV lead wrench.
j. Wipe excess oil from the HV Tank.
7-24 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
7-7 HV CABLE (ANODE/CATHODE) (CONTINUED)

4. Retie any tie-wraps which were removed in step 2.
5. Remove the azimuth lock pin, and rotate the Gantry by hand through two complete revolutions.
Check to make sure the HV cable does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.
8. Perform the Scan Test according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment, System.
9. END
7-25 GANTRY
7-26 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
SECTION 8 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - III
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
8-1 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-1 RF TRANSMITTER ASSY
Special Equipment
• RF Transmitter Assy
4. Disconnect the three cable connectors from RF Transmitter assy.
5. Remove the RF Transmitter assy by unscrewing its 4 screws.
6. Install the new RF Transmitter assy by referring to steps 5. through 4.
Illustration 8-1 RF Transmitter Location
Slip Ring Assy
Balun Assy
RF Transmitter
8-2 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-1 RF TRANSMITTER ASSY (CONTINUED)

13. END
8-3 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-2 HSDCD TRANSMITTER ASSY
Special Equipment
• HSDCD Transmitter Assy
NOTICE
HSDCD Transmitter is static sensitive. Before touching the component, attach the wrist
strap to your wrist and to the metal part of the chassis.
3. Remove the rear, right side, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
4. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board, and rotate the Gantry until the x-ray
tube reaches the 7 o’clock position by hand, then switch OFF the Service Switch.
5. Switch OFF the ’Table Tilt’ at the Gantry rear base.
6. Disconnect the cable connectors from HSDCD Transmitter assy.
7. Remove the HSDCD Transmitter assy by unscrewing its two screws.
8. Install the new HSDCD Transmitter assy by referring to steps 7. through 6.
9. Fasten with tie-wrap all cable in excess in a bundle.
Illustration 8-2 HSDCD Transmitter - rear view of HSDCD Slipring

HSDCD Transmitter
RF Cables
Screw (x2)
8-4 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-2 HSDCD TRANSMITTER ASSY (CONTINUED)

15. Switch ON the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’ and ’Slip Ring115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
16. END
8-5 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-3 SIGNAL INTERFACE BOARD
Special Equipment
• Signal Interface Board
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Slip Ring115V’ and ’Table Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the rear, right side, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
4. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board, and rotate the Gantry until the x-ray
tube reaches the 7 o’clock position by hand, then switch OFF the Service Switch.
5. Disconnect the cable connector from Signal Interface Board.
6. Remove the Signal Interface Board by unscrewing its seven screws.
7. Install the new Signal Interface Board by referring to steps 5. through 4.
8-6 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-4 BALUN ASSY
Special Equipment
• Balun Assy
4. Disconnect the cable connector connected to the Balun assy.
5. Loosen the set nut that hold the protect cover in place, and remove the protect cover by unscrewing two
screws.
6. Remove the four screws that hold the Balun assy, and remove the Balun assy by pulling the device straight out
from the back connector.
Illustration 8-3 Balun Assy
Balun Assy Back Connector

Balun Assy
Protect Cover
Coil Back
Connector
Connector
Protect Cover
(Rear)
Screws
Set Nut
8-7 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-4 BALUN ASSY (CONTINUED)
NOTICE
The Coils on the Balun assy are very sensitive. Be careful not to deform them.
7. Install the new Balun assy by referring to steps 6 through 4.
10. END
8-8 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (DTRF - RF XMT)
Special Equipment
• Optical Fiber Cable
• Tie wraps
2. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ and ’XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the front, rear, right side and left maintenance covers.
4. Disconnect the Opt Fiber Cable connector from the DTRF Assy.
5. Disconnect the Opt Fiber Cable connector from the RF Transmitter Assy.
6. Cut the tie-wraps holding the cable to the Gantry frame, and remove it from the Gantry.
7. Install the new Optical Fiber Cable by referring steps 6. through 4.
9. END
8-9 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-6 SLIP RING ASSY
8-6-1 RF Slip Ring Assy
Special Equipment
• Slip Ring Assy
• Slip Ring Assy Replacement Tool (2225481)
• Tie wraps
• Kim Wipe
CAUTION
CAUTION

1. Preparation:
c. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
d. Remove the Gantry Rear and both side covers.
8-10 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-6 SLIP RING ASSY (CONTINUED)

2. Remove the brush block assy with the mounting plate from the Gantry.
d. Remove the brush block assy with the mounting plate by unscrewing its four(4) Allen screws.
Illustration 8-4 Removal of the Brush Block Assy with Mounting Plate
Power Cables
Brush Block Assy
Protect Cover
CN1
Alignment Screws
Mounting Plate
8-11 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773

3. Remove all slip ring cover (see illustration 8-5).
4. Remove the RF Shoe assy (see illustration 3-1).
a. Disconnect the RF cable connector from RF Shoe.
b. Remove the RF Shoe by unscrewing its one screw.
Illustration 8-5 Slip Ring Covers
Slip Ring Assy
Slip Ring Covers
8-12 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773

5. Remove the cable protect cover (x 4) from the slip ring support frame.by unscrewing its 2 (x 4) nuts.
6. Disconnect all cable connections and wires on the inside of the Slip ring, including the GND cable.
Illustration 8-6 Cable Protect Cover
Cable Protect Cover

Slip Ring Support Frame
Slip Ring Assy
Illustration 8-7 Cable and Wire Connections
380 480V Power Cables

(Black Cable x3) 115V Power Cables
(6N.m) (Blue and Brown)
(6N.m)
GND Cable
(6N.m)
115V Power Cables RF Transmitter Assy

(Blue and Brown) (Cable Connector x2)
(6N.m)
Signal I/F Board
(Cable Connector x1)
8-13 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773

7. Switch ON the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
9. Remove the Slip Ring assy from the Gantry : (Requires 2 people)
a. Rotate the Gantry by hand until Slip Ring support frame is visible.
b. Remove the mounting bolts from the Gantry.
(Second person : Push against the face of the Slip Ring to hold it in place while your partner removes the
bolts)
c. Rotate the Gantry by hand until another support frame appear.
d. Remove the mounting bolts, and repeat the procedure to remove the a total of 24 mounting bolts.
e. Pull the Slip Ring off the support frame.
Illustration 8-8 Slip Ring Support Frame and Mounting Bolts
Alignment Groove
Slip Ring Assy
Mounting Bolts
(60kgf.cm)
8-14 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
NOTICE
The RF Transmitter Assy and Signal Interface Board on the inside of the Slip Ring assy is
very sensitive, so handle it with extreme care.
10. Install the new Slip Ring assy.
a. Attach the Slip Ring assy to the support frame, to set the pins on the support frame to the alignment groove.
b. Rotate the Slip Ring, and/or support frame(main bearing), to align the small hole on the inside of the Slip
Ring with the small hole on the support frame.
c. Fasten Slip Ring to the support frame by referring to step 9.
Illustration 8-9 Slip Ring Position
Pin
Alignment Groove
Support Frame Inside of the Slip Ring Assy
RF Transmitter
Assy
Pin Pin
Signal Interface
Board
8-15 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773

11. Connect all cable connectors and wires removed in step 6 to the slip ring.
12. Check that the slip ring is not slantingly installed;
a. Install the dial indicator onto slip ring track 1 (inner most track), using the attachment tool.
b. Attach the smooth surface tape (for protectiong) to the tip of the dial indicator pin.
c. Rotate the Gantry by hand and verify that the slip ring must rotate parallel with the Gantry rotation plane
(less than 0.5mm).
d. Repeat the above check for other slip ring track (track 6 and track 12).
Illustration 8-10 Dial Indicator Attachment
Attachment Tool
Gantry Frame
Slip Ring
Track Barrier
Slip Ring Track 12

Smooth Surface
Tape
Slip Ring Track 6
(GND)
Slip Ring Track 1 Dial Indicator

Slip Ring Track
Dial Indicator
8-16 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773

13. Check the radial position of the slip ring so that the center of the slip ring aligns with the Gantry rotation center.
a. Install the dial indicator onto slip ring groove, using the attachment tool (see illustration 8-11).
b. Check that the rotation center of the panel is not out of the Gantry rotation center.
(less than 0.5mm, ignore a RF SOURCE gap and a RF TERMINATION gap on the Slip Ring Groove)
c. If the radial position of slip ring assy is out of specification, perform the following adjustment according to
the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION
Attachment Tool
Gantry Frame
Dial Indicator
Dial Indicator
Slip Ring Groove
Slip Ring Slip Ring Groove
8-17 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773

14. Install the following components by referring to steps 4 to 2.
- RF Shoe Assy
- Slip Ring Covers
- Magnet Bracket
- Brush Block Assy with Mounting Plate
(Adjust the Mounting Plate position so that the side surface of the mounting plate and the
alignment screw just touch.)
Brush Block Assy

Mounting Plate
Alignment Screw
Just Touch
NOTICE
Do not screw (or unscrew) the Adjustment Screws. The Gantry design fixes the Brush Block
position.
15. Perform the following checks according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
SLIP RING ↔ BRUSH CONTACT CHECK
DAS TRANSFER TEST
17. END
8-18 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-6-2 HSDCD Slip Ring Replacement
Special Equipment
• Dial Gauge - Slip Ring Replacement Kit (2225481)
• Tie wraps
• Kim Wipe
CAUTION
CAUTION

1. Preparation:
c. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
8-19 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
8-6-2 HSDCD Slip Ring Assy Replacement (continued)
Removing the HSDCD Brush Block Assy

Refer to COMPONENT REPLACEMENT - Gantry Stationary - HSDCD Brush Block Removal.
1. Remove the brush block assy from the Gantry.
d. Remove the brush block assy by unscrewing its four(4) Allen screws.
Slip Ring Covers, Cable Protect Covers removal

1. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Cover by unscrewing its 4 screws.
2. Remove all slip ring cover and cover support (see illustration 8-12).
Slip Ring Assy
Slip Ring Covers
8-20 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773

3. Remove the cable protect cover (x 4) from the slip ring support frame by unscrewing its 2 (x 4) nuts.
Cable Protect Cover

Slip Ring Assy
8-21 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
Cables and Wires disconnection

380 480V Power Cables 115V Power Cables

(Black Cable x3) (Blue and Brown)
(6N.m) (6N.m)
GND Cable
(6N.m)
115V Power Cables

(Blue and Brown)
(6N.m) HSDCD Transmitter
Assy (Cable Connec-
tor x2)
Signal I/F Board
8-22 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
HSDCD Receiver Assy removal

2. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Assy by unscrewing its two screws. (Illustration 8-15).
Illustration 8-15 HSDCD Receiver removal

M6x12 Screw
and washer (x2)
HSDCD
Receiver
Assy
8-23 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
Removing the HSDCD Slip Ring

1. Switch ON the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
bolts)
Alignment Groove
rotate the tube to Slip Ring Assy

the vertical position
Mounting Bolts
(6N.m)
transmitter
HSDCD Slip Ring Installation

1. Refer to 9-1 - RF Slip Ring to HSDCD Slip Ring Replacement - HSDCD Slip Ring Installation section.
Checking if the HSDCD Slip Ring is not slantingly installed

1. Refer to 9-1 -RF Slip Ring to HSDCD Slip Ring Replacement - Checking if the HSDCD Slip Ring is not slantingly
installed section.
8-24 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
HSDCD Receiver Assy installation

1. Install the HSDCD Receiver Assy on the Mounting Plate. The location of two screw threads in the mounting
plate where the HSDCD Receiver should be mounted are indicated in the llustration 8-16.
2. Loosen, not remove the two M4x12 screws (Horizontal Adjustment), three M6x12 screws and two M4x8 screws
of HSDCD Receiver Assy indicated in the Illustration 8-16.
Illustration 8-16 Loosening the HSDCD Receiver Assy screws

M4x12 Screw M6x12
(x2) (Horizontal Screw and M6x12 Screw
Adjustment) washer (x3) and washer (x2)
HSDCD
Receiver
Assy
M4x8
Screw and
washer (x2)
Gantry.
HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION.
8-25 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
Rubbing the Brush Block before installing

Refer to 9-1 - Rubbing the Brush Block before installing.
Brush Block Installation

1. Insert the Guide Pins (x2) in the Brush Block. (Illustration 3-14).
Clearance check
Refer to 9-1 -RF Slip Ring to HSDCD Slip Ring Replacement - Clearance Check section.
Power and Signal Cables Connection

Refer to 9-1 -RF Slip Ring to HSDCD Slip Ring Replacement - Power and Signal Cables Connection section.
HSDCD Slip Ring Covers

Refer to 9-1 -RF Slip Ring to HSDCD Slip Ring Replacement - HSDCD Slip Ring Covers section.
Wear Cover installation

Refer to 9-1 -RF Slip Ring to HSDCD Slip Ring Replacement - Wear Cover installation section.
HSDCD Receiver Assy Cover installation

Refer to 9-1 -RF Slip Ring to HSDCD Slip Ring Replacement - HSDCD Receiver Assy Cover installation section.
8-26 GANTRY
REV 6 2244773
Functional Check
1. Rotate the Gantry by hand and perform the following checks:
2. Perform the Gantry rotation during approximatelly 10 minutes and verify that there is no irregular noises as
follows:
a. Switch ON the ’Rotate’, ’XG Power’, ’Slip Ring115V’ and ’Table Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
c. Switch to MNL the SYS Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
d. Switch to FIX the ABT Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
e. Switch to SPD2 the SPD Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
f. Switch to FAST the SW4 Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
g. Switch to CNT the SW5 Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
HSDSD SLIP RING ↔ HSDCD BRUSH CONTACT CHECK
DAS TRANSFER TEST
5. END
8-27 GANTRY
blank
8-28 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
SECTION 9 - GANTRY ROTATIONAL - IV
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
9-1 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
9-1 RF SLIP RING TO HSDCD SLIP RING REPLACEMENT
NOTICE
HSDCD Slip Ring is not compatible with DTRIF 110M Assy and DASIFN 110M Assy, this last
located in the Operator Console.
Before performing the RF Slip Ring to HSDCD Slip Ring replacement, certify that the
followings replacements were performed.
• DTRIF 110M Assy to DTRIF 95M Assy Replacement;
• DASIFN 110M Assy to DASIFN 95M Assy Replacement.
Special Equipment
• Slip Ring Replacement Kit (2266336-2)
Note
This kit does NOT include the HSDCD SR Assy. So, the HSDCD SR Assy must be separately or-
dered.)
• HSDCD SR Assy (2240264)
• Tie wraps
• Kim Wipe
9-2 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
9-1 RF SLIP RING TO HSDCD SLIP RING REPLACEMENT (CONTINUED)
CAUTION
CAUTION

1. Preparation:
9-3 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Removing the Brush Block Assy

1. Remove the brush block assy with the mounting plate from the Gantry.
d. Remove the brush block assy with the mounting plate by unscrewing its four(4) Allen screws.
Illustration 9-1 Removal of the Brush Block Assy with Mounting Plate
Power Cables
Brush Block Assy
Protect Cover
CN1
Alignment Screws
Mounting Plate
9-4 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Removing the Slip Ring Cover

1. Remove all slip ring covers (see illustration 9-2).
Slip Ring Assy
Slip Ring Covers
9-5 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

2. Remove the cable protect cover (x 4) from the slip ring support frame.by unscrewing its 2 (x 4) nuts.
Cable Protect Cover

Slip Ring Assy
9-6 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

380 480V Power Cables 115V Power Cables

(Black Cable x3) (Blue and Brown)
(6N.m) (6N.m)
GND Cable
(60kgf.cm)
(6N.m)
115V Power Cables

(Blue and Brown)
(6N.m) RF Transmitter Assy
Signal I/F Board
9-7 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Removing the RF Shoe Assy

1. Remove the RF Shoe assy.
a. Disconnect the RF cable from the RF Receiver Assy.
b. Disconnect the RF cable connector from RF Shoe.
c. Remove the RF Shoe Assy by unscrewing its two screws.
d. Cut the tie-wrap attached on the Mounting Plate.
e. Remove the Mounting Plate by unscrewing its four screws. (Illustration 9-5).
Illustration 9-5 RF Receiver Assy Removal
Gantry Rear
Mounting Plate
Mounting
Screws
RF Receiver Assy
RF Cable
RF Shoe Assy
9-8 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Removing the Slip Ring

1. Switch ON the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear base.
bolts)
Alignment Groove
rotate the tube to Slip Ring Assy

the vertical position
Mounting Bolts
(60kgf.cm)
transmitter
9-9 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
HSDCD Slip Ring Installation
NOTICE
Take care when handling the HSDCD Slip Ring.
Lean the Ring on a cushion, as part of shipping protection, to avoid scratching the PCB
located in the Ring border.
Illustration 9-6 HSDCD Assy Mounting Plate and Spacer

HSDCD Slip Ring
Cushion
9-10 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

1. Attach two tie wrap bases on the HSDCD Slip Ring.as shown in the Illustration 9-7. These tie wrap bases will
hold the HSDCD Transmitter wires.
2. Attach the two pin jigs on the HSDCD Slip Ring.as shown in the Illustration 9-7 before installing in the Gantry.
Illustration 9-7 Attaching the Pin Jigs and tie wrap bases before installing in the Gantry
Pin jig (x2)
Signal Interface Board
HSDCD tie wrap

Transmitter base (x2)
Assy
9-11 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

4. Rotate the support frame (main bearing) so that stay aligned with HSDCD Slip Ring as shown in the Illustration
9-8).
Illustration 9-8 HSDCD Slip Ring Position
REAR VIEW
Pin Pin Jig
Tube position
Signal
Interface
Board
Alignment
Support Pin Groove
Frame Inside of the HSDCD
Slip Ring Assy
Pin
HSDCD Transmitter Assy
9-12 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

5. Turn OFF the Service Switch.
NOTICE
Remove the jigs before rotating the Gantry by hand.
6. Install the HSDCD Slip Ring adjusting the pin jigs into the support frame. (Illustration 9-9).
Illustration 9-9 Installing the HSDCD Slip Ring
Pin Jigs
NOTICE
The RF Transmitter Assy and Signal Interface Board on the inside of the Slip Ring assy is
very sensitive, so handle it with extreme care.
9-13 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

7. Fasten the first two pin jigs on the top in the Suppor Frame.
8. Remove the two pin jigs inserted in the step 2.
10. Fasten the HSDCD Slip Ring by screwing the remaining mounting bolts by rotating the gantry by hand.
11. Replace the two pin jigs by mounting bolts and fasten them.
12. Verify that all 24 mounting bolts that fix the HSDCD Slip Ring are correctely fastened. Torque 6N.m, as shown
in the Illustration 9-4.
13. Reconnect all remaining cables and connectors disconnected in the step 3 of ’Cables and Wires disconnection’
subsection. Use the same screws removed in the mentioned step.
14. Reinstall the cable protect cover (x 4) removed in the step 2 of ’Slip Ring Covers, Cable Protect Covers
removal’.
15. Reconnect the HSDCD Transmitter connector cables.
16. Tie the cable in excess in a bundle with 3 tie-wraps as shown in the Illustration 9-10.
17. Reconnect the cable connector signal CN1 to the signal brush board.
Illustration 9-10 HSDCD Transmitter connectors detail
Tie–wraps
(x3)
Cable in
excess
HSDCD
Transmitter
9-14 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Checking if the HSDCD Slip Ring is not slantingly installed

1. Check that the slip ring is not slantingly installed;
a. Install the dial indicator onto slip ring track 1 (innermost track), using the attachment tool.
b. Attach the smooth surface tape (for protectiong) to the tip of the dial indicator pin.
c. Rotate the Gantry by hand and verify that the slip ring must rotate parallel with the Gantry rotation plane
(less than 0.7mm).
d. Repeat the above check for other slip ring track (track 12).
Attachment Tool
Gantry Frame
Slip Ring
Track Barrier
Slip Ring Track 12

Smooth Surface
Tape
Slip Ring Track 1 Dial Indicator

Slip Ring Track
Dial Indicator
9-15 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

2. Rotate the Gantry by hand and mark the outermost or least recessed area of slip ring. The Brush Block will be
installed in this area. (Installing Brush Block Assy section).
Illustration 9-12 Looking for the least recessed area
Dial Gauge
SIDE VIEW
HSDCD
Slip Ring
Front Rear
least recessed area
9-16 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

3. Check the radial position of the slip ring so that the center of the slip ring aligns with the Gantry rotation center.
a. Install the dial indicator onto slip ring groove, using the attachment tool (see illustration 8-11).
b. Check that the rotation center of the panel is not out of the Gantry rotation center.
(less than 0.7mm, ignore a RF SOURCE gap and a RF TERMINATION gap on the HSDCD Slip Ring edge)
c. If the radial position of slip ring assy is out of specification, perform the following adjustment according to
the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION
Attachment Tool
Gantry Frame
Dial Indicator
Dial Indicator
PCB
PCB
surface
Slip Ring
9-17 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Assembling the HSDCD Receiver Assy
Special Equipment
• HSDCD Receiver Assy
1. The HSCD Receveir Assy does not come assembled. Check the components of HSDCD Receiver Assy before
assembling. (Illustration 9-14).
NOTICE
The HSDCD Receiver Assy is a static-sensitive component.
NOTICE
The HSDCD Antenna is very sensitive. Do not touch in the inferior side.
Note
The adjustment of HSDCD Receiver Assy will be made with its screws loose.
Illustration 9-14 HSDCD Receiver Assy parts
HSDCD
Receiver
HSDCD
Antenna HSDCD Support 1
M6x12 Screw
and washer (x3)
M4x12 Screw (x2)
HSDCD Support 2
M4x8 Screw (x4)

and washer (x2)
HSDCD
Support 4 HSDCD Support 3
M4x8 Screw (x4) and

washer (x2)
9-18 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

2. Mount the HSDCD Receiver over the HSDCD Antenna fastening its two screws.
3. Assemble the HSDCD Support 1 to the HSDCD Receiver Antenna with three M6x12 mounting screws and
washers. (Illustration 9-15).
Illustration 9-15 Assembling HSDCD Support 1

HSDCD
Receiver
Antenna
HSDCD Support 1
4. Assemble the HSDCD Support 2 to the HSDCD Support 1. Fasten the Hole A with M4x8 screw and washer
and only screw for Hole B. (Illustration 9-16).
5. Screw provisionally two M4x12 screws (Horizontal Adjustment) in the HSDCD Support 1 (Illustration 9-16).
Illustration 9-16 Assembling HSDCD Supports

M4x12 Screw
(x2) (Horizontal
Adjustment)
HSDCD Support 1 HSDCD Support 2
M4x8
Screw and
washer (x2)
Hole A
Hole B
M4x8
Screw (x2)
9-19 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

6. Assemble the HSDCD Support 3, 4 onto the HSDCD Receiver Antenna. Fasten the Hole A with M4x8 screw
and washer and only screw for Hole B. (Illustration9-17).
Illustration 9-17 Assembling HSDCD Support 3 and 4

HSDCD Support 4 HSDCD Support 3
M4x8
Screw and
washer (x2)
M4x8
Screw (x2)
Hole B Hole A
9-20 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
HSDCD Receiver Assy installation

1. Install the HSDCD Receiver Assy on the Mounting Plate.
Gantry.
HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION.
9-21 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Assembling and installing HSDCD Brush Block

1. Remove RF Brush Block Support and its Brush Block Base.
2. Replace the RF Brush Block Base to the HSDCD Slip Ring Brush Block base.
3. Install the HSDCD Slip Ring Brush Block Base into the Brush Block Support and fasten provisorily its 2 screws.
9-22 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

4. Install the HSDCD Slip Ring Brush Block Base into the Brush Block Support and fasten provisorily with 4
screws. (Illustration 9-18).
Illustration 9-18 Brush Block Base and Brush Block Support for HSDCD Slip Ring
Screws (x4)
Brush Block Support

Brush Block Base
5. Install the Brush Block Support in its original position and fasten its 4 screws (top and bottom).
Screws (x2)
Brush Block
Support with
Brush Block
Base
Screws (x2)
9-23 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

6. Install the Brush Block Plate and fasten with its 2 screws (top and bottom) as shown in the Illustration 9-20.
Illustration 9-20 Brush Block Plate
Screw
Brush Block Plate
Screw
9-24 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Block Jig positioning adjustment

2. Rotate the Slip Ring by hand so that the outermost perimeter (marked in the step 2 of Checking if the HSDCD
is not slantingly installed, Illustration 9-12 ) of Slip Ring stay at 9 o’clock position.
3. Install the Block Jig into the Brush Block Base and fasten with 4 screws.
Illustration 9-21 Brush Block Jig

M6x25 Screws (x4)
Block Jig
9-25 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

4. Pull the Block Jig so that it keeps in contact with outermost face of Slip Ring Track barrier. (Illustration 9-22 and
9-23).
Block Jig
Slip Ring Make the Pin in

contact with the
internal face of
pin Slip Ring Track Pin Track Barrier
Slip Ring
Slip Ring
Track Barrier
Block Jig
The internal face of Block Jig must

stay in contact with Slip Ring
Block Jig pin
9-26 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
NOTICE
The Block Jig must be simultaneously in contact with the Slip Ring and its pins in contact
with the Slip Ring Track Barrier before fastening the screws.
5. Fasten the 4 screws, indicated as “A” in the Illustration 9-24, of HSDCD Brush Block Base, where each two of
them located on the top and bottom.
6. Loosen the two“B” screws, indicated in the Illustration 9-24.
Illustration 9-24 Brush Block Jig
A
Screws (x4)
Just Touch
top and bottom the Block Jig
Torque=11.7N.m
C
Screws (x2)
Torque=11.7N.m
B
Screw with
nuts (x2)
Use the special allen wrench

provided in the SR Replace-
ment Kit to fasten the two screws
9-27 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

7. Certify that the Block Jig keeps in contact with the Slip Ring.
8. Fasten the two screws that holds the Brush Block Base Support into the Brush Block Base using the Special
allen wrench provided in the SR Replacement Kit. (“C” of Illustration 9-24)
9. Measure the clearance between the Slip Ring and the Block Jig in four points indicated in the Illustration 9-25
using the 0.1mm thickness gage provided in the SV Tool.
10. Certify that the Pins of Block Jig keeps in contact with the inner Slip Ring Barrier.
11. Screw the two screws with nuts of Brush Block Plate until touching the border of Block Jig as shown as “B” of
Illustration 9-24. These screws will determine the horizontal position of Brush Block.
12. Fasten the nuts until touching the Support Plate (Illustration 9-24).
13. Lock these two screws and nuts with “locktite”.
NOTICE
Keep the screws of Brush Block Plate, used for Brush Block stopper guide firmed (”B” of
Illustration 9-24). Once loosened, the Block Jig positioning must be performed again.
Illustration 9-25 Clearance between the Slip Ring and Block Jig
HSDCD Slip Ring

Slip Ring
less than
0.1 mm
Block Jig
Block Jig Clearance must be

less than 0.1 mm
Note
If the clearance is greater than 0.1mm, loosen all screws fastened in the steps 5 and 11 and then
restart the Block Jig positioning adjustment from the step 3.
14. Remove the Block Jig by unscrewing its 4 screws.
9-28 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Rubbing the Brush Block before installation
NOTICE
For an eventual brush breakage, check the type and replace it provided in the service tool
kit.
1. Push and free few times the brushes of Brush Block Assy by finger with a kim wipe between the finger and
brush and check whether they glide smothly into the brush holder.
Illustration 9-26 Checking the worn-out brushes
Brushes
2. Fasten the two guide pins, provided in the Service Tool Kit as shown in the Illustration 9-27.
NOTICE
9-29 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Brush Block Installation

1. Insert the Guide Pins (x2) in the Brush Block. (Illustration 9-27).
NOTICE
the groove of Slip Ring.
Move the Brush Block always in perpendicular direction in relation with the Slip Ring
surface.
2. Insert the Brush Block Assy in the Pin Jigs. Take care to not to damage the brushes.
Illustration 9-27 Brush Block and guide pins
Guide Pins
9-30 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Illustration 9-28 HSDCD Brush Block

HSDCD Slip Ring
Guide
Pins HSDCD Brush Block
3. When inserting the Brush Block, certify that the Brushes are positioned in the middle of Slip Ring Track
and not in contact with Slip Ring Barrier.
Illustration 9-29 Certify that the Brushes are in contact with the middle of Slip Ring Track
Slip Ring
Slip Ring Barrier
Slip Ring Track
Brush
Brush Block
9-31 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
NOTICE
the groove of Slip Ring but not on the Slip Ring Track Barrier.
Keep the Brush Block always in parallel with the Slip Ring surface.
4. Push the Brush Block against the Slip Ring and the Brush Block Plate.
5. Fasten the first two M6x35 Allen screws and washers gradually. (Illustration 9-30).
6. Remove the guide pins.
7. Fasten the remaining two Allen screws with washer.
Illustration 9-30 Brush Block Assy install
M6x35 Allen Screw pushing si-

screws (x4) multaneously the
Brush Block
Torque=11.5N.m against the Slip
Ring and the Brush
Block Plate
NOTICE
For an eventual brush breakage, check the type and replace it provided in the service tool
kit.
9-32 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Clearance check
The objective of this procedure is to obtain a better accuracy by familiarizing yourself the clearance of a determined
thickness before checking the clearance between the Slip Ring and the Brush Block Assy.
Prepare the following measurement tools:
• Shim (Alignment Tool)
• 4.3mm Master Gauge (Alignment Tool)
a. Prepare a 4.3mm shim and insert/remove few times in the Master Gauge groove enough to familiarize this
clearance.
Illustration 9-31 Master Gauge
Master Gauge
Master Gauge
4.3mm shim
9-33 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

1. Rotate the Slip Ring by hand and check in four points of its revolution the clearance between the Slip Ring and
Brush Block. (Illustration 9-33), as follows:
a. Verify that the clearance is between 3.5mm and 5.7mm.
Illustration 9-32 Tolerated clearance between the Slip Ring and Brush Block
Thickness
gauge
15mm
carry out the

measure 15mm
below the top of
Brush Block
Thickness
gauge
Thickness
gauge
carry out the mea

15mm sure 15mm above
the bottom of
Brush Block
9-34 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

2. Rotate the Slip Ring by hand and verify visually whether the Brushes goes through at the middle of Slip Ring
Track along its course.
3. If at least one of the steps 1 and 2 is not in accordance with its tolerance, proceed the steps 7 to 1 in reverse
order and restart the Block Jig positioning adjustment from step 1.
4. Switch ON the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear base.
Illustration 9-33 Tolerated clearance between the Slip Ring and Brush Block
Slip Ring
Slip Ring Barrier
Slip Ring Track
Clearance
Brush
Brush Block
Note
If one of the two steps above does not agree, remove the Brush Block and proceed the Block Jig
positioning adjustment again.
9-35 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Power and Signal Cables Connection

1. Connect all power cables (including the GND cable) to the power bars, removed in the step 1c.
2. Connect the connector CN1 to its original configuration.
Note
The power and GND cables become longer when replaced from RF Brush Block to the HSDCD Slip
Ring type Brush Block.
3. Fasten the power, signal and GND cables.
4. Attach the tie wrap bases just about in the locations shown in Illustration 9-35 and 9-34.
Illustration 9-34 Power Cables, GND Cable and Connector CN1

tie wrap and bases (x5)
Power Cables
tie wrap (x1)
Cable Protector
Cover
Connector CN1
tie wrap (x1)
9-36 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

5. Connect all power cables (including GND cable) to the power bars.
6. Connect the connector CN1 to its original configuration.
Note
The power and GND cables become longer when replaced from RF Brush Block to the HSDCD
Brush Block. Arrange the cables in excess as indicated in the next steps.
7. Arrange the cables in excess so that keep closed by the side plate as shown in the Illustration 9-35.
8. Fasten the power and GND cables.
Illustration 9-35 Tie wrap bases location and cabling arrangement
Gantry - Right Side tie wrap and bases (x4)
tie wrap and

bases (x2)
tie wrap and
bases (x4)
tie wrap and

bases (x1)
9. Tilt the Gantry and verify that the cables does not get tensioned.
9-37 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

10. Arrange the Signal cable CN1 in excess so that keep arranged as shown in the Illustration 9-36.
11. Attach the tie wrap bases.
12. Fasten the Cable CN1 as shown in the Illustration below.
Illustration 9-36 Signal Cable CN1
tie wrap and Brush Block

bases (x4)
CN1
9-38 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
HSDCD Receiver Assy

1. Perform section 3-1-2, HSDCD Receiver Assy, to assembly the HSDCD Receiver.
2. Perform section 3-1-2-2, HSDCD Antenna Assy, to install the HSDCD Antenna.
HSDCD Wiring
1. Fix the signal cable with tie wrap. (See Illustration 9-37).
Illustration 9-37 Tie wrap and edge guard

HSDCD
Receiver
(cover) Tie wrap and base
9-39 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
HSDCD Slip Ring Covers

1. Reconnect all disconnected cables.
2. Attach the HSDCD Slip Ring Covers as shown in the Illustration 9-38.
HSDCD Slip
Ring Assy
Slip Ring Covers
9-40 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

3. Attach the HSDCD Receiver Assy Cover as follows: as shown in the Illustration 9-40.
Note
Before attaching the HSDCD Receiver cover, dispose the RF cables so that between the cables
and mentioned cover exist enough play and certify that after installed the cover, the cables are not
tensioned.
Illustration 9-39 RF cables close by HSDCD Antenna
RF Cables close by
HSDCD Antenna
a. Fasten the HSDCD Receiver Assy Cover with Slip Ring Cover. Use special washers provided in the
Replacement Kit.
b. Fasten the HSDCD Receiver Assy Cover with the HSDCD Receiver Assy.
Illustration 9-40 HSDCD Receiver Assy Cover

HSDCD Receiver Screw (x2)
Assy Cover
Slip Ring Cover
Screw and
special
Washer (x2)
Arrange the
cables
9-41 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Label Attachment
1. Attach the following label on the Brush Block according to the Illustration 9-41.
• GND label (U0022BN)
Illustration 9-41 GND Label
GND Label
9-42 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773

2. Install the Signal Brush Protector Cover.
3. Attach the following labels on the Brush Block and Signal Brush Protector Cover according to the Illustration
9-42.
• Warning Label (2245814) x 2: one over the Signal Protector Cover and other over the Power Cables
Protector Cover;
• Attention Label (P9183QE): over the Signal Protector Cover;
• Warning Label (2249330): over the Signal Protector Cover;
• Arrow Label (P9183PX) x 4: over the Brush Block;
Illustration 9-42 Brush Block Labels

Signal Brush
Protector Cover
Warning Label
(2245814) x 2
Arrow Label
(P9183PX) x4 Attention Label
(P9183QE)
Warning Label
(2249330)
9-43 GANTRY
REV 30 2244773
Functional Check
1. Rotate the Gantry by hand and perform the following checks:
2. Perform the Gantry rotation during approximatelly 10 minutes and verify that there is no irregular noises as
follows:
a. Switch ON the “Rotate”, “XG Power”, “Slip Ring115V” and “Table Tilt” switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
c. Switch to MNL the SYS Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
d. Switch to FIX the ABT Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
e. Switch to SPD2 the SPD Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
f. Switch to FAST the SW4 Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
g. Switch to CNT the SW5 Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
HSDSD SLIP RING ↔ HSDCD BRUSH CONTACT CHECK
DAS TRANSFER TEST
5. END
9-44 GANTRY
REV 37 2244773
TABLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - YMS TABLE (2244226-X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF THE TABLE COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-1 Bottom Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-2 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 CRADLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-4 CRADLE ENCODER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-5 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-6 STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-7 STEPPING MOTOR ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-8 TBL BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-9 TBL CONNECTOR BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-10 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1-11 TOUCH SW ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-12 LATCH SWITCH ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-13 FOOT SWITCH ASSY (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1-14 TABLE SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-15 TABLE HYDRAULIC CYLINDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1-16 TABLE OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1-17 TABLE PUMP (FILLING) LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1-17-1 Table Pump (Filling) Minor Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1-17-2 Table Pump (Filling) Major Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
1-18 TABLE PUMP CAPACITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1-19 FOOT SWITCH (PEDAL AND LARGE MAT TYPE FOOT SWITCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
1-19-1 Pedal Type Foot Switch replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
1-19-2 Large Mat Type Foot Switch to Pedal Type Foot Switch replacement . . . . . 1-45
1-19-3 Large Mat Type Foot Switch replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
1-20 HEAD HOLDER RUBBER SHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
1-21 TABLE SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
SECTION 2 - LCT TABLE (2297024/2302759) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF THE TABLE COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-1 Bottom Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-2 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 CRADLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
i TABLE
REV 37 2244773
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
2-4 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER PULLEY METAL CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-4-2 Remove the Old Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-4-3 Install the new Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-5 CRADLE ENCODER ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2-6 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-7 STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2-8 STEPPING MOTOR ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-9 TBL BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2-10 TBL CONNECTOR BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2-11 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2-12 TOUCH SW ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
2-13 LATCH SWITCH ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2-14 FOOT SWITCH ASSY (FOR LCT TABLE WITH FOOT SWITCH - 2302759) . . . . . . 2-32
2-15 TABLE SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2-16 TABLE HYDRAULIC CYLINDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2-17 TABLE OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2-18 TABLE PUMP (FILLING) LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2-19 TABLE PUMP (FILLING) MAJOR LUBRICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2-20 TABLE PUMP CAPACITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2-21 PEDAL TYPE FOOT SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2-22 HEAD HOLDER RUBBER SHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
2-23 TABLE SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
ii TABLE
REV 37 2244773
SECTION 1 - YMS TABLE (2244226-X)
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
1-1 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-1 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF THE TABLE COVERS
1-1-1 Bottom Cover
Special Equipment
• None
1. Move the cradle OUT to its fully retracted position (farthest from Gantry).
2. Raise the Table to its highest position.
3. Switch OFF the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the two screw caps from the rear bottom cover.
5. Unscrew the two screws and remove the rear bottom cover.
6. Remove the four screw covers from foot pedals.
Note
If the Foot Pedal Option is not installed, skip to step 8.
7. Unscrew the four Allen screws and remove the four foot pedals.
8. Remove the four screw caps from the front bottom cover.
9. Unscrew the four screws and remove the front bottom cover.
10. END
Illustration 1-1 Table front and rear Bottom Covers
Screw Cover
Foot Pedal
Screw Caps
Rear Bottom Cover Front Bottom Cover
1-2 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-1-2 Top Cover
Special Equipment
• None
1. Switch OFF the “XG Power” and “Rotate” switches, and switch ON the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear
base.
2. Set the Table to its highest position.
5. Unscrew and remove the top cover(left or right) bottom holding screws. The illustration 1-2 shows the screw
locations.
6. Slide the top cover (left or right) free from the Table until the latch and touch sensor switch connectors are
visible.
7. Disconnect the latch switch and touch sensor switch cable connectors.
8. Remove the top cover (left or right).
9. END
1-3 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-1-2 Top Cover (continued)
Illustration 1-2 Top Cover
Touch Sensor Connector

: Screw Location
Top Cover–R
Top Cover–L
Latch Switch
Connector
1-4 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-2 CRADLE
Special Equipment
• None
base.
5. Remove the screw cap and unscrew the four Allen screws from the cradle end, and then slide out the cradle.
6. After installing the new cradle, perform the adjustment according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check &
Adjustment.
Gap Between Cradle and Cradle Support
7. END
Illustration 1-3 Cradle End
Cradle
Allen Screws
with Screw Cap
1-5 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-3 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER
Special Equipment
• Cradle Potentiometer
• Tie wraps
1. Switch OFF the ”XG” and ”Rotate” switches, and switch ON the ”Table/Tilt” switch on the Gantry rear base.
4. Switch OFF the ”Table/Tilt” switch on the rear base of the Gantry.
5. Remove the Left Side Cover of the Table. See Illustration 1-4.
Illustration 1-4 TABLE LEFT SIDE COVER
LEFT SIDE COVER

G
A
N
TABLE T
R
(TOP VIEW)
Y
6. Remove the Cradle. Refer to section 1-2 CRADLE.

7. Remove both bottom covers. Refer to section 1-1-1 BOTTOM COVERS.
8. Remove the cover which is located under the cradle closest to the Gantry (4 screws).
9. Remove the cradle tray (4 screws).
10. Remove the TABLE BOARD ASSY protective cover (4 screws). Its location is shown in illustration 1-5.
1-6 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-3 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER (CONTINUED)
Illustration 1-5 TABLE BOARD ASSY LOCATION
TABLE BOARD ASSY

GANTRY
TABLE
DRIVER
SIDE VIEW
TABLE BOARD ASSY LOCATION
11. Disconnect connector CN3 from the TABLE BOARD ASSY.

12. Verify that the end of the cradle is in the out limit position, then loosen the two coupling screws closest to the
Potentiometer. Refer to Illustrations 1-6 and 1-7.
Note
Be careful not to move the thin cradle potentiometer cable.
Illustration 1-6 POTENTIOMETER LOCATION

CRADLE CABLE
SET SCREWS
POTENTIOMETER
POTENTIOMETER LOCATION
1-7 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
Illustration 1-7 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER
Disk
SUPPORT SCREWS (2)
COUPLING
SUPPORT BRACKET
COUPLING SCREWS
(POTENTIOMETER SIDE)
SET NUT
POTENTIOMETER
1
2
3
4
CN3
MEASURE RESISTANCE
BETWEEN
PIN 2 AND PIN 3
13. Remove the support bracket together with the Potentiometer Assy, with its wires still attached, by unscrewing
the support screws shown in illustration 1-7 and then feeding connector CN3 up through the table.
14. Remove the set nut and transfer the support bracket to the new cradle potentiometer . Tighten the bracket in
place using the set nut.
15. Feed the wiring of the new Potentiometer down to the TABLE BOARD ASSY, retie any tie wraps which were
removed in step 13.
16. Install the new potentiometer/support bracket, and tighten the support screws.
1-8 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

17. Adjust the Potentiometer so that the resistance between Pin 2 and Pin 3 of CN3 is 500Ω +/-100Ω . Then
tighten the two coupling screws (Illustration 1-7).
Note
It may be difficult to access one of the coupling screws after adjusting the potentiometer. If this is
the case, then tighten the accessible coupling screw and move the cradle sightly forward toward
the Gantry. Tighten the second coupling screw and then return the cradle handle to its mechanical
outer limit.
18. Verify that the resistance between Pin 2 and Pin 3 of CN3 is still 500Ω +/-100Ω. If it is not then repeat step 17.
19. Perform steps 11 through 5 in their reverse order.
20. Perform a P0, PG longitudinal adjustment. (Refer to Functional Check & Adjustment, Table, Longitudinal
Function, Cradle Absolute Position.)
21. END
1-9 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-4 CRADLE ENCODER ASSY
Special Equipment
• Cradle Encoder Assy
• Tie wraps
base.
4. Remove the following cover and component from the Table:
• Cradle . . . . . . Refer to Cradle
• Top Cover (Both Side) . . . . . . Refer to Top Cover
• Drive Cover . . . . . . Four(4) Screws
Illustration 1-8 Table
Drive Cover
Cradle
1-10 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-4 CRADLE ENCODER ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Disconnect the cable connector leading from the encoder.
6. Loosen the set screw, then remove the encoder disk from the encoder shaft.
7. Remove the encoder assy from the encoder holder by unscrewing its 3 screws.
8. Install the new encoder assy by referring to steps 7 through 5.
9. Restore the Table to original configuration.
CRADLE RELATIVE POSITION
Longitudinal Accuracy
Cradle Repeatability
11. END
Illustration 1-9 Cradle Pulley Removal
Encoder Assy
Cable Connector
Encoder Disk
Encoder Holder
Set Screw
1-11 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-5 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER
Special Equipment
• Height Potentiometer
• Tie wraps
• Grease
Note
It may be necessary to lower the Table to gain access to one of the height potentiometer coupling
screws. If this is done then be sure to return the Table to its highest position, and return the Gantry
“Table/Tilt” switch to the OFF position.
base.
2. Lower the Table to the mechanical down limit position.
4. Remove the left side maintenance cover from the Gantry.
5. Remove the following covers and component from the Table:
• Top Cover-L Refer to Top Cover
• Cradle Refer to Cradle
• Left and Right Rail Covers Four(4) x2 Screws
• Cradle Tray Six(6) Screws
1-12 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-5 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER (CONTINUED)

6. Replace the Height Potentiometer as follows:
a. Loosen the two coupling set screws.
b. Remove the Potentiometer Assy together with its bracket by unscrewing the two support nuts.
c. Disconnect the connector CN5 from the TBL CON BD Assy and feed it up through the Table.
d. Remove the Height Potentiometer assy from the bracket, and mount the new Potentiometer Assy onto the
old bracket.
e. Install the new Height Potentiometer/bracket Assy to the Table left side frame.
f. Apply grease to the potentiometer shaft if necessary.
g. Feed the wiring of the new Potentiometer to the TBL CON BD Assy and retie all the tie-wraps which were
removed in step 6c. and 6d.
h. Connect the new CN5 connector to the TBL CON BD Assy.
Illustration 1-10 Height Potentiometer
To Gantry
Bracket
Potentiometer Nut Plate Support Nuts (2)

Height Potentiometer
TABLE TOP VIEW
Height Potentiometer Plate Support Nuts
To Gantry
BRACKET SIDE VIEW
1-13 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

7. Adjust the Height Potentiometer as follows:
a. Switch OFF the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Set the T3 (interlock release) and T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to ON position.
c. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board so that the height display on the Gantry Display reads 011.
d. Adjust the potentiometer so that the position display reads 120 ± 55.
Note
Adjust the Height Potentiometer value by turning the potentiometerís shaft with a trimmer adjuster/
tweaker (small slotted screw driver). It can be accessed through the hole in the left side cover as
shown in illustration 1-11.
e. Tighten the two coupling set screws.
f. Set the T3 and T6 switches of the TGP S1 dip-switch to OFF position.
H0, HG HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
10. END
Illustration 1-11 Height Potentiometer Adjustment
Use this hole to adjust the

potentiometer
1-14 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-6 STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER
Special Equipment
• Stepping Motor Driver Assy
• Tie-wraps
4. Remove the following cover from the Table:
• Rear Bottom Cover Refer to Bottom Cover
5. Disconnect the three cable connectors (CN1 ∼ CN3) from the Stepping Motor Driver Assy.
6. Remove the Stepping Motor Driver Assy by unscrewing its two screws.
7. Install the new Stepping Motor Driver Assy by referring to steps 6. through 5.
9. END
1-15 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-7 STEPPING MOTOR ASSY
Special Equipment
• Stepping Motor Assy
• Tie-wraps
• Top Cover L Refer to Top Cover
Illustration 1-12 Stepping Motor Location
Cradle
Stepping Motor Assy
1-16 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-7 STEPPING MOTOR ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Disconnect the cable connector (CN37) leading from the Stepping Motor Assy.
6. Loosen the two screws that fasten the motor support bracket to the Table frame, to relieve the belt tension.
7. Remove the four screws that fasten the stepping motor to the motor support bracket, and remove the drive belt
from the stepping motor pulley, and slide stepping motor out of the motor support bracket.
8. Remove the stepping motor pulley from the stepping motor shaft by loosening the set screw, and transfer the
pulley to the new stepping motor.
9. Install the new stepping motor by referring to steps 7 through 5.
11. END
Illustration 1-13 Stepping Motor Assy

Block Pulley Brkt Pulley
Shaft Pot Bearing
Roller
Cradle Encoder
Step Motor
Belt
L Angle Pot Pulley
Motor Support
1-17 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-8 TBL BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• TBL Board Assy
• Tie-wraps
4. Remove the following covers from the Table:
• Front Bottom Cover Refer to Bottom Cover
5. Disconnect the all cable connectors (CN1 ∼ CN9) from the TBL Board Assy.
6. Remove the TBL Board Assy by unscrewing its four screws.
7. Install the new TBL Board Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
9. END
Illustration 1-14 TBL Board Location
TBL Board Assy
1-18 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-9 TBL CONNECTOR BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• TBL Connector Board Assy
• Tie-wraps
4. Remove the following cover:
• Top Cover - L Refer to Top Cover
5. Disconnect the all cable connectors from the TBL Connector Board Assy.
6. Remove the TBL Connector Board Assy by unscrewing its four screws.
7. Install the new TBL Connector Board Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
9. END
Illustration 1-15 TBL Connector Board Location
Top Cover L
TBL Connector Board Assy
1-19 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-10 POWER SUPPLY
Special Equipment
• Power Supply Assy
• Tie-wraps
5. Pop free and remove the plastic guard from the front of the power supply terminals.
7. Remove the Power Supply by unscrewing its four side support screws.
8. Install the new Power Supply by referring to steps 7 through 5.
10. END
Illustration 1-16 Power Supply
Power Supply
1-20 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-11 TOUCH SW ASSY
Special Equipment
• Touch SW Assy
•Top Cover R / LRefer to Top Cover
5. Remove the Touch SW1 Assy from the Table top cover.
6. Thread the Touch SW cable connector through the cable hole in the Table top cover, and attach the new Touch
SW Assy to the Table top cover.
8. Verify that Touch SW Assy is operating normally.
9. END
Illustration 1-17 Touch SW Assy Location
Touch SW Assy
1-21 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-12 LATCH SWITCH ASSY
Special Equipment
• Latch Switch Assy
• Tie-wraps
• Top Cover R / L Refer to Top Cover
5. Push the release tab, and firmly pull the switch away from the Table cover.
6. Unscrew the ring nut, and remove the button cover from the Table cover.
7. Install the new Latch Switch Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
9. END
Illustration 1-18 Latch Switch Assy
Release Tab
Latch Switch
Button Cover Ring Nut
1-22 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-13 FOOT SWITCH ASSY (OPTION)
Special Equipment
• Foot Switch Assy
• Tie-wraps
• Protect Cover Three(3) Screws
5. Disconnect the four wires from the Foot Switch Assy.
6. Remove the Foot Switch Assy by unscrewing its six screws.
7. Install the new Foot Switch Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
9. END
Illustration 1-19 Foot Switch Assy
Screw (x6)
Spacer
Foot Switch Assy
1-23 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-14 TABLE SOLENOID VALVE
Special Equipment
• Table Solenoid Valve
• Support Tool (2212864)
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie-wraps
• Kim wipe
WARNING
CRASH HAZARD!
THE TABLE MUST BE SUPPORTED USING THE SUPPORT TOOL AS DESCRIBED BELOW
WHEN CHANGING THE SOLENOID VALVE.
1. Remove the following covers and component:
• Top Covers (Left and Right side) Refer to Top Cover
• Left and Right Rail Covers Four(4)x2 Screws
• Bottom Covers (front and bottom) Refer to BOTTOM COVER
NOTICE
VOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE!
Do not forget to switch OFF the T3 Table Dip switch, other wise here will be collision hazard,
since the interlock function does not word, if T3 is set to ON.
1-24 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-14 TABLE SOLENOID VALVE (CONTINUED)

2. For systems where the Table lowest height is set to 400 mm (Normal Setting), lower the Table to its lower
mechanical limit position.
a. If the Table can not be lowered down to mechanical limit position due to the interlock function, switch ON
(up) the T3 Table dip switch to disable the interlock function, and continue to lower the Table. In this case,
be careful not to have the Table collide against anything (including the Table mechanical limit).
For systems where the Table lowest height is set to 650 mm (Compact Siting Mode or short foot print mode),
attach the support tool as follows:
Note
When using the support tool, the adjuster should be partially extended, about 5cm, before
supporting the Table.
b. Assemble the Table Support Tool.
c. Attach the support tool to the undersurface of the Table on the side farthest from the Gantry using the four
bolts currently screwed into the bottom of the Frame. Lower the Table onto the support.
d. Switch OFF the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
Illustration 1-20 Table Support Tool
(FRONT VIEW) (SIDE VIEW)

Frame
Support Tool
Leg of the Adjuster

Support Tool
Bolts(4)
Adjuster
1-25 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

3. Remove the solenoid valve as follows:
a. Disconnect the power wire connector leading from the solenoid valve.
b. Slightly loosen the set and tightening nuts securing the high pressure hoses, then disconnect the high
pressure hose.
c. Loosen the set and tightening nuts and disconnect the return hose.
Illustration 1-21 Table Solenoid
Flow Adjuster Solenoid Valve

Elbow Joint
Elbow Joint Set Nut
Tightening
Nut
Flow Control Valve
Set Nut
High Pressure Hose

Return Hose
to Power Line Connector
Cylinder
1-26 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

d. Remove the solenoid valve from the elbow joint on flow control valve by turning it CCW.
Note
When wrapping sealing tape around end joints, wrap the tape in the opposite direction of the
threads (about one and half turns).
e. Remove the elbow joint from the solenoid valve and attache it to the new solenoid valve using sealing tape.
f. Install the new solenoid valve assy to the elbow joint on the flow control valve.
g. Attache the high pressure hose and return hose to the new solenoid valve (see illustration 1-21).
h. Connect the power wire connector and cover it with oil-proof tube.
i. Adjust the flow adjuster by turning it fully CW and then two full turns CCW.
j. Tighten all nuts and retie any wraps which have been removed.
Illustration 1-22 Table Solenoid Replacement
Elbow Joint Elbow Joint
Flow Control Valve
Old Solenoid Valve

Flow Adjuster
Set Nut
New Solenoid Valve
Power Line Connector
Flow Control Valve
Oil-Proof Tube
1-27 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

4. Loosen the adjuster of the support tool and carefully remove the support tool from under the table.
5. Switch ON the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
6. Lower the Table and verify that the all movement is smooth and normal.
CAUTION
CRASH HAZARD.
Do not move the Table upwards after replacing the magnetic flow valve until it has been
lowered first; this will feed unwanted air into the valve.
7. Move the Table up and verify that it is operating normally. If there is a shortage of oil (the Table will not rise to
its normal limit), add more oil by referring to TABLE POMP MINOR LUBRICATION.
8. Move the Table up and down a few times to remove air from the hydraulic system. The Table moves smoothly
when the air inside is removed.
10. END
Illustration 1-23 Table Support Tool Removal
1-28 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-15 TABLE HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
Special Equipment
• Table Hydraulic Cylinder
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie-wraps
• Kim wipe
WARNING
CRASH HAZARD!
DO NOT REMOVE THE CYLINDER WITHOUT REMOVING THE UPPER STRUCTURAL
SUPPORT, UPPER SUPPORT, AND U-COLUMN FIRST.
Note
If the maximum height can not be achieved then it will be more difficult to lubricate the pump
following replacement of the cylinder. The maximum height is approximately 1000mm measured
from the Table frame to the lowest point of the cradle top surface.
•Cradle Refer to Cradle
•Rear Cover Four(4) Screws
•Left and Right Rail Covers Four(4)x2 Screws
•Cradle Tray Six(6) Screws
•Bottom Covers (front and bottom) Refer to BOTTOM COVER
1-29 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-15 TABLE HYDRAULIC CYLINDER (CONTINUED)

2. Attach the support tool as follows (see illustration 1-20):
Note
a. Assemble the Table Support Tool.
Leg of the Support Tool
Adjuster
Bolts(4)
b. Attach the support tool to the undersurface of the Table on the side farthest from the Gantry using the four
c. Switch OFF the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
3. Disengage the upper blocks from the U-column by unscrewing six support bolts.
Illustration 1-24 Cylinder/U-Column Removal
Upper Block
Upper Shaft
Hex Bolts (6)
Cylinder
Column
Rod End
1-30 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

4. Remove the oil return hose from the hydraulic cylinder
5. Remove the solenoid valve from the cylinder.
6. Remove the flow control valve from the old cylinder, then attach to the new cylinder using sealing tape.
Verify that the flow control valve should be at an angle of approximately 0° to the cylinder.
7. Attach the solenoid valve to the new cylinder.
8. Attache the return hose to the new cylinder.
Illustration 1-25 Removal/Attachment of the Flow Control Valve and the Solenoid Valve
: Remove or Attach
Solenoid Valve
High Pressure Hose
Return Hose
Flow Control Valve

Return Hose
Cylinder
Rod End
A
1-31 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

9. Remove the small metal hole guard from the inside of the lower right side support.
10. Remove the lower shaft and slide it out of the exposed side hole.
11. Remove the rod and the cylinder together.
12. Measure the distance ’B’ : between the rod end and the rod base of the old cylinder.
13. Adjust the new rod to the same distance, ’B’, as the old rod.
14. Install the new rod and cylinder using the lower shaft. Tighten the lower shaft into place.
15. Return the hole guard to the side support and screw it into place.
Illustration 1-26 Metal Hole Guard and Lower Shaft
(RIGHT SIDE VIEW) (FRONT VIEW)
Lower Shaft
SIde Cover S
Hole Guard Cylinder
Rod End
Lower Shaft
Nut
B Screw
1-32 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

16. Verify that all piping and hosing is in the proper configuration and will not catch.
17. Add oil to the pump by referring to the following section:
Initial Table Height Prior to

Refer to ...
Replacement
TABLE PUMP MINOR LUBRICATION
Maximum
(fully extended) When oiling the pump, the initial amount of oil poured into the pump should be
approximately 140 milliliters.
TABLE PUMP MAJOR LUBRICATION
Less than Maximum When oiling the pump, the initial amount of oil poured into the pump should be
approximately 50 milliliters for every 10mm that the rod could not be extended (for
every 10mm below the 255mm maximum rod extension ‘A’ in the illustration .1-25.
19. Raise and lower the Table repeatedly and Check the following:
a. Verify that the solenoid valve and U-Column surface is parallel.
b. Verify that the hosing does not catch or pull excessively.
21. END
Illustration 1-27 Solenoid Valve Configuration
U-Column
Cylinder
Solenoid Valve
1-33 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-16 TABLE OIL PUMP
Special Equipment
• Table Oil Pump
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie wrap
• Kim Wipe
This CT system contains one oil pump only for Gantry tilt and Table elevation, which is located at the table column.
Therefore, both of the hydraulic systems for Gantry tilt and Table elevation are jointed by the couplers. Refer to ’CT/
e, CT ProSpeed AI/FI Theory Manual, Table/Gantry TAB, Section 3-3 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FOR GANTRY TILT
/ TABLE ELEVATION’.
Note
The maximum height is approximately 900mm measured from the Table frame to the lowest point
of the cradles top surface.
• Cradle Refer to CRADLE
3. Switch OFF the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
1-34 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-16 TABLE OIL PUMP (CONTINUED)

4. Disconnect the power connector from the oil pump.
5. Disconnect the 4-line connector leading from the Gantry to the pump capacitor.
6. Measure the resistance across the terminals of the pump capacitor using a DVM. If the resistance increases,
the capacitor, the capacitor should be functional. If the resistance is zero or infinite, the capacitor is melted
down or shorted open. In this case replace the TABLE PUMP CAPACITOR.
Note
If you have replaced the Table pump capacitor, maybe the pump need no replacement. Check to
see if the pump is operational after replacing the capacitor.
CAUTION
CRASH HAZARD.
Do not modify the adjustments of Valve and handle its peripheral hoses with care.
Illustration 1-28 Table Pump / Capacitor Connections
To Gantry TOP VIEW
Capacitor
Oil Pump
1-35 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

7. Disconnect the GND cable from the oil pump.
8. Disconnect hose nuts shown in illustration 1-29. A small amount of oil may leak out, but this is acceptable.
9. Transfer the hose joints from the old pump to the new one.
10. Remove the pump assy by unscrewing the four Nuts holding it to the Table base.
11. Remove the pump base by unscrewing the four screws, and transfer the pump base to the new pump.
12. Install the new oil pump assy by referring to steps 11 through 4.
Verify that the hose configuration is correct.
Illustration 1-29 Table Oil Pump
Connector
To Valve (right) Nut
Joint
To Gantry
Nut and Joint
To Cylinder
Nut Joint
To Valve (center)
To Gantry Nut
Mounting Nuts
1-36 TABLE
REV 37 2244773


Refer to ...
Replacement
Maximum
When oiling the pump, the initial amount of oil poured into the pump should be
Less than Maximum approximately 50 milliliters for every 10mm that the rod could not be extended (for
every 10mm below the 255mm maximum rod extension ìAî in the illustration .1-
25.
14. Lower the Table to its lower limit position.

16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 a few times to remove all the air in the cylinder (the Table moves smoothly when the
air inside is removed). Stop this procedure at the Table upper limit position.
1-37 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-17 TABLE PUMP (FILLING) LUBRICATION
1-17-1 Table Pump (Filling) Minor Lubrication
Special Equipment
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Kim wipe
Note
This procedure is to be used for adding small amounts of oil to the pump only (no more than 0.15
liters). Use the instructions in the TABLE PUMP MAJOR LUBRICATION. for the addition of larger
amounts of oil such as those needed after replacing the hydraulic cylinder, or after replacing the
pump while the Table height is below maximum.
2. Remove the small air escape screw and the larger pouring mouth screw from the pump.
3. Pour the estimated required amount of oil into the pump, not more than 0.15 liters.
4. Lower the Table and watch the pump to see if excess oil spills out of the of the pump. If oil leaks out of the
pump holes then continue to lower the Table slowly while wiping up any oil which spills out of the pump.
5. Verify that the Table can rise to its maximum height of approximately 900mm measured from the Table frame
to the lowest point of the cradle top surface, and that all movement is smooth and normal.
6. Return the small air escape screw and the larger pouring mouth screw using sealing tape. Wrap the sealing
tape about one and a half times in the opposite direction of the threads.
8. END
Illustration 1-30 Oil Pump
Pouring Mouth
(Large)
Air Escape Screw

(Small)
1-38 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-17-2 Table Pump (Filling) Major Lubrication
Special Equipment
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie-wraps
• Kim wipe
Note
This procedure is for the addition of amounts of oil such as those needed after replacing the
hydraulic cylinder, or after replacing the pump while the Table height is below maximum. For adding
small amounts of oil to the pump refer to the TABLE PUMP MINOR LUBRICATION.
2. Move the Table to its lowest position.
3. Remove the small air escape screw and the large pouring mouth screw from the pump (see illustration 1-30).
4. Pour the estimated required, lost, amount of oil into the pump.
Note
The total pump capacity is 1.25 liters and the total Table system capacity is 1.4 liters.
to the lowest point of the cradles top surface, and that all movement is smooth and normal.
6. Continue to repeat steps 5 and 4 until no air is left in the cylinder or oil hoses. The Table moves smoothly when
the air inside is removed.
7. Return the small sir escape screw and the larger pouring mouth screw using sealing tape. Wrap the sealing
tape about one and half times in the opposite direction of the threads.
9. END
10.
1-39 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-18 TABLE PUMP CAPACITOR
Special Equipment
• Table Pump Capacitor Assy (with connectors)
• Tie wraps
3. Switch OFF the ìTable/Tiltî switch at the rear Gantry base.
4. Remove the capacitor from the capacitor plate by loosing the holding screw (see illustration 1-28).
5. Disconnect the power line connector leading to the pump.
6. Disconnect the 4-line connector leading into the Gantry from the pump capacitor.
7. Follow the black and white wires from the four wire connectors up through the Table U-column to where they
meet their upper connector. This will require cutting the tie wraps leading up through the U-column.
8. Install the new capacitor to the capacitor plate and tighten the holding screw.
9. Connect the pump power connector.
10. Tie up the loose wires with tie wraps.
11. Verify that the Table moves up and down normally.
13. END
1-40 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-19 FOOT SWITCH (PEDAL AND LARGE MAT TYPE FOOT SWITCH)
This subsection describes the procedure of the followings foot switches replacements:
• Pedal Type to Pedal Type Foot Switch (1-19-1);
• Large Mat Type to Pedal Type Foot Switch (1-19-2);
• Large Mat Type to Large Mat Type Foot Switch (1-19-3).
1-19-1 Pedal Type Foot Switch replacement
Right Side Pedal Type Foot Switch
Special Equipment
• Pedal Type Foot Switch
• Tie wraps
1. Move the Cradle to the out limit position. (farthest from Gantry)
3. Switch OFF the ’Table/Tilt, Rotate’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the rear and front bottom cover. (Illustration 1-31).
Illustration 1-31 Removing bottom covers
Pedal Type Foot

Switches
Bottom covers
1-41 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-19-1 Pedal Type Foot Switch replacement (continued)

5. Cut the tie-wrap that connects the Pedal Type Foot Switch and TBL Bd-Foot Switch cable. (Illustration 1-32).
6. Disconnect the Pedal Type Foot Switch connector.
7. Replace to the new Pedal Type Foot Switch.
Illustration 1-32 Connecting the Pedal Type Foot Switch (Right Side)
Coil the remaining Pedal

Type Foot Switch wiring
and tie with Tie-wrap
Cut this Tie-wrap
Edge
Guard
Approx.
20 to 30
cm.
Pedal Type Foot

Switch
to Foot
SW
to TBL
e
Ti w
Board – rap
8. Set the Pedal Type Foot Switch at right side of table. Keep approximately 20 to 30 cm of cable outside the table
and the remaining will be placed inside of bottom cover. (Illustration 1-32).
9. Connect the Pedal Type Foot Switch to the TBL Bd-Foot SW cable.
10. If the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable is too long, coil the remaining cable and tie it with tie-wrap. The cable
should occupy less space as possible to avoid obstructing the space of bottom cover.
11. Fix the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable with tie-wrap.
Verify that the cable is fixed secure.
Note
Certify that this tie-wrap holds the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable properly. The Pedal Type Foot
Switch must not be disconnected even an accidental kicking of it.
13. END
1-42 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
Left Side Pedal Type Foot Switch
Special Equipment
• Tie wraps
5. Cut the tie-wrap that connects the Pedal Type Foot Switch and TBL Bd-Mat Switch cable. (Illustration 1-33).
6. Disconnect the Foot Switch connector.
1-43 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

8. Connect the Pedal Type Foot Switch to the TBL Bd-Mat SW cable as shown in the Illustration 1-33.
should occupy less space as possible to avoid obstructing the space of bottom cover. (Illustration 1-33).
10. Fix the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable with tie-wrap as indicated in the Illustration 1-33.
Note
Illustration 1-33 Pedal Type Foot Switch replacement (Left Side)

Cut this tie – wrap to Type Foot Switch wiring
replace the Pedal Connectors and
– tie with tie wrap.
Type Foot Switch.
to TBL Board
Approx. 20
to 30 cm.
Pedal Type
Foot Switch
12. END
1-44 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-19-2 Large Mat Type Foot Switch to Pedal Type Foot Switch replacement
Special Equipment
• Tie wrap base
• Epoxy Adhesive
• Tie wraps
4. Remove the rear and front bottom cover.
Mat Type Foot

Switches
Bottom covers
1-45 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-19-2 Large Mat Type Foot Switch to Pedal Type Foot Switch replacement (continued)
5. Cut the tie-wraps that connect the Mat Type Foot Switch and TBL Bd-Mat Switch cable. (Illustration 1-35).
6. Disconnect the Mat Type Foot Switch connector and remove the Mat Type Foot Switch.
Illustration 1-35 Removing existing Mat Type Foot Switches
Right and Left Mat Type

Foot Switch
Tie-wraps (x5).
(Retie the cables
after removing the
Mat Switch cable)
TBL Board
Cut these Connectors

tie– wraps
1-46 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
7. Remove the TBL Bd-Mat SW cable from the main cabling but not disconnect it from TBL Board
Retie the cables after removing

the Mat Switch cable
Tie–wrap
Arrange and –
Attach the tie wrap
Attach the
tie the TBL base and stick to
Edge Guard
Bd-Mat the frame with
Switch cable epoxy adhesive
TBL Board
1
If the Foot Switch 2
cable is too long, coil
the remaining cable
and
3
4 Edge
Edge
Guard
Guard
Approx.
20 to 30
cm.
Pedal Type Foot

Switch
to Foot
SW
to TBL
Board Tie wrap and tie
wrap base
1-47 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
8. Arrange the TBL Bd-Mat SW cable so that it ocuppies the less space as possible over the TBL Board. Tie it
with tie-wrap as indicated in the Illustration 1-37 -1.
9. Stick the tie-wrap base with epoxy adhesive near to Table right side corner frame. (Illustration 1-37-2).
Note
This tie-wrap base should be strength of external mechanical tensions. Read the epoxy adhesive
instructions to know how to prepare the surfaces and provide a good adhesion.
10. Attach the edge guard on the vertical edge of right side corner of the Table as indicated in the Illustration 1-37-
2. The Pedal Type Foot Switch cable will pass through this place.
and the remaining cable will be placed inside of bottom cover. ( Illustration 1-37-3).
12. Connect the Pedal Type Foot Switch to the TBL Bd-Mat SW cable as shown in the Illustration 1-37-3.
should occupy less space as possible to avoid obstructing the space of bottom cover. (Illustration 1-37-3).
14. Fix the cable with tie-wrap as indicated in the Illustration 1-37-4.
Note
16. END
1-48 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
Special Equipment
• Tie wraps
5. Cut the tie-wrap that connects the Mat Type Foot Switch and TBL Bd-Mat Switch cable. (Illustration 1-37).
Illustration 1-37 Left Mat Type Foot Switch Removal
Left Mat Type

Foot Switch
Connectors
Cut this
tie wrap
to TBL Board
1-49 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
6. Disconnect the Mat Type Foot Switch connector.
7. Replace the Mat Type Foot Switch to Pedal Type Foot Switch.
9. If the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable is too long, coil the remaining cable and tie it with tie-wrap.The cable should
occupy less space as possible to avoid obstructing the space of bottom cover. (Illustration 1-38).
Note
Illustration 1-38 Connecting the Pedal Type Foot Switch (Left Side)

Connectors and
Tie–wrap
to TBL Board
Approx. 20
to 30 cm.
Pedal Type Foot

Switch
12. END
1-50 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-19-3 Large Mat Type Foot Switch replacement
Special Equipment
• Large Mat Type Foot Switch
• Tie wraps
4. Remove the rear and front bottom cover.
Large Mat Type

Foot Switches
Bottom covers
1-51 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-19-3 Large Mat Type Foot Switch replacement (continued)

5. Remove the existing Mat Type Foot Switch. Illustration 1-40 (right side) and Illustation 1-41 (left side).
Illustration 1-40 Right Side Mat Type Foot Switch removal
Large Mat Type Foot Switch
TBL Board
Cut these tie wraps to Connectors

disconnect and remove
the mat switch
1-52 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-19-3 Large Mat Type Foot Switch replacement (continued)
Illustration 1-41 Left Mat Type Foot Switch Removal
Left Mat Type

Foot Switch
Connectors
Cut this
tie wrap
to TBL Board
6. Connect the Mat Type Foot Switch connector with table connector.
7. Fix the cables with tie-wrap.
Verify that the cable is fixed securely.
9. END
1-53 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-20 HEAD HOLDER RUBBER SHEET
Special Equipment
• Rubber Set
• Kim Wipe
• Functional Check/Adjustment
1. Remove the existing rubber sheets from the head holder.
2. Rubber Sheet Selection
NOTICE
In the phase of rubber selection, do not attach the rubber yet !!!
When selecting the thicker rubber, the head holder can be latched securely with less horizontal free-play. However,
this causes hard latching and a customer might use the head holder with no latched, so that the head holder might
drop from the cradle and a patient might be injured.
So, try the different rubber in thickness to select the proper one.
a. First place the two 4.0 mm rubbers (the thickest rubber) onto both edges of the head holder as shown.
Note
• The rubber must be placed with its tab facing out.
• The thickness is printed on the rubber.
• You have only to place the rubber onto the holder. You do not need to set it in an upright position when
selecting the rubber.
1-54 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-20 HEAD HOLDER RUBBER SHEET (CONTINUED)

b. Insert it all the way into the cradle and press the head holder at proper pressure.
Press!
Latched
NOTICE
Do NOT press the head holder at high pressure when latching it. The plastic bolts for mount-
ing the latch mechanism might be damaged.
Plastic Bolts
1-55 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

c. Check if the head holder is latched on the cradle at the fist step of the latch mechanism. (The head holder
does not need to be latched at the second step.)
Check if the head holder has a small free-play in the horizontal direction.
Check the Head Holder for Horizontal Free Play.
d. When the head holder is not latched (the rubber is too thick to install), repeat steps 1 to 3 using the second-
thickest rubber (3.5mm).
Even if the thinnest rubber (0.5mm) can not be used, cut the tab of the 0.5mm rubber.
Cut !
Note
After adjustment, ask your customer to check the head holder free–play.
1-56 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

3. Rubber Installation:
a. Clean any dirt off the attaching surface of the rubbers using an alcohol as shown
b. Peel off a papers from the rubbers, then attach the rubbers on the head holder as shown.
Hold the rubber a few seconds with your fingers to attach it securely onto the head holder.
Note
The rubber must be attached with its tab facing out.
Tab
Tab
Rubbers
c. Latch the head holder to the cradle, then verify tha the head holder has a small free-play in the horizontal
direction.
1-57 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-21 TABLE SPEAKER
Special Equipment
• Speaker (5330489)
• Ladder or equivalent
• Tie wraps
Safety
WARNING
CRUSH HAZARD!
UNEXPECTED TABLE COLLAPSE CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY.
DO NOT REMOVE SIX SUPPORTING BOLTS FROM TABLE FRONT LEG DURING
REPLACING THE TABLE SPEAKER, IT WILL CAUSE THE TABLE TO COLLAPSE.
Procedure
1. Raise the Table to maximum height.
2. Move the Cradle/IMS to OUT limit position.
3. Remove power from Table by turning off 120VAC, Axial Drive and HVDC switches on Service Switch Panel.
1-58 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
1-21 TABLE SPEAKER (CONTINUED)

4. Remove the top side cover (left and right) bottom holding screws, then slide out it until the touch sensor cable
connector is visible.
Illustration 1-42 Left/Right Top Side Cover Removal
5. Disconnect the touch sensor cable connector and remove the top side cover.
6. Remove the left/right rail cover by unscrewing four cross-screws.
Illustration 1-43 Left Rail Cover Removal (example)
1-59 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

7. Remove the tray plate by unscrewing eight cross-screws.
Illustration 1-44 Tray Plate
NOTICE
The speaker is located on the table front arm, the service clearance is limited, ladder or
equivalent can be used as needed.
Illustration 1-45 Operate with Ladder
1-60 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

8. Disconnect two wire leads from the speaker, then remove the defective speaker from the speaker spacer by
un-securing two nuts. (See Figure 1-46)
NOTICE
The speaker is magnetic, it may create attractive force with surrounding metal frames. Take
of the speaker slowly and carefully to avoid possible bump injury by improper force during
its removal process.
Illustration 1-46 Speaker Removal
9. Take out a new speaker, use the magnet on the speaker to fix it in an easy-to-operate position, then reconnect
two wire leads.
Illustration 1-47 Wire Leads
1-61 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

10. Position the speaker to the speaker spacer of the table front arm, and fasten it by using two nuts.
11. Restore the table to original configuration.
12. Power up the Table from the Service Switch Panel.
13. Verify that the speaker is working normally.
1-62 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
SECTION 2 - LCT TABLE (2297024/2302759)
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
2-1 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-1 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF THE TABLE COVERS
2-1-1 Bottom Cover
Special Equipment
• None
4. Remove the two screw caps from the rear bottom cover.
5. Unscrew the two screws and remove the rear bottom cover.
6. Remove the four screw covers from foot pedals.
Note
If the Foot Pedal Option is not installed, skip to step 8.
7. Unscrew the four Allen screws and remove the four foot pedals.
8. Remove the four screw caps from the front bottom cover.
9. Unscrew the four screws and remove the front bottom cover.
10. END
Illustration 2-1 Table front and rear Bottom Covers
Screw Cover
Foot Pedal
Screw Caps
Rear Bottom Cover
Front Bottom Cover
2-2 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-1-2 Top Cover
Special Equipment
• None
base.
5. Unscrew and remove the top cover(left or right) bottom holding screws. The Illustration 2-2 shows the screw
locations.
6. Slide the top cover (left or right) free from the Table until the latch and touch sensor switch connectors are
visible.
7. Disconnect the latch switch and touch sensor switch cable connectors.
8. Remove the top cover (left or right).
9. END
2-3 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-1-2 Top Cover (continued)
Illustration 2-2 Top Cover
Touch Sensor Connector

Top Cover R
Screw Location
Top Cover L
Latch Switch
Connector
2-4 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-2 CRADLE
Special Equipment
• None
base.
5. Remove the screw cap and unscrew the four Allen screws from the cradle end (see Illustration 2-3), and then
slide out the cradle.
6. After installing the new cradle, perform the adjustment according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check &
Adjustment.
Gap Between Cradle and Cradle Support
7. END
Illustration 2-3 Cradle End
Cradle
Allen Screws
with Screw Caps
2-5 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-3 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER
Special Equipment
• Cradle Potentiometer
• Tie wraps
1. Switch OFF the ”XG” and ”Rotate” switches, and switch ON the ”Table/Tilt” switch on the Gantry rear base.
4. Switch OFF the ”Table/Tilt” switch on the rear base of the Gantry.
5. Remove the Cradle. Refer to section 2-2.
6. Remove the right top cover. Refer to section 2-1-2
7. Remove both bottom covers. Refer to section 2-1-1.
8. Remove the cover which is located under the cradle closest to the Gantry (8 screws).
9. Remove the front cradle tray (4 screws), rear cradle tray (6 screws).
10. Remove the driver cover by unscrewing 4 screws. Its location is shown in the illustraion 2-24.
11. Remove the TABLE BOARD ASSY protective cover (4 screws). Its location is shown in the Illustration 2-4.
2-6 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
Illustration 2-4 TABLE BOARD ASSY LOCATION
TABLE BOARD ASSY

GANTRY
TABLE
DRIVER
SIDE VIEW
TABLE BOARD ASSY LOCATION

ILLUSTRATION 2-1
12. Disconnect connector CN3 from the TABLE BOARD ASSY. After replacement, wrap up the remaining cable
as it before.
13. Verify that the end of the cradle is in the out limit position, then loosen the two screws closest to the
Potentiometer. Refer to Illustrations 2-5 and 2-6.
Note
Be careful not to move the thin cradle potentiometer cable.
Illustration 2-5 POTENTIOMETER LOCATION
2-7 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
Illustration 2-6 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER
1
2
3
4
CN3 Support screw
measure resistance
between
Disk
PIN2 and PIN3
Potentiometer
Support bracket
Set Nut
Gear
Coupling Screws
14. Remove the support bracket together with the Potentiometer Assy, with its wires still attached, by unscrewing
the support screws shown in illustration 2-6 and then feeding connector CN3 up through the table.
15. Unscrew the coupling screws in the gear together with the potentiometer assembly to remove the gear.
16. Remove the set nut and transfer the support bracket to the new cradle potentiometer. Tighten the bracket in
place using the set nut.
17. Install the gear to the potentiometer assembly and tighten the coupling screws.
18. Feed the wiring of the new Potentiometer down to the TABLE BOARD ASSY, retie any tie wraps which were
removed in step 13.
19. Install the new potentiometer/support bracket, and tighten the support screws.
2-8 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

20. Adjust the Potentiometer so that the resistance between Pin 2 and Pin 3 of CN3 is 125Ω +/-50Ω. Then tighten
the two coupling screws (Illustration 2-6).
Note
It may be difficult to access one of the coupling screws after adjusting the potentiometer. If this is
the case, then tighten the accessible coupling screw and move the cradle sightly forward toward
the Gantry. Tighten the second coupling screw and then return the cradle handle to its mechanical
outer limit.
21. Verify that the resistance between Pin 2 and Pin 3 of CN3 is still 125Ω +/-50Ω. If it is not then repeat step 17.
22. Perform steps 11 through 5 in their reverse order.
23. Perform a P0, PG longitudinal adjustment. (Refer to Functional Check & Adjustment, Table, Longitudinal
Function, Cradle Absolute Position.)
24. END
2-9 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-4 CRADLE POTENTIOMETER PULLEY METAL CABLE
Special Equipment
• Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Cable: U0008AP
• Metal Tube: U0009AP (Two tubes must be ordered.)
Illustration 2-7 Metal Cable and Metal Tubes

Metal Cable (6m) Metal Tube (x2)
2-4-1 Preparation
1. Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.
base.
6. Remove the following covers and components from the Table: (See Illustration )
• Cradle ...................................................... Four(4) Allen Screws
• Top Cover (Rear / Left / Right) .......................................................3 x Four(4) Screws
• Drive Cover ....................................................... Four(4) Screws
• Cradle Tray (Front / Rear) ....................................................... Four(4) Screws / Six(6) Screws
2-10 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
Illustration 2-8 Remove Covers and Components

Left Side View
Top Cover_Left Top Cover_Rear
Top View
Drive Cover Cradle Tray_Rear Top Cover_Right
Cradle Tray_Front
2-4-2 Remove the Old Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable

1. Cut the Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable at any position and remove it from the table.
Illustration 2-9 Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable
Cradle Potentiometer
Pulley Metal Cable
Table Frame
2. Remove the Cradle Carriage from the Table.

3. Loosen the two screws fixed the Potentiometer Assy.
2-11 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-4-2 Remove the Old Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable (Continued)
4. Remove the Pulley Assy from the bracket by unscrewing its two screws.
Illustration 2-10 Remove the Pulley
Pulley
Bracket
Screw (x2)
5. Loosen the lock nut , then loose the adjusting nut to loosen the cable tensioner.
Illustration 2-11 Loosen the Cable Tensioner
Lock Nut
Tensioner Adjusting Nut
2-12 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-4-3 Install the new Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable

1. Pass the Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable through the hole of the pulley shown as Illustration 2-12.
2. Pass the metal cable through the metal tube twice shown as below Illustration 2-12.
3. Squeeze the metal tube using a plier to fix the metal cable.
Illustration 2-12 Pass the Metal Cable through the Metal Tube
Note: This is a sketch map, it is not consistent with actual instance.
Metal Cable
Metal Tube Pass the metal cable through

the metal tube twice.
4. Strain the metal cable to wind it 8 times clockwise (CW) around the upper side of the pulley.
Illustration 2-13 Wind the Metal Cable 8 circles CW
Note: The eight (8) circles metal cable don’t wrap each other.
Wind the metal

cable 8 circles CW
5. Attach a tape to prevent wrapping the metal cable.

6. Continue to randomly wind the rest of the metal cable clockwise to the pulley, then attach a tape to prevent
loosening the metal cable during installation.
2-13 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-4-3 Install the new Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable (Continued)
7. Re-install the Pulley Assy to the bracket by screwing its two screws.
Illustration 2-14 Re-install the Pulley Assy

Tape: Prevent loosening
the metal cable
Tape: Prevent wrapping

the metal cable
Bracket
8. Separate the gears of the Potentiometer Assy and the Pulley Assy, then turn gear of the Potentiometer Assy
counterclockwise (CCW) to its utmost position. (See Illustration 2-15)
Illustration 2-15 Gear of the Potentiometer Assy Rotation Direction

Top View
CCW
Bracket
Pulley Hole points the Pot Potentiometer
9. Turn the Pulley to let holes on the pulley point at the Potentiometer Assy.
10. Move the potentiometer Assy close to the Pulley Assy, let the teeth on the two gears mesh as they turn round.
11. Tear the tapes and start to wrap the metal cable shown as below Illustration 2-16.
NOTICE
At this time, the metal cable totals 74/3 circles on the pulley.
CAUTION
Strain the Cradle potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable During wrapping it, but avoid excessive
strength to snap the metal cable.
2-14 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
12. When the metal cable return the start position, then wind it 11/4 circles clockwise (CW) around the upper side
of the pulley.
NOTICE
At this time, the metal cable totals 9 circles on the pulley.
Illustration 2-16 Wrap the Metal Cable

4
End position
Start Position
1 3
2
Cradle Potentiometer
Pulley Metal Cable
Table Frame
The Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable

Wrap direction of the metal cable
13. Pass the metal cable through the holes of the pulley and shaft shown as below Illustration 2-17.
14. Pass the metal cable through the metal tube twice shown as below Illustration 2-17.
15. Squeeze the metal tube using a plier to fix the metal cable. (See Illustration 2-18)
Illustration 2-17 Pass the Metal Cable through pulley, shaft and metal tube
Metal Tube
Holes of Pulley
Shaft
Pulley
2-15 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
Illustration 2-18 Fix the Metal Cable
16. Separate the gears of the Potentiometer Assy and the Pulley Assy.
17. Turn the pulley:
• Turn the pulley 1/4 circle counterclockwise (CCW).
• Turn the pulley 9 circles clockwise (CW).
• Turn the pulley 1/4 circle counterclockwise (CCW).
18. The holes on the pulley point at direction of the Gantry after turning the pulley.
19. Install the Cradle Carriage and slide it to the end of the rail shown as below Illustration.
Illustration 2-19 Install the Cradle Carriage

Cradle Carriage
Slide Rail
Cradle Carriage
Slide Direction
2-16 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
20. Pinch the cable holder on the Cradle Carriage and the metal cable to move together about 25cm forward.
Illustration 2-20 Remove the cable holder and metal cable together
Cradle Carriage
Cable Holder
21. Adjust the screw shown in white circle (See Illustration 2-21) to loosen the metal cable.
Illustration 2-21 Screw Adjustment
22. Fix the metal cable onto the cable holder as shown.
Illustration 2-22 Fix the Metal Cable to Cable Holder
Cable Holder
2-17 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
23. Adjust the screw shown in white circle (See Illustration 2-21) to little strain the metal cable.
24. Adjust the lock nut and adjusting nut to adjust the metal cable strain, until the distance between the bracket
and spring is 1mm.
CAUTION
Avoid excessive adjustment to snap the metal cable.
25. Verify that the end of the cradle is in the out limit position.
26. Turn gear of the Potentiometer Assy to adjust the Potentiometer so that the resistance between Pin 2 and Pin
3 of CN3 is 125Ω ± 50Ω. (Refer to Illustration 2-23)
Illustration 2-23 Measure resistance of the Potentiometer
1
2
3
4
CN3
measure resistance
between
PIN2 and PIN3
Potentiometer
Gear
27. Move the potentiometer Assy close to the Pulley Assy, let the teeth on the two gears mesh as they turn round.
28. Fix the Potentiometer Assy by screwing its two screws.
29. Reinstall the removed components and covers in the reverse order of removal.
31. Perform a P0, PG longitudinal adjustment.
Refer to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION
Longitudinal Function
32. END
2-18 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-5 CRADLE ENCODER ASSY
Special Equipment
• Cradle Encoder Assy
• Tie wraps
base.
4. Remove the following cover and component from the Table:
• Cradle . . . . . . Refer to Cradle
• Top Cover (Both Side) . . . . . . Refer to Top Cover
• Drive Cover . . . . . . Four(4) Screws
Illustration 2-24 Table
Drive
ve CCover
Dri over
Cradle
C radl
e
2-19 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-5 CRADLE ENCODER ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Disconnect the cable connector leading from the encoder.
6. Loosen the set screw, then remove the encoder disk from the encoder shaft.
7. Remove the encoder assy from the encoder holder by unscrewing its 3 screws.
8. Install the new encoder assy by referring to steps 7 through 5.
CRADLE RELATIVE POSITION
Longitudinal Accuracy
Cradle Repeatability
11. END
Illustration 2-25 Cradle Pulley Removal
Encoder Assy
Cable Connector
Encoder Disk
Encoder Holder
Set Screw
2-20 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-6 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER
Special Equipment
• Height Potentiometer
• Tie wraps
• Grease
Note
It may be necessary to lower the Table to gain access to one of the height potentiometer coupling
screws. If this is done then be sure to return the Table to its highest position, and return the Gantry
“Table/Tilt” switch to the OFF position.
base.
2. Remove Left Cover by unscrewing 4 screws.
3. Move the Cradle out to its fully retracted position (farthest from Gantry).
4. Lower the Table to the mechanical down limit position.
6. Remove the left side maintenance cover from the Gantry.
• Top Cover-L Refer to Top Cover
• Rear Cradle Tray Six(6) Screws
2-21 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

8. Replace the Height Potentiometer as follows:
a. Loosen the two coupling set screws.
b. Remove the Potentiometer Assy together with its bracket .
c. Disconnect the connector CN5 from the TBL CON BD Assy and feed it up through the Table.
d. Remove the Height Potentiometer assy from the bracket, and mount the new Potentiometer Assy onto the
old bracket.
e. Install the new Height Potentiometer/bracket Assy to the Table left side frame.
f. Apply grease to the potentiometer shaft if necessary.
g. Feed the wiring of the new Potentiometer to the TBL CON BD Assy and retie all the tie-wraps which were
removed in step 6c. and 6d.
h. Connect the new CN5 connector to the TBL CON BD Assy.
Illustration 2-26 Height Potentiometer
To Gantry
Table Left side Frame
Bracket
Coupling Set Screws
Potentiometer Nut Plate Support Nuts (2)

TABLE TOP VIEW
Plate Support Nuts
To Gantry
BRACKET SIDE VIEW
2-22 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

9. Adjust the Height Potentiometer as follows:
a. Switch OFF the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Set the T3 (interlock release) and T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to ON position.
c. Down the table to its mechanical down limit position
d. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board so that the height display on the Gantry Display reads 011.
e. Adjust the potentiometer so that the position display reads 91 ± 5.
Note
Adjust the Height Potentiometer value by turning the potentiometerís shaft with a trimmer adjuster/
tweaker (small slotted screw driver). It can be accessed through the hole in the left side cover as
shown in illustration 2-27.
f. Tighten the two coupling set screws.
g. Set the T3 and T6 switches of the TGP S1 dip-switch to OFF position.
H0, HG HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
12. END
Illustration 2-27 Height Potentiometer Adjustment
use this hole to adjust

the potentiometer
2-23 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-7 STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER
Special Equipment
• Stepping Motor Driver Assy
• Tie-wraps
4. Disconnect the three cable connectors (CN1 ∼ CN3) and Ground Cable from the Stepping Motor Driver Assy.
5. Remove the Stepping Motor Driver Assy by unscrewing its two screws.
6. Install the new Stepping Motor Driver Assy by referring to steps 6. through 5.
7. For output torque adjustment, refer to Functional Check/Adjustment Manual (See Section 2-5 in Table
Gantry Parts).
9. END
2-24 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-8 STEPPING MOTOR ASSY
Special Equipment
• Stepping Motor Assy
• Tie-wraps
• Top Cover L Refer to Top Cover
Illustration 2-28 Stepping Motor Location
Cradle
Stepping Motor
2-25 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-8 STEPPING MOTOR ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Disconnect the cable connector (CN37) leading from the Stepping Motor Assy.
6. Loosen the four screws that fasten the motor support bracket to the Table frame, to relieve the belt tension.
7. Remove the four screws that fasten the stepping motor to the motor support bracket, and remove the drive belt
from the stepping motor pulley, and slide stepping motor out of the motor support bracket.
8. Remove the stepping motor pulley from the stepping motor shaft by loosening the set screw, and transfer the
pulley to the new stepping motor.
9. Install the new stepping motor by referring to steps 7 through 5.
11. END
Illustration 2-29 Stepping Motor Assy
Bearing
Roller Potentiometer Assembly
Cradle Encoder
Pulley
Motor Support
Belt
Step Motor
2-26 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-9 TBL BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• TBL Board Assy
• Tie-wraps
4. Remove the following covers from the Table:
5. Disconnect the all cable connectors (CN1 ∼ CN9) from the TBL Board Assy.
6. Remove the TBL Board Assy by unscrewing its four screws.
7. Install the new TBL Board Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
9. END
Illustration 2-30 TBL Board Location
TBL Board
2-27 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-10 TBL CONNECTOR BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• TBL Connector Board Assy
• Tie-wraps
4. Push the cradle to IN max (closest to the Gantry).
5. Remove the rear tray under the cradle.
6. Disconnect the all cable connectors from the TBL Connector Board Assy.
7. Remove the TBL Connector Board Assy by unscrewing its four screws.
8. Install the new TBL Connector Board Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
10. END
Illustration 2-31 TBL Connector Board Location
TBL Connector
Board
2-28 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-11 POWER SUPPLY
Special Equipment
• Tie-wraps
5. Pop free and remove the plastic guard from the front of the power supply terminals.
7. Remove the Power Supply by unscrewing its four side support screws.
10. END
Illustration 2-32 Power Supply
2-29 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-12 TOUCH SW ASSY
Special Equipment
• Touch SW Assy
5. Remove the Touch SW1 Assy from the Table R/L top cover.
6. Thread the Touch SW cable connector through the cable hole in the Table top cover, and attach the new Touch
SW Assy to the Table top cover.
8. Verify that Touch SW Assy is operating normally.
9. END
Illustration 2-33 Touch SW Assy Location
Touch SW Assy
2-30 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-13 LATCH SWITCH ASSY
Special Equipment
• Latch Switch Assy
• Tie-wraps
5. Push the release tab, and firmly pull the switch away from the Table cover.
6. Unscrew the ring nut, and remove the button cover from the Table cover.
7. Install the new Latch Switch Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
9. END
Illustration 2-34 Latch Switch Assy
Release Tab
Latch Switch
Button Cover Ring Nut
2-31 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-14 FOOT SWITCH ASSY (FOR LCT TABLE WITH FOOT SWITCH - 2302759)
Special Equipment
• Foot Switch Assy
• Tie-wraps
• Protect Cover Three(3) Screws
5. Disconnect the four wires from the Foot Switch Assy.
6. Remove the Foot Switch Assy by unscrewing its six screws.
7. Install the new Foot Switch Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
9. END
Illustration 2-35 Foot Switch Assy
Screw (x6)
Spacer
Foot Switch Assy
2-32 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-15 TABLE SOLENOID VALVE
Special Equipment
• Table Solenoid Valve
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie-wraps
• Kim wipe
WARNING
CRASH HAZARD!
THE TABLE MUST BE SUPPORTED USING THE SUPPORT TOOL AS DESCRIBED BELOW
WHEN CHANGING THE SOLENOID VALVE.
• Bottom Covers (front and bottom) Refer to BOTTOM COVER
NOTICE
VOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE!
Do not forget to switch OFF the T3 Table Dip switch, other wise here will be collision hazard,
since the interlock function does not word, if T3 is set to ON.
2-33 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

2. For systems where the Table lowest height is set to 400 mm (Normal Setting), lower the Table to its lower
mechanical limit position.
a. If the Table can not be lowered down to mechanical limit position due to the interlock function, switch ON
(up) the T3 Table dip switch to disable the interlock function, and continue to lower the Table. In this case,
be careful not to have the Table collide against anything (including the Table mechanical limit).
For systems where the Table lowest height is set to 650 mm (Compact Siting Mode or short foot print mode),
attach the support tool as follows:
Note
b. Assemble the Table Support Tool.
c. Attach the support tool to the undersurface of the Table on the side farthest from the Gantry using the four
d. Switch OFF the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
Illustration 2-36 Table Support Tool
(FRONT VIEW)
Frame
Support Tool
Adjuster
leg of the support tool
adjuster
bolts(4)
2-34 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

3. Remove the solenoid valve as follows:
a. Disconnect the power wire connector leading from the solenoid valve.
b. Slightly loosen the set and tightening nuts securing the high pressure hoses, then disconnect the high
pressure hose.
c. Loosen the set and tightening nuts and disconnect the return hose.
Illustration 2-37 Table Solenoid
Flow Adjuster solenoid valve

Elbow Joint
Elbow Joint Set Nut
Tightening
Nut
Flow Control Valve
Set Nut
High Pressure Hose

Return Hose
to Power Line Connector
Cylinder
2-35 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

d. Remove the solenoid valve from the elbow joint on flow control valve by turning it CCW.
Note
When wrapping sealing tape around end joints, wrap the tape in the opposite direction of the
threads (about one and half turns).
e. Remove the elbow joint from the solenoid valve and attache it to the new solenoid valve using sealing tape.
f. Install the new solenoid valve assy to the elbow joint on the flow control valve.
g. Attach the high pressure hose and return hose to the new solenoid valve (see illustration 2-38).
h. Connect the power wire connector and cover it with oil-proof tube.
i. Adjust the flow adjuster by turning it fully CW and then two full turns CCW.
j. Tighten all nuts and retie any wraps which have been removed.
Illustration 2-38 Table Solenoid Replacement
Flow Control Valve
Old Solenoid Valve

Flow Adjuster
Set Nut
New Solenoid Valve
Power Line Connector
Flow Control Valve
Oil-Proof Tube
2-36 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

5. Switch ON the ’Table/Tilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
6. Lower the Table and verify that the all movement is smooth and normal.
CAUTION
CRASH HAZARD.
Do not move the Table upwards after replacing the magnetic flow valve until it has been
lowered first; this will feed unwanted air into the valve.
7. Move the Table up and verify that it is operating normally. If there is a shortage of oil (the Table will not rise to
its normal limit), add more oil by referring to TABLE POMP MINOR LUBRICATION.
8. Move the Table up and down a few times to remove the air from the hydraulic system. Make sure that all the
air inside is removed. To verify it, the Table moves smoothly when the air inside is removed.
10. END
Illustration 2-39 Table Support Tool Removal
2-37 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-16 TABLE HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
Special Equipment
• Table Hydraulic Cylinder
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie-wraps
• Kim wipe
WARNING
CRASH HAZARD!
DO NOT REMOVE THE CYLINDER WITHOUT REMOVING THE UPPER STRUCTURAL
SUPPORT, UPPER SUPPORT, AND U-COLUMN FIRST.
THE TABLE MUST BE SUPPORTED USING THE SUPPORT TOOL AS DESCRIBED IN 2-15.
Note
If the maximum height can not be achieved then it will be more difficult to lubricate the pump
following replacement of the cylinder. The maximum height is approximately 1000mm measured
from the Table frame to the lowest point of the cradle top surface.
• Rear Cover Four(4) Screws
• Side covers (left and right side Two(2)X2 Screws
• Bottom Covers (front and rear) Refer to BOTTOM COVER
2-38 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

2. Attach the support tool as follows (see illustration 2-36):
Note
a. Assemble the Table Support Tool.
leg of the support tool
adjuster
bolts(4)
b. Attach the support tool to the undersurface of the Table on the side farthest from the Gantry using the four
c. Switch OFF the ’TableTilt’ switch at the rear Gantry base.
3. Disengage the upper blocks from the outer arm by unscrewing six support bolts.
Illustration 2-40 Cylinder/Outer Arm Removal
Upper Shaft Upper Block
Hex Bolts(6)
Outer Arm
Cylindar
Inner Arm
2-39 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

4. Remove the oil return hose from the hydraulic cylinder
5. Remove the solenoid valve from the cylinder.
6. Remove the flow control valve from the old cylinder, then attach to the new cylinder using sealing tape.
Verify that the flow control valve should be at an angle of approximately 0° to the cylinder.
7. Attach the solenoid valve to the new cylinder.
8. Attach the return hose to the new cylinder.
Illustration 2-41 Removal/Attachment of the Flow Control Valve and the Solenoid Valve
: Remove or Attach
Solenoid Valve
High Pressure Hose
Return Hose
Flow Control Valve

Return Hose
Cylinder
Rod End
A
2-40 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

9. Remove the side cover (2303534,2303535) and the side cover support down 2296669.
10. Remove the lower shaft and slide it out of the exposed side hole.
11. Remove the rod and the cylinder together.
12. Measure the distance ’B’ : between the rod end and the rod base of the old cylinder.
13. Adjust the new rod to the same distance, ’B’, as the old rod.
14. Install the new rod and cylinder using the lower shaft. Tighten the lower shaft into place.
15. Return the low side cover support to the side support and screw it into place.
Illustration 2-42 Metal Hole Guard and Lower Shaft
(RIGHT SIDE VIEW) (FRONT VIEW)
Lower Shaft
SIde Cover Sup

Hole Guard Cylinder
Rod End
Lower Shaft
Nut
B Screw
Shaft Support
2-41 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

16. Verify that all piping and hosing is in the proper configuration and will not catch.

Refer to ...
Replacement
Maximum
every 10mm below the 255mm maximum rod extension ‘A’ in the illustration 2-41.
19. Raise and lower the Table repeatedly and Check the following:
a. Verify that the solenoid valve and U-Column surface is parallel.
b. Verify that the hosing does not catch or pull excessively.
21. END
Illustration 2-43 Solenoid Valve Configuration
U–Column
Cylinder
Solenoid Valve
2-42 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-17 TABLE OIL PUMP
Special Equipment
• Table Oil Pump
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie wrap
• Kim Wipe
This CT system contains one oil pump only for Gantry tilt and Table elevation, which is located at the table column.
Therefore, both of the hydraulic systems for Gantry tilt and Table elevation are jointed by the couplers. Refer to ’CT/
e, CT ProSpeed AI/FI Theory Manual, Table/Gantry TAB, Section 3-3 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FOR GANTRY TILT
/ TABLE ELEVATION’.
2. Tilt the Gantry to forward position.
Note
The maximum height is approximately 900mm measured from the Table frame to the lowest point
of the cradles top surface.
2-43 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

5. Disconnect the power connector from the oil pump.
6. Disconnect the 4-line connector leading from the Gantry to the pump capacitor.
7. Measure the resistance across the terminals of the pump capacitor using a DVM. If the resistance increases,
the capacitor should be functional. If the resistance is zero or infinite, the capacitor is melted down or shorted
open. In this case replace the TABLE PUMP CAPACITOR.
Note
If you have replaced the Table pump capacitor, maybe the pump need no replacement. Check to
see if the pump is operational after replacing the capacitor.
CAUTION
CRASH HAZARD.
Do not modify the adjustments of Valve and handle its peripheral hoses with care.
Illustration 2-44 Table Pump / Capacitor Connections
Capacitor
Pump
2-44 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

8. Disconnect the GND cable from the oil pump.
9. Disconnect hose nuts shown in illustration 2-29. A small amount of oil may leak out, but this is acceptable.
10. Transfer the hose joints from the old pump to the new one.
11. Remove the pump assy by unscrewing the four Nuts holding it to the Table base.
12. Remove the pump base by unscrewing the four screws, and transfer the pump base to the new pump.
13. Install the new oil pump assy by referring to steps 11 through 4.
Verify that the hose configuration is correct.
Illustration 2-45 Table Oil Pump
To Valve
Nut
To Gantry
Nut and Joint
To Cylinder
Mounting Nuts
2-45 TABLE
REV 37 2244773


Refer to ...
Replacement
Maximum
every 10mm below the 255mm maximum rod extension ‘A’ in the illustration .2-41.
15. Lower the Table to its lower limit position.

17. Repeat steps 14 and 15 a few times to remove all the air in the cylinder (the Table moves smoothly when the
air inside is removed). Stop this procedure at the Table upper limit position.
19. END
2-46 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-18 TABLE PUMP (FILLING) LUBRICATION
Special Equipment
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Kim wipe
Note
This procedure is to be used for adding small amounts of oil to the pump only (no more than 0.15
liters). Use the instructions in the TABLE PUMP MAJOR LUBRICATION. for the addition of larger
amounts of oil such as those needed after replacing the hydraulic cylinder, or after replacing the
pump while the Table height is below maximum.
2. Remove the small air escape screw and the larger pouring mouth screw from the pump.
3. Pour the estimated required amount of oil into the pump, not more than 0.15 liters.
4. Lower the Table and watch the pump to see if excess oil spills out of the of the pump. If oil leaks out of the
pump holes then continue to lower the Table slowly while wiping up any oil which spills out of the pump.
to the lowest point of the cradle top surface, and that all movement is smooth and normal.
6. Return the small air escape screw and the larger pouring mouth screw using sealing tape. Wrap the sealing
tape about one and a half times in the opposite direction of the threads.
8. END
Illustration 2-46 Oil Pump
Pouring Mouth
(Large)
Air Escape Screw

(Small)
2-47 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-19 TABLE PUMP (FILLING) MAJOR LUBRICATION
Special Equipment
• Oil (Z9807QD)
• Sealing Tape
• Tie-wraps
• Kim wipe
Note
This procedure is for the addition of amounts of oil such as those needed after replacing the
hydraulic cylinder, or after replacing the pump while the Table height is below maximum. For adding
small amounts of oil to the pump refer to the TABLE PUMP MINOR LUBRICATION.
2. Move the Table to its lowest position.
3. Tilt the Gantry to backward position.
4. Remove the small air escape screw and the large pouring mouth screw from the pump (see illustration 2-46).
5. Pour the estimated required, lost, amount of oil into the pump.
Note
The total pump capacity is 1.25 liters and the total Table system capacity is 1.4 liters.
to the lowest point of the cradles top surface, and that all movement is smooth and normal.
7. Continue to repeat steps 5 and 4 until no air is left in the cylinder or oil hoses. The Table moves smoothly when
the air inside is removed.
8. Return the small sir escape screw and the larger pouring mouth screw using sealing tape. Wrap the sealing
tape about one and half times in the opposite direction of the threads.
10. END
2-48 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-20 TABLE PUMP CAPACITOR
Special Equipment
• Table Pump Capacitor Assy (with connectors)
• Tie wraps
4. Remove the capacitor from the capacitor plate by loosing the holding screw (see illustration 2-28).
5. Disconnect the power line connector leading to the pump.
6. Disconnect the 4-line connector leading into the Gantry from the pump capacitor.
7. Follow the black and white wires from the four wire connectors up through the Table U-column to where they
meet their upper connector. This will require cutting the tie wraps leading up through the U-column.
8. Install the new capacitor to the capacitor plate and tighten the holding screw.
9. Connect the pump power connector.
10. Tie up the loose wires with tie wraps.
11. Verify that the Table moves up and down normally.
13. END
2-49 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-21 PEDAL TYPE FOOT SWITCH

This subsection describes the procedure of the followings foot switches replacements:
Special Equipment
• Tie wraps
Pedal Type Foot Switch
2-50 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-21 PEDAL TYPE FOOT SWITCH (CONTINUED)

5. Cut the tie-wrap that connects the Pedal Type Foot Switch and TBL Bd-Foot Switch cable. (Illustration 2-48).
6. Disconnect the Pedal Type Foot Switch connector.

and tie with Tie-wrap
Cut this Tie-wrap
Edge
Guard
Approx.
20 to 30
cm.
Pedal Type Foot

Switch
to Foot
SW
to TBL
e
Ti w
Board – rap
and the remaining will be placed inside of bottom cover. (Illustration 2-48).
9. Connect the Pedal Type Foot Switch to the TBL Bd-Foot SW cable.
should occupy less space as possible to avoid obstructing the space of bottom cover.
11. Fix the Pedal Type Foot Switch cable with tie-wrap.
Note
13. END
2-51 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
Special Equipment
• Tie wraps
5. Cut the tie-wrap that connects the Pedal Type Foot Switch and TBL Bd-Mat Switch cable. (Illustration 2-49).
6. Disconnect the Foot Switch connector.
2-52 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

should occupy less space as possible to avoid obstructing the space of bottom cover. (Illustration 2-49).
Note
Illustration 2-49 Pedal Type Foot Switch replacement (Left Side)

Cut this tie–wrap to Type Foot Switch wiring
replace the Pedal Connectors and tie with tie–wrap.
Type Foot Switch.
to TBL Board
Approx. 20
to 30 cm.
Pedal Type
Foot Switch
2-53 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-22 HEAD HOLDER RUBBER SHEET
Special Equipment
• Rubber Set
• Kim Wipe
• Functional Check/Adjustment
1. Remove the existing rubber sheets from the head holder.
2. Rubber Sheet Selection
NOTICE
In the phase of rubber selection, do not attach the rubber yet !!!
When selecting the thicker rubber, the head holder can be latched securely with less horizontal free-play. However,
this causes hard latching and a customer might use the head holder with no latched, so that the head holder might
drop from the cradle and a patient might be injured.
So, try the different rubber in thickness to select the proper one.
a. First place the two 4.0 mm rubbers (the thickest rubber) onto both edges of the head holder as shown.
Note
• The rubber must be placed with its tab facing out.
• The thickness is printed on the rubber.
• You have only to place the rubber onto the holder. You do not need to set it in an upright position when
selecting the rubber.
2-54 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

b. Insert it all the way into the cradle and press the head holder at proper pressure.
Press!
Latched
NOTICE
Do NOT press the head holder at high pressure when latching it. The plastic bolts for mount-
ing the latch mechanism might be damaged.
Plastic Bolts
2-55 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

c. Check if the head holder is latched on the cradle at the fist step of the latch mechanism. (The head holder
does not need to be latched at the second step.)
Check if the head holder has a small free-play in the horizontal direction.
Check the Head Holder for Horizontal Free Play.
d. When the head holder is not latched (the rubber is too thick to install), repeat steps 1 to 3 using the second-
thickest rubber (3.5mm).
Even if the thinnest rubber (0.5mm) can not be used, cut the tab of the 0.5mm rubber.
Cut !
Note
After adjustment, ask your customer to check the head holder free–play.
2-56 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

3. Rubber Installation:
a. Clean any dirt off the attaching surface of the rubbers using an alcohol as shown
b. Peel off a papers from the rubbers, then attach the rubbers on the head holder as shown.
Hold the rubber a few seconds with your fingers to attach it securely onto the head holder.
Note
The rubber must be attached with its tab facing out.
Tab
Tab
Rubbers
c. Latch the head holder to the cradle, then verify tha the head holder has a small free-play in the horizontal
direction.
2-57 TABLE
REV 37 2244773
2-23 TABLE SPEAKER
Special Equipment
• Speaker (5344623 / 5850121)
• Cable (5341521)
• Tie wraps
Safety
WARNING
CRUSH HAZARD!
UNEXPECTED TABLE COLLAPSE CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY.
DO NOT REMOVE SIX SUPPORTING BOLTS FROM TABLE FRONT LEG DURING
REPLACING THE TABLE SPEAKER, IT WILL CAUSE THE TABLE TO COLLAPSE.
Procedure
1. Raise the Table to maximum height.
2. Move the Cradle to OUT limit position.
3. Remove power from Table by turning off 120VAC, Axial Drive and HVDC switches on the Service
Switch Panel.
2-58 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

4. Remove the top cover (left or right) bottom holding screws. The below illustration shows the screw
locations.
Illustration 2-50 Top Cover Removal
5. Slide the top cover (left or right) free from the Table until the latch switch and touch sensor switch
cable connectors are visible.(See Figure 2-50)
6. Disconnect the latch switch and touch sensor switch cable connectors, remove the top cover.
7. Press down the flapper cover and unscrew two screws from the bracket for base cover removal. (See
Figure 2-51)
Illustration 2-51 Unscrew Screws
2-59 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

8. Slide the base cover bracket out of the support, then remove it. (See Figure 2-52)
Illustration 2-52 Base Cover Removal
9. Disconnect the ground cable from the side cover, then remove the side cover (left or right) from the
table frame by loosening two M5 screws.(See Figure 2-53)
Illustration 2-53 Side Cover and Speaker Removal
2-60 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

10. Disconnect the speaker cable connector, then remove the defective speaker from the speaker spacer
by un-securing four nuts and washers. (See Figure 2-54)
Illustration 2-54 Disconnect Cable Connector
NOTICE
The KL Table has two type speakers, if the speaker looks like the below 1 (see Figure 2-55),
please order the speaker and the cable together for replacement.
Illustration 2-55 Speaker and Cable
2-61 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

11. Take out a new speaker, position it to the table front arm. (See Figure 2-56)
Illustration 2-56 Disconnect Cable Connector
12. Attach the speaker spacer and fasten the speaker by using four nuts and washers. (See Figure 2-57)
Illustration 2-57 Speaker Spacer
2-62 TABLE
REV 37 2244773

13. Reconnect the cable connector. (See Figure 2-58)
Illustration 2-58 Speaker Cable Connector
14. Restore the Table to original configuration according to the reverse order of removal.
15. Power up the Table from the Service Switch Panel.
16. Verify that the speaker is working normally.
2-63 TABLE
blank
2-64 TABLE
REV 28 2244773
DAS/DETECTOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - DAS BOARD (FOR NPDAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 CAM BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 DDP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-3 CIF BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-4 FLEX CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-5 BB FLEX CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-6 CABLE ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-7 L-BOX ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-8 C-BOX CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-9 R-BOX ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-10 L-FAN ASSY / C-FAN ASSY / R-FAN ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-11 DAS POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-12 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
SECTION 2 - DAS BOARD (FOR MDAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 CONVERTER BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 FLEX CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 CABLE ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 L-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-5 C-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-6 R-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-7 DAS POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
SECTION 3 - DAS BOARD (FOR GDAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 CONVERTER BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 DCP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 FLEX CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-4 CABLE ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-5 L-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-6 C-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-7 R-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-8 GDAS POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
SECTION 4 - DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
i DAS/DETECTOR
ii DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
SECTION 1 - DAS BOARD (FOR NPDAS)
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
1-1 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-1 CAM BOARD
Special Equipment
• CAM Board
1. Set the Gantry to the 0° tilt and rotate to 180° position.
2. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’ and ‘Slip Ring115V’ switches at the rear Gantry base.
3. Remove the front and right side Gantry covers.
5. Disconnect the FAN cable connector.
6. Remove the DAS cover and Connector cover by unscrewing nuts indicated by a on the DAS cover.
Illustration 1-1 DAS Covers
Detector
CAM Box
Connector Cover
DAS Cover
1-2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-1 CAM BOARD (CONTINUED)

7. Loosen the 2 screws, and slide the blind plate out of the CAM box.
8. Remove the FR cover by unscrewing its 4 screws.
9. Remove the CAM board by unscrewing its three screws.
10. Install the new CAM board.
11. Perform step 9. through 3. in their reverse order.
12. Perform the following check/adjustment according to CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment.
AIR/PHANTOM CALIBRATION
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
13. END
Illustration 1-2 CAM Board Replacement
Blind Plate
FR Cover
DAS Control
CAM
Board
Board
1-3 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-2 DDP BOARD
Special Equipment
• DDP Board
1. Perform the similar way as for CAM boards. The DDP boards is in the L Box (see illustration 1-3).
2. Perform SCAN TEST according to CD-ROM manual, Functional Check/Adjustment, System tab.
Illustration 1-3 DDP, CIF boards replacement
CIF Board Assy

FR Cover
DDP Board Assy
1-3 CIF BOARD
Special Equipment
• CIF Board
1. Perform the similar way as for CAM boards. The CIF boards is in the L Box (see illustration 1-3).
1-4 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-4 FLEX CABLE
Special Equipment
• FLEX CABLE
4. Remove the Connector cover by unscrewing screws indicated by a on the DAS.

5. Replace defective Flex Cable.
a. Pull the Flex Cable connector from the Detector.
b. Remove the other end of the Flex Cable connector from the back board.
c. Install the new Flex Cable.
7. END
Illustration 1-4 Flex Cable Removal
Connector Cover Detector

Flex Cables
Flex Cable
1-5 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-5 BB FLEX CABLE
Special Equipment
• BB Flex Cable
6. Remove the DAS cover and Connector cover by unscrewing nuts indicated by a on the DAS (see illustration
1-1).
7. Remove BB Flex Cable and install the new one.
8. Verify the connector seating.
10. END
Illustration 1-5 BB Flex Cable Location
BB Flex Cables
1-6 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-6 CABLE ASSY
Special Equipment
• Cable Assy
6. Remove the DAS cover and Connector cover by unscrewing nuts indicated by a on the DAS (see illustration
1-1).
7. Disconnect the Cable Assy and install the new one.
8. Verify that the cable connector is securely connected on the backplane connector.
10. END
Illustration 1-6 Cable Assy Location
Cable Assy
1-7 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-7 L-BOX ASSY
Special Equipment
• L-BOX Assy
1. Remove DDP, CIF and all CAM boards by referring to section 1-1 and 1-2.
2. Remove the left side DAS cover by removing two nuts and two Allen screws (Illustration 1-7).
Illustration 1-7 DAS Left side cover removal
3. Remove the 3 connectors at the left side of the DAS (Illustration 1-8).
4. Remove the two connectors that connects LBB to CBB (Illustration 1-8).
Illustration 1-8 Connectors removal
3 CONNECTORS
TWO CONNECTORS
1-8 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-7 L-BOX ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Remove the L Box from the DAS by removing four nuts (Illustration 1-9).
Illustration 1-9 L Box removal
Power connector
D-Sub
for OGP
D-Sub
for DTRF CIF & DDP CAM (7)
6. Install new L-BOX to the DAS.

7. Perform steps 5 to 1 in their reverse order.
8. END
1-9 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-8 C-BOX CABLE
Special Equipment
• C-BOX Assy
1. Remove CAM boards by referring to section 1-1.
2. Remove the two connectors shown by arrows in the Illustration 1-10.
Illustration 1-10 Connectors Removal
3. Remove the C Box from the DAS by removing four nuts (Illustration 1-11).
Illustration 1-11 C Box Removal
4. Install new C-BOX to the DAS.

6. END
1-10 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-9 R-BOX ASSY
Special Equipment
• R-BOX Assy
1. Remove CAM boards by referring to section 1-1.
2. Remove the two connectors shown by arrows in the Illustration 1-10.
Illustration 1-12 Connectors removal
3. Remove the R Box from the DAS by removing four nuts (Illustration 1-11).
Illustration 1-13 R Box Removal
4. Install new R-Box to the DAS.

6. END
1-11 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-10 L-FAN ASSY / C-FAN ASSY / R-FAN ASSY
Special Equipment
• L-Fan Assy / C-Fan Assy / R-Fan Assy
• Tie wraps
5. For L-Fan Assy
a. Disconnect the L-Fan Assy cable connectors.
b. Remove the DAS cover L with Connector cover L by unscrewing four screws and loosening eight nuts.
c. Cut the Tie-wraps that fasten the Fan cables to the DAS cover L.
d. Remove the L-Fan Assy from the DAS cover L by unscrewing its 12 screws.
e. Install the new L-Fan Assy by referring to steps d. through a.
Illustration 1-14 L-Fan Assy Removal
Connector Cover R
DAS Cover C
DAS Cover C
Connector
Cover C
R–Fan Assy
Connector Cover L
DAS Cover L
L–Fan Assy
Screws (x 12)
1-12 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-10 L-FAN ASSY / C-FAN ASSY / R-FAN ASSY (CONTINUED)

6. For C-Fan Assy
a. Disconnect the C-Fan Assy cable connectors.
b. Remove the DAS cover C with Connector cover C by unscrewing six screws and loosening ten nuts.
c. Cut the Tie-wraps that fasten the Fan cables to the DAS cover C.
d. Remove the C-Fan Assy from the DAS cover C by unscrewing its eight screws.
e. Install the new C-Fan Assy by referring to steps d. through a.
7. For R-Fan Assy
a. Disconnect the R-Fan Assy cable connector.
b. Remove the DAS cover R with Connector cover R by unscrewing four screws and loosening eight nuts.
c. Cut the Tie-wraps that fasten the Fan cables to the DAS cover R.
d. Remove the R-Fan Assy from the DAS cover R by unscrewing its eight screws.
e. Install the new R-Fan Assy by referring to steps d. through a.
9. END
1-13 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-11 DAS POWER SUPPLY
Special Equipment
• DAS Power Supply Module
5. Access the DAS Power Supply from the right side of the Gantry. Remove the DAS Power Supply cover by
removing four nuts (Illustration 1-15).
Illustration 1-15 DAS Power Supply Cover Removal

PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
RED GRY YEL
1 4 7
WHT 2 5 8 BLK
3 6 9 ORG
GRN Nut
BLU
DAS POWER CABLE CONNECTOR
The denominations PS1 ∼ PS7 are only for reference in this procedure. They do not
correspond to the part name in Renewal Parts.
1-14 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-11 DAS POWER SUPPLY (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the wires of the Power Supply Module to be replaced by loosening correspondent screws.
7. Remove the bar screws of the Power Supply Module do be replaced.
8. Remove the Power Supply Module to be replaced by removing the mounting screws.
9. Install the new module by performing steps 8 to 6 in their reverse order.
10. Adjust the output voltage of the replaced Power Supply Module. Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment manual.
Illustration 1-16 DAS Power Supply Module Replacement
WIRE SCREW
BAR SCREW
BAR
MODULE MOUNTING SCREWS
1-15 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-12 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ASSY
Special Equipment
• Temperature Control Assy
2. Rotate the Gantry to the 300° tube position.
5. Access the Temperature Control Assy from the right side of the Gantry. Remove the Temperature Control Assy
cover by removing four nuts shown in Illustration 1-15.
Illustration 1-17 Temperature Control Assy Cover Removal

NUTS
NUTS
1-16 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
1-12 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ASSY (CONTINUED)

6. Remove the two connectors from the Temperature Control board.
7. Remove the Temperature Control Assy by removing four nuts shown in illustration 1-18.
8. Install new Temperature Control Assy by performing steps 7 to 1 in their reverse order.
Illustration 1-18 Temperature Control Assy

NUTS
CONNECTORS
NUTS
1-17 DAS/DETECTOR
blank
1-18 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773
SECTION 2 - DAS BOARD (FOR MDAS)
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
2-1 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773
2-1 CONVERTER BOARD
Special Equipment
• Converter Board
5. Remove the DAS cover and Connector cover by unscrewing nuts on the DAS cover (total 10 nuts on the front
cover and 4 nuts on the two sides) (Illustration 2-1).
Illustration 2-1 DAS Cover and Connecter Cover Replacement
Unscrew the 10 nuts (circled) that fasten the front cover
2-2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773
2-1 CONVERTER BOARD (CONTINUED)

6. After removing the DAS cover, the five Converter Board Boxes will be seen. Proceed to the next step to dis-
assembly the converter board box (Illustration 2-2).
7. Remove the Converter Board Box cover by unscrewing its four screws (Illustration 2-2).
Note
There are numbers marked on the Converter Board Box and the cover. When reinstalling the cover,
confirm that the marked number is the same as the one on the Converter Board Box.
Illustration 2-2 Converter Board Boxes Replacement
Converter Converter Converter Converter Converter

Board Box #5 Board Box #4 Board Box #3 Board Box #2 Board Box #1
RBB Loosen the four Screws CBB LBB

that fasten the Converter
Board Box Cover
8. Pull the ends of both extraction levers outward simultaneously to unseat the Converter Board and take it out of
the Box (Illustration 2-3).
Illustration 2-3 Extraction Levers
Extraction Levers
2-3 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773

9. Install the new Converter Board by performing step 8 to 3 in their reverse order.
NOTICE
When inserting the Converter Board, be very careful to adjust the Converter Board to a
suitable location and push gently, otherwise the pins may be damaged.
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
11. END
2-4 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773
2-2 FLEX CABLE
Special Equipment
• FLEX CABLE
4. Remove the Connector cover by unscrewing screws indicated by a on the DAS.

7. END
Illustration 2-4 Flex Cable Removal

Flex Cables
Flex Cable
2-5 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773
2-3 CABLE ASSY
Special Equipment
• Cable Assy
5. Remove the DAS cover and Connector cover by unscrewing nuts on the DAS cover (total 10 nuts on the front
cover and 4 nuts on the two sides) (Illustration 2-1).
6. Disconnect the Cable Assy which should be replaced and install the new one.
9. END
Power Cable Assy Signal Cable Assy
2-6 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773
2-4 L-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• L-BB Assy
1. Remove the respective Converter Boards by referring to section 2-1.
2. Remove the Converter Board Box by unscrewing the six screws that fasten the Converter Board Box (Illustra-
tion 2-6).
Illustration 2-6 Screws on the Converter Board Box
Converter Board Box Screws (x6)
3. Remove all the Flex Cables, Power Cables and Single Calbe that are connected to the Left Back Board
(Illustration 2-7).
Illustration 2-7 L-Box Cables Removal
Remove the Power Cables Remove the Flex Cables
Remvoe the Signal Cable
2-7 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773
2-4 L-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY (CONTINUED)

4. Remove all the screws that fasten the Left Back Board on the plate.
5. Install new L-Box to the DAS by performing steps 4 to 1 in their reverse order.
6. END
2-8 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773
2-5 C-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• C-BB Assy
tion 2-6).
3. Remove all the Flex Cables, Power Cables and Single Calbes that are connected to the Center Back Board
(Illustration 2-8).
Illustration 2-8 C-Box Cables Removal
Remove the Flex Cables Remvoe the Signal Cables
Remove the Power Cables
4. Remove all the screws that fasten the Center Back Board on the plate.
5. Install new C-BOX to the DAS by performing steps 4 to 1 in their reverse order.
6. END
2-9 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773
2-6 R-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• R-BB Assy
tion 2-6).
3. Remove all the Flex Cables, Power Cables and Single Calbe that are connected to the Right Back Board
(Illustration 2-9).
Illustration 2-9 R-Box Cables Removal
Remove the Flex Cables
Remvoe the Signal Cable Remove the Power Cables
4. Remove all the screws that fasten the Right Back Board on the plate.
5. Install new R-Box to the DAS by performing steps 4 to 1 in their reverse order.
6. END
2-10 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773
2-7 DAS POWER SUPPLY
Special Equipment
• DAS Power Supply Module
5. Remove all the cables from the Power Supply (Illustration 2-10).
6. Remove the two screws on the Top Side and the two screws on the Bottom Side (Illustration 2-10).
Note
Illustration 2-10 DAS Power Supply Cables Removal
Cables
Cables
Bottom Side of
the Power Supply
Screw
Top Side of
the Power Supply
Orientation Pin Screw Orientation Pin
7. Remove the Power Supply from the Gantry.

8. Install the new Power Supply by performing steps 6 to 1 by their reverse order.
Note
9. END
2-11 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773
Special Equipment

NUTS
NUTS
2-12 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2244773


NUTS
CONNECTORS
NUTS
2-13 DAS/DETECTOR
blank
2-14 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
SECTION 3 - DAS BOARD (FOR GDAS)
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
3-1 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-1 CONVERTER BOARD
Special Equipment
• Converter Board
5. Remove the DAS Front Cover by unscrewing its screws (total 21 screws on the DAS Front Covers: respective
6 screws on the left and right cover; 9 screws on the center cover). (Illustration 3-1).
Note
Replace different Converter Board, need only remove its corresponding DAS Front Cover and
Converter Board Box Front Cover.
Illustration 3-1 Remove DAS Cover and Converter Board Box Cover
DAS Front Cover R DAS Front Cover C DAS Front Cover L
Screw (x4) for Fasten Converter

Board Box Front Cover
3-2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773

6. After removing the DAS Front Cover, the Converter Board Box will be seen. Proceed to the next step to dis-
assembly the converter board box (Illustration 3-1).
7. Remove the Converter Board Box cover by unscrewing its four screws (Illustration 3-1).
8. Pull the ends of both extraction levers outward simultaneously to unseat the Converter Board and take it out of
the Box (Illustration 3-2).
Illustration 3-2 Extraction Levers of Converter BD
Isolation BD
Converter BD
9. Install the new Converter Board by performing step 8 to 3 in their reverse order.
NOTICE
When inserting the Converter Board, be very careful to adjust the Converter Board to a
suitable location and push gently, otherwise the pins may be damaged.
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
11. END
3-3 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-2 DCP BOARD
Special Equipment
• DCP Board
5. Remove the DAS Front Cover L by unscrewing its 6 screws. (Illustration 3-1).
6. After removing the DAS Front Cover L, the left Converter Board Box will be seen.
7. Remove the left Converter Board Box Front Cover by unscrewing its four screws (Illustration 3-1).
8. Disconnect the Signal Cable from the DCP Board.
9. Pull the ends of both extraction levers outward simultaneously to unseat the DCP Board and take it out of the
Box.
Illustration 3-3 Extraction Levers of DCP BD

Isolation BD
Signal Cable
DCP BD
3-4 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-2 DCP BOARD (CONTINUED)

10. Install the new DCP Board by performing step 9 to 3 in their reverse order.
NOTICE
When inserting the DCP Board, be very careful to adjust the DCP Board to a suitable location
and push gently, otherwise the pins may be damaged.
Pay attention to connection position of the DAS DATA Output Signal Cable (from TX port).
(See below illustration)
Illustration 3-4 DAS DATA Output Signal Cable Connection
DCP
Signal Cable
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
12. END
3-5 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-3 FLEX CABLE
Special Equipment
• FLEX CABLE
3. Remove the Connector cover by unscrewing its 4 screws and 2 nuts indicated by a on the DAS.
Illustration 3-5 Remove Connector Cover

Connector Cover
Nut (x2)
Screw (x4)
Flex Cable
3-6 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-3 FLEX CABLE (CONTINUED)

6. END
3-7 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-4 CABLE ASSY
Special Equipment
• Cable Assy
5. Remove the DAS cover and Connector cover by unscrewing 10 nuts and 7 screws on the DAS cover. (Illus-
tration 3-6).
Illustration 3-6 Remove the Cover of GDAS

SREWS (X7): Within White Circle
NUTS (X10): Within Red Circle (10 nuts: 4 nuts on the two sides)
3-8 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-4 CABLE ASSY (CONTINUED)

6. Disconnect the Cable Assy which should be replaced and install the new one.
Signal Cable
Power Cable
9. END
3-9 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-5 L-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• L-BB Assy
1. Remove the DAS Front Cover L and the left Converter Board Box Front Cover by referring to Section 3-1. (Il-
lustration 3-1).
2. Remove the Converter Board and DCP Board from the L-BB by referring to Section 3-1 and Section 3-2.
3. Remove the DAS Cover and Connector Cover by unscrewing other 6 screws and 10 nuts.
Illustration 3-8 Remove DAS Cover and Connector Cover

Screw (x6): Within White Circle
Nut (Face: x6; Side: x4): Within Red Circle
Face
Side
3-10 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-5 L-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY (CONTINUED)

4. Remove all the Flex Cables (x11), Power Cables and Single Cables that are connected to the Left BackPlate
Board.
Illustration 3-9 L-BB Cables Removal
Flex Cable (x11)
Power Cable
(for GDAS)
Signal Cable
(To OGP, Coll)
Signal Cable
Power Cable
(Between BB)
(Between BB)
5. Remove the left Converter Board Box by unscrewing its six screws from L-BackPlate Board.
6. Remove the L-BackPlate Board by unscrewing its 10 screws.
7. Install the new L-BackPlate Board by performing steps 6. to 1. in their reverse order.
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
9. END
3-11 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-6 C-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• C-BB Assy
1. Remove the DAS Front Cover C and three center Converter Board Box Front Covers by referring to Section 3-
1.
Illustration 3-10 Remove the DAS Front Cover C
DAS Front Cover C
2. Remove 3 Converter Boards from the C-BB by referring to Section 3-1 and Section 3-2.
4. Remove all the Flex Cables (x24), Power Cables and Single Cables that are connected to the Center BackPlate
Board.
Illustration 3-11 C-BB Cables Removal

24 Flex Cables
2 Power Cables
(Between BB)
2 Signal Cables
(Between BB)
3-12 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-6 C-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Remove the three Center Converter Board Boxs by unscrewing 18 screws from C-BackPlate Board.
6. Remove the C-BackPlate Board by unscrewing its 14 screws.
7. Install the new C-BackPlate Board by performing steps 6. to 1. in their reverse order.
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
9. END
3-13 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-7 R-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• R-BB Assy
1. Remove the DAS Front Cover R and the right Converter Board Box Front Covers by referring to Section 3-1.
Illustration 3-12 Remove the DAS Front Cover C
DAS Front Cover R
2. Remove the Converter Board from the R-BB by referring to Section 3-1 and Section 3-2.
4. Remove all the Flex Cables (x10), Power Cable and Single Cable that are connected to the Right BackPlate
Board.
Illustration 3-13 R-BB Cables Removal

Flex Cable (x10)
Signal Cable Power Cable

(Between BB) (Between BB)
3-14 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-7 R-BACKPLATE BOARD ASSY (CONTINUED)

5. Remove the Right Converter Board Box by unscrewing 6 screws from R-BackPlate Board.
6. Remove the R-BackPlate Board by unscrewing its 10 screws.
7. Install the new R-BackPlate Board by performing steps 6. to 1. in their reverse order.
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
9. END
3-15 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-8 GDAS POWER SUPPLY
Sepcial Equipment
5. Disconnect the cable connectors from the Power Supply. (Illustration 3-14)
Illustration 3-14 Cables of PS
Power Cable (Input)
Mounting Plate
DAS Powe
RF Cable Cable (Out
(Output)
Collimator
OGP Cable (Output)
(Output)
3-16 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
3-8 GDAS POWER SUPPLY (CONTINUED)

6. Cut the tie-wrap fixed on the hole of Power Supply handle shown as below.
CAUTION
Be care not to snip the cables bound on the hole of the Power Supply handle with tie-wrap.
Illustration 3-15 Hole of the PS Handle
Left
Orientation
Pin
Right
Right
Front Hole for binding Power Supply

Cables
Front Handle
7. Remove the Power Supply by unscrewing its four screws from the Mounting Plate. (See Illustration 7-3)
Note
8. Install the new Power Supply and connect the cable connectors.
Note
9. Bind the cables beside the Power Supply to the hole of Power Supply handle with tie-wrap according to step 6.
NOTICE
Be sure that the cables are far from the bearing, and do not bind them tightly with tie-wrap
to avoid cutting cable during future possible replacement.
11. END
3-17 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773
Special Equipment

NUTS
NUTS
3-18 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 28 2244773


NUTS
CONNECTORS
NUTS
3-19 DAS/DETECTOR
3-20 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
SECTION 4 - DETECTOR
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
4-1 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
4-1 DETECTOR
Special Equipment
• Detector Assy
3. Remove the front, rear, and right side Gantry covers.
5. Remove the Connector cover by unscrewing nuts indicated by a on the DAS.

6. Remove the flexible cables (45) that are connected from the Detector to the CAM boards.
Illustration 4-1 Removal of DAS Upper Cover
24Pin
Flexible Cables
Flexible
Cable
4-2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
4-1 DETECTOR (CONTINUED)

7. Remove the Temperature Control Box cover.
8. Disconnect the cable connector of the Temperature Control.
9. Unscrew the three locking screws and remove the Detector carefully.
NOTICE
AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE!
The bottom face of the Detector (Flexible Cable Connectors) is very sensitive, so handle it
with extreme care.
Illustration 4-2 Detector Removal
Locking Screw
Z-Axis
Adjustment Nut
Detector Detector
Support Plate
Locking Screw
(Allen Head)
Z-Axis
Adjustment Nut
Plastic
Ring
Detector
Support Plate Detector
Long Pin
4-3 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 19 2244773
4-1 DETECTOR (CONTINUED)

10. Verify that the plastic ring is securely attached to a mounting hole on both sides of the Detector (see illustration
4-2).
11. Install the new Detector by referring to steps 9. through 5.
12. Remove the azimuth lock pin.
13. Perform the following checks and adjustments according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check &
Adjustment.
Note
Install the Connector cover before performing ROTATION BALANCE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT.
ROTATION BALANCE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
X-RAY ALIGNMENT
HIGHLIGHT CALIBRATION (Q-Cal, XT-Cal, AV-Cal)
AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATION
14. Install the front and left side Gantry covers.
15. END
Illustration 4-3 New Detector
New Detector
Plastic Ring
4-4 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 8 2244773
X-RAY GENERATOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - X-RAY GENERATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
SECTION 2 - AUXILIARY BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
SECTION 3 - X-RAY TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
SECTION 4 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 JEDI GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 HV TANK, 1 TUBE, 1-3 PHASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
SECTION 5 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 INVERTER MID POWER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 I/F BOARD NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
SECTION 6 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 KV CONTROL BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2 EMC BOARD 3 PHASES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6-3 AC/DC 3 PHASE MID POWER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-4 INVERTER COILS MID POWER ASSEMBLY, OR CAPACITOR INVERTER ASSEMBLY 6-
16
SECTION 7 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-4 ROTATION CAPACITOR SET 23/23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-5 REPLACE NONVOLATILE PARAMETERS RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
i X-RAY GENERATOR
ii X-RAY GENERATOR
REV 33 2244773
SECTION 1 - X-RAY GENERATOR
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
Special Equipment
• X-Ray Generator
• Hoist
• Silicone Oil
• Candle Stick HV lead Wrench
• Tie-wraps
• Kim Wipe
CAUTION
BURN/SHOCK HAZARD.
Wait more than five minutes following the last scan before performing the following
procedure.
CAUTION
1-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773
SECTION - 1 X-RAY GENERATOR (CONTINUED)
NOTICE
When the X-Ray Generator is replaced, including a KV Cont Board, perform the following:
Refer to the illustration on the next page.
Before X-Ray Generator Replacement
1. Upload Database (#1):
a. Select the “Saved RAM Data Upload”, refer to below:
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Saved RAM data Upload
Click “Apply”. (After “Generator Test”, system will shutdown automatically.)
b. The “Saved RAM data Upload” menu shows below:
Filter The file name jedipara.mx" required

/usr/g/service/*.mx for this procedure must be typed in.
Selection
/usr/g/service/log/jedipara.mx
c. Select “OK”, then wait to complete the “RAM Data Upload” (approximately 7 ∼ 10 minutes).
1-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773
JEDI
Out of Order
#1
Yes
Yes Is
Upload SW original DB NoNo
Database Version saved?
Before < After? (*)
Replace
Yes
Yes JEDI
Replace NoNo Replace

JEDI JEDI
DB NoNo System
Upload = ESR?
Yes Possible? No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes #3
Download
CD-ROM
#2 Database
#2
Download
Download Original #4
Database Database Filament
(*) Calibration
SW
Version
Before=After?
Yes
Yes
NoNo #5
Update
Error Definition File
TnT Definition File
#6
JEDI Time/Date
Set
Operational
Checks
(*) or most recent backup
END
1-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

After X-Ray Generator Replacement
1. Download Database:
1-1. From Back-up Database (#2)
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Do NOT download the old database if you are going to replace to later version of JEDI
software. Because the new version software has improved default parameters to solve some
problems.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
a. Select the “Saved RAM Data Download”, refer to below:
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Saved RAM data Download
Click “Apply”.
b. The “Saved RAM data Download” menu shows below:
Filter The file name must be typed in for this

/usr/g/service/*.mx procedure, as jedipara.mx" (same
as saved file name at step b).
Selection
/usr/g/service/log/jedipara.mx
c. Select “OK”, then wait to complete the “RAW Data Download” (approximately 7 ∼ 10 minutes).
1-2.. From JEDI Service Tool (CD-ROM) (#3)
a. Insert the JEDI Service Tool (JEDI Software CD-ROM) into the CD-ROM/DVD-RAM drive of the operator
console (OC).
b. Select Generator Test from the Diagnostics service menu.
c. Select Saved RAM data download.
d. Set : Filter /CDROM/*.mx (for Irix system) ([Enter])
Filter /mnt/cdrom/*.mx (for Linux system) ([Enter])
e. Select : Directories CDROM/cdrompx_x (for Irix system) ([Enter])
Directories mnt/cdrom/cdrompx_x (for Linux system) ([Enter])
*x_x: indicates software version
f. Select : Files npesrx_x.mx (*x_x: indicates software version Ex.)
npesrxx.mx: Np ESR (CT/e, ProSpeed AI, FI database)
npv3xx.mx: Np V3 (HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i Pro database)
npv15xx.mx: Np V1.5 (HiSpeed LX/i, DX/i, FX/i, NX/i database)
1-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

g. Click OK.
h. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately 10 minutes for download to finish.
i. Click Close.
j. Select Checksum saved RAM.
k. Click Confirm after a ‘successfully’ message appears.
l. Click Close.
m. Click Exit and Shutdown OC.
n. After the OC shutdown process finishes, remove the JEDI Service Tool CD-ROM from the drive.
2. Calibrate Filament (#4):
If JEDI software version is ≥ p5.2, follow the procedure below.
• If original Database is loaded, no need to perform calibration.
• If default Database is loaded, run following exposure to allow filament aging correction.
For NP V3 & NP V1.5 (DX/i, FX/i, LX/i, ZX/i, NX/i, NX/i Plus, NX/i Pro)
- Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA, small focus, 1 mm x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD
- Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA, large focus, 10 mm x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD
For NP ESR (CT/e, ProSpeed AI, FI)

- Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA x 20 times 2 sec scan 2sec ISD
1-5 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

3. Update JEDI Error Definition file and TnT Definition file (#5):
The OC has Error Definition & TnT definition files for Generator. They are different depending on JEDI software
version. If the software version of the replaced JEDI is higher than that of the previous one, Error Definition and
TnT Definition files need to be updated.
console (OC).
c. Select “ Error Definition file update”
d. Set : Filter /CDROM/*.csv (for Irix system) ([Enter])
Filter /mnt/cdrom/*.csv (for Linux system) ([Enter])
e. Select : Directories CDROM/cdrompxx (for Irix system) ([Enter])
Directories mnt/cdrom/cdrompxx (for Linux system) ([Enter])
*xx: indicates software version
f. Select : Files efilexx.csv (*xx: indicates software version)
g. Click OK.
h. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately 10 seconds to complete update.
i. Click Close.
j. Select “ TnT Definition file update ”
k. Set : Filter /CDROM/*.csv (for Irix system) ([Enter])
l. Select : Directories CDROM/cdrompxx (for Irix system) ([Enter])
m. Select : Files tntpxx.csv (*xx: indicates software version)
n. Click OK.
o. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately two seconds to complete update.
p. Click Close.
q. Click Exit and Shutdown OC.
r. After the OC shutdown process finishes, remove the JEDI Service Tool CD-ROM from the drive.
4. Set the JEDI Time & Date correctly (#6):
a. Select the “Set JEDI Time”, refer to below:
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Set Jedi Time
b. Compare the JEDI time/date with system’s one. The system’s time/date are displayed in the left column on
the monitor. If these time/date were not same, set the JEDI time/date to the system’s one.
After “Generator Test”, system will shutdown automatically.
1-6 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

1. Preparation:
d. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
e. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers.
2. Rotate the Gantry by hand until the x-ray generator reaches the 3 o’clock position.
3. Remove the following cable connectors and component from the X-Ray Generator (Illustration 3-2).
• Fan Bracket 11 Screws (For System with D3152T Tube)
• 3 Power Cables leading from the Slip Ring Assy
• J1 and J2 (AC/DC BD) leading from the JEDI Auxiliary Box
• J2 leading from the OGP Assy
• J3 (KV Cntrl BD) Flat Cable Connector
• J3 leading from the JEDI Auxiliary Box
• HV Cables Anode/Cathode
(If these are not accessible, rotate the Gantry by hand.)
Wipe any residual oil from the lead to avoid dripping and insert kimwipe into the receptacle to prevent oil from
leaking. Cover HV cable leads with kimwipe to protect then.
Illustration 1-1 Cable Connectors Removal
J1 / J2
Flat Cable
HV Cables
HV Lead Wrench
J3
Fan Bracket
J2 Connector
1-7 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

4. Remove the three power cables from the X-ray Generator:
a. Rotate the Gantry by hand until a bottom cover of the X-ray Generator is accessible.
b. Remove the bottom cover of the X-ray Generator by removing 5 screws (Illustration 1-2).
c. Remove the three power cables from the bottom of the X-ray Generator by removing three nuts
(31kg.cm(3N.m)) (Illustration 1-2).
d. Install the bottom cover of the X-ray Generator.
Illustration 1-2 XG Power Cable Removal
(31kg.cm(3N.m))
Viewed from Bottom
Bottom Cover
Screw (x5)
Power Cables
1-8 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

5. Remove the X-ray Generator from the Gantry rotational frame:
a. Remove the Hoist Rail locking screw.
b. Slide out the Hoist Rail, then install the Hoist as shown in illustration 1-3.
c. Slide the Hoist Rail to appropriate position, then attach the hoist chain to the X-ray Generator hook and pull
in all loose chain until the chain is taut.
d. Unscrew 6 Allen screws and 2 Nylon nuts, and remove the X-ray Generator from the Gantry rotational
frame.
e. Slide the Hoist Rail to appropriate position, then lower the X-ray Generator carefully onto the floor.
Illustration 1-3 X-Ray Generator Removal
Hoist Rail
Locking Screw
Gantry Rotational Stud
Frame
Nylon Nut
(450kgf.cm(44N.m))
Stud
Allen Screw (x6) Nylon Nut

(450kgf.cm(44N.m)) (450kgf.cm(44N.m))
1-9 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

6. Install the new X-ray Generator referring to steps 5.
7. Connect the HV cables:
a. Clean each HV cable receptacle of the new X-ray Generator, and fill in the silicone oil into them.
b. Insert the HV cable leads into the receptacles. Remove the leads and check if all its internal surface is
soaked with silicone oil. If not add more silicon oil into the receptacles and repeat this step.
c. Tighten HV cable leads using HV lead wrench.
8. Connect all the cables to the X-ray Generator referring to steps 4 through 3.
9. Install the Hoist Rail locking screw.
11. END
1-10 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 2 2244773
SECTION 2 - AUXILIARY BOX
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
CAUTION
Special Equipment
• Auxiliary Box
• Hoist
• Tie-wraps
WARNING
MECHANICAL HAZARD!
FAILURE TO HOLD THE GANTRY USING THE AZIMUTH LOCK PIN PRIOR TO REMOVING
COMPONENTS MAY LEAD TO GANTRY MOTION WHICH CAN STRIKE A PERSON CAUSING
INJURY OR DEATH.
2-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 2 2244773
SECTION - 2 AUXILIARY BOX (CONTINUED)

1. Preparation:
d. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
e. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers.
2. Rotate the Gantry by hand until X-Ray Tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.
4. Cut the tie-wrap of the wires connected to the JEDI Auxiliary Box as shown in Illustration 2-1.
5. Disconnect all external cable connectors from the JEDI Auxiliary Box.
Illustration 2-1 Auxiliary Box Connectors
Cable Connectors
2-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 2 2244773
SECTION - 2 AUXILIARY BOX (CONTINUED)

6. Remove 6 Allen bolts and remove the Auxiliary Box (Illustration 2-2).
7. Install the new Auxiliary Box using 6 Allen bolts removed in the previous step.
8. Connect the connectors removed in step 5.
9. Secure the wires using tie-wraps at the position it was removed in step 4.
ROTATION BALANCE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
11. END
Illustration 2-2 Auxiliary Box Removal
Screws
(x6)
2-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

blank
2-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773
SECTION 3 - X-RAY TUBE
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
Person Required: One field engineer
Special Equipment
• Hoist (46-195700G1)
• Tube Oil
• Candle Stick HV lead Wrench (2215804)
• Tie-wraps
• Kim Wipe
• Functional Check/Adjustment Manual (2244775)
WARNING
MECHANICAL HAZARD!
FAILURE TO HOLD THE GANTRY USING THE AZIMUTH LOCK PIN PRIOR TO REMOVING
COMPONENTS MAY LEAD TO GANTRY MOTION WHICH CAN STRIKE A PERSON CAUSING
INJURY OR DEATH.
CAUTION
BURN/SHOCK HAZARD. Wait more than fifteen minutes following the last scan before
performing the following procedure.
3-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773
SECTION - 3 X-RAY TUBE (CONTINUED)


2. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘, ‘XG Power‘ and ‘Slip Ring115V‘ switches at the rear Gantry base.
3. Remove the front, right side, and left maintenance covers.
4. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube is at the 90 degree position.
Illustration 3-1 Azimuth Lock Pin
Azimuth Lock Pin
3-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

6. Remove the Hoist Rail locking screw.
7. Slide out the Hoist Rail, then install the Hoist as shown in illustration 3-2.
8. Slide the Hoist Rail to appropriate position, then attach the hoist chain to the X-ray tube hook and pull in all
loose chain until the chain is taut.
Illustration 3-2 Hoist Installation
Hoist Rail
Locking Screw
3-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

9. Pull out the Cathode main HV cable lead from the X-ray tube and discharge it by touching all three prongs to
a ground such as the tank.
Note
Take care not to damage the HV Cable leads
10. Wipe any residual oil from the lead to avoid dripping and insert kimwipe into the receptacle to prevent oil from
leaking.
11. Pull out the Anode main HV cable lead from the X-ray tube and discharge it by touching all three prongs to a
ground such as the tank.
12. Wipe any residual oil from the lead to avoid dripping and insert kimwipe into the receptacle to prevent oil from
leaking.
13. Cut the tie wraps holding the HV cables to the X-ray tube housing.
14. Disconnect the rotor control connector.
15. Disconnect Fan/Pump power cable connector (yellow cable).
Illustration 3-3 Cable Connectors Removal
Fan/Pump Power
Cable Connector
Rotor Control
Cable Connector
3-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

16. Unscrew the M6 cap screw, which is used for ISO adjustment.
17. Loosen and remove the four mounting screws (Carefully with the X-ray tube secure : Torque = 285kgf.cm)
Illustration 3-4 X-Ray Tube Removal
M6 Cap Screw
(117kgf.cm)
Mounting Plate
Mounting
Screws (x 4)
(285kgf.cm)
3-5 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

18. Use the hoist to slowly lower the X-ray tube to the ground.
19. Remove the mounting plate (2244119) by unscrewing four plate screws.
Dispose the four plate screws, do not use them for the new X-ray tube.
20. Install the mounting plate onto the new X-ray tube with new screws (2122264, M10 x 1.5 x 18mm). Then use
the hoist to raise the new X-ray tube into place.
21. Install the new X-ray tube by performing steps 19. through 6. in the step 17. use new screws (U0442AA, M10
x 1.5 x 45mm) for mounting the X-ray tube to the Gantry.
Illustration 3-5 Mounting Plate Removal
Plate Screws (x4)

(285kgf.cm)
3-6 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

22. Retie any tie wraps which were removed in step 13. (see illustration below).
Illustration 3-6 X-Ray Tube Tie-Wrap Configuration
3-7 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

23. Switch ON the “Slip Ring 115V” switch at the rear Gantry base, and verify that the radiator FAN for the x-ray
tube cooling and JEDI Power Unit FAN are operating normally.
24. Update ‘Tube Usage’ Log and ‘Tube Spits’ log:
a. Select Update System Log; refer to below:
Service Menu-->Error logs-->Update System Log

b. Select Tube Usage from the lists,
c. Type/enter the new Tube information, and press [Create].
d. Select Tube Spits from the lists, and press [Create].
e. Select Bad Raw from the lists, and press [Create].
25. Perform the following to initialize the Filament Data:
a. Select the ‘Clear Filament aging/Tube status’ menu as below;
Service Menu-->Diagnostics-->Generator Test-->Clear Filament aging/Tube status

b. Click ‘Apply’, then click ‘OK’ to clean-up the old Filament/Tube data.
The system automatically restarts.


X-RAY ALIGNMENT
KV AND mA CHECK
DAS COUNT CHECK
Q CALIBRATION (Q-Cal)
SYSTEM CALIBRATION
CT No. ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE PERFORMANCE
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Certify that the Rear TSW is horizontally, vertically and center aligned.
Adjust the Rear TSW so that there is no clearance between its edge and the cover.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
27. END
3-8 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 7 2244773
SECTION 4 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - I
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
4-1 JEDI GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information to dismount and remount FRU (Field Replaceable Unit).
2 TOOLS
Serviceability of Jedi Generator requires the following tools :
K
Digital multimeter (A)
Philips screwdriver (B)
J
Allen key (C)
Screwdriver with interchangeable socket head (D)
Long extension for ratchet wrench (E) F I
Short extension for ratchet wrench (F)
Cutting pliers (G)
High Voltage wrench (H) C
Ratchet wrench (I) E
A
Socket wrench (J)
Hexagonal head socket set (K)
D G
B H
4-1
REV 7 2244773
4-2 HV TANK, 1 TUBE, 1-3 PHASES

Time: 0 h 35 min. - Personnel: 1 field engineer
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet (to remove screws)
10 mm allen wrench (to remove the bolts into the heat sink)
13 mm socket with ratchet (to remove primary coil flat cables)
3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF.

DANGER
APPLY LOCK OUT - TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN
MANIPULATING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED.
To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.
4 PREREQUISITES
The internal CAN cable, Heater cable, DC bus cable, ground cable, the Three-phase input cable and
three screws on the EMC cover must be removed before handling the Power unit.
The generator Power Unit (66 kg) must be remove d and put on the floor or on a work bench using the
special hoist that is part of the gantry.
4-2
REV 7 2244773
4-2 HV TANK, 1 TUBE, 1-3 PHASES (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
WARNING
THE POWER UNIT WEIGHS 66 KILOGRAMS. BE SURE TO USE THE SPECIAL
HOIST AND TO BE CAREFUL WHEN MOVING IT.
5–1 Position The Power Unit
1. With the 10 mm allen wrench, only loosen the 3

bolts (located at the bottom) which fasten the HV
Tank to the heat sink.
2. Remove only the central bolt.
3. Position the Power Unit on its side, the heat sink down.
lllustration 1 - Rear view
5–2 Remove Front Cover (If not already done)
Unscrew the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws on three

sides (4 screws on each side; top, right, left in photo)
and remove the front cover.
Front View
5–3 Disconnect Cables

1. Disconnect the filament cable from the top of the
1
KV Measure Board 1 (which forms part of the top
of the HV Tank).
1
4-3
REV 7 2244773
4
2. Disconnect the wider short ribbon cable 2 , con-
necting the KV Control board to the KV Measure 1
Board, from the top of the KV Measure board.
2
3. Using a 13 mm socket wrench, remove the three nuts 3 attaching the

primary coil flat cables to the round capacitors located on the shelf just
above the KV Measure board.
Illustration 2 -
4.Disconnect the short ribbon cable 4 , connecting the Gate Command Board (on the Inverter Mid
Power Assembly) to the KV Measure Board, from the top of the KV Measure board.
4-4
REV 7 2244773
5–4 Freeing the Tank

1. Remove the two 5.5 mm hex screws from the flange above the part of the tank extending out of the
Power Unit 1 .
2. Just loosen 6 screws 2 (this will allow some play to facilitate the removal and installation of the HV
tank.)
Illustration 3 -
4-5
REV 7 2244773
3. Remove the two 5.5 mm hex screws

away from the HV outlets 1 ; 2
4. Remove the single screw next to the HV
outlets 2 .
If any screw falls down,

make sure to get them
back after.
CAUTION
Illustration 4 -
5. By hand or with the 10 mm allen wrench, starting with the bolts farthest from the HV outlets 3 ,
remove the two remaining HV Tank retaining bolts from the bottom of the cast aluminum heat sink 4 .
4 3
4-6
REV 7 2244773
6. Holding down the primary coil flat cables, slide the tank out of the Power Unit.
Take the flat cable from the kV Measure board on the HV tank and mount it on the new HV tank.
4-7
REV 7 2244773
6 REASSEMBLY
1. Gently slide the new HV Tank into the Power Unit and position it so that the holes are aligned and the
bolts can be threaded into both units.
2. Insert the 3 retaining bolts through the heat sink.

3. Insert the 5.5 mm hex head screws on the HV outlet end at the far end that secure the HV Tank to the
chassis (refer to Illustration 4, 1 and 2 ), then the two 5.5 mm hex head screws in the flange jutting
out of the unit (refer to Illustration 3, 1 ). Tighten them all to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
4. Reconnect the short ribbon cable from the Gate Command board (on the Inverter Mid Power assem-
bly).
4-8
REV 7 2244773
5. Using the 13 mm socket wrench connect the primary coil flat cables to the three capacitors (refer to
Illustration 2, 3 ).
The two flat cables with white

CAUTION bands on them go both together
on the middle capacitor with the
parallel resonant coil cable 1 .
Tighten the nuts to 10 N.m (approx. 100 kgf.cm).

1
6. Reconnect the following cables to the KV Mea-

sure board:
• Wider short ribbon cable from the KV Control board
• Filament cable from the Auxiliary Unit
7. Stand the Power Unit on end, the EMC cover down.
8. With the 10 mm allen wrench, tighten the 3 bolts that fasten the HV Tank to the heat sink to 20 N.m
(200 kg.cm). (See Illustration 1).
9. Tighten the screws 2 referred in Illustration 3 to between 1.5 and 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm)
10. Perform an overall inspection before proceeding.
11. Reinstall the front cover. Tighten the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20
kg.cm).
12. Lift the power unit back onto the gantry and attach it. Reconnect all the cables.
7 VERIFY
Proceed to HV ”No Load Diagnostics” to ensure correct operation.
4-9
blank
4-10
REV 7 2244773
SECTION 5 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - II
5-1 INVERTER MID POWER ASSEMBLY

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
Long, large philips screwdriver (to remove three screws on Inverter assembly cable).
5.5 mm socket, with ratchet if possible (to remove screws)
10 mm and 13 mm socket with ratchet (to remove cable connector nuts)
10 mm allen wrench (to remove the bolts into the heat sink)
DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
three screws on the EMC cover must be removed before handling the Power unit
5-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 7 2244773
5-1 INVERTER MID POWER ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
THE POWER UNIT WEIGHS 66 KILOGRAMS. BE SURE TO USE THE SPECIAL

WARNING
HOIST AND TO BE CAREFUL WHEN MOVING IT.
5–1 Remove Heat Sink Bolts
With the Power Unit standing on end.

1
1. Remove the seven bolts holding the Inverter Heat Sink 1 .
2. Loosen the two bolts holding the HV Tank through the Inverter heat
sink 2 .
2 1 2
5–2 Remove Covers Rear View
1. Unscrew the 5.5 mm hex head screws from three sides and remove the
front cover (If not already done).
2. Unscrew and remove the lifting bracket plate 3 .

Front View
Note that all the 5.5 mm hex head screws on

the Jedi generator are 8 mm long, except for 3
the fourteen screws holding the lifting bracket
which are 12 mm long.
Top View
3. Position the Power Unit on its side, the heat sink down.
5-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 7 2244773
4. Unscrew the six 5.5 mm hex head screws on the lateral part of the
L–shaped cover under the lifting bracket and remove the cover 4 .
4
Illustration 1Power unit lying on Heat Sink
5. Unscrew the 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the right l
ateral cover over the AC/DC board.
5–3 Separate the Inverter Mid Power Assembly
1. Using a 10 mm socket wrench, disconnect the two DC cables :
-DC, +DC 5 from the AC/DC board.
Retain the locking washers. 5
Ensure that the two cables are marked.

The Inverter will be damaged if the + and
CAUTION
- DC Bus cables are reversed.
Illustration 2
2. Remove the remaining two HV Tank retaining bolts from the bottom
of the cast aluminum heat sink 6 .
5-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 7 2244773
3. Slide the entire block 7 and pull the DC cables out 8 .

A
Illustration 6
10
Illustration 7 A View
4. Disconnect the short ribbon cable from the KV Measure board to the Gate Command board 9 .
5. Disconnect the measure current cable from the kV measure board 10 .
5-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 7 2244773
6. Unscrew the 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the lateral
cover 11 . (The Inverter assembly is now mechanically free

and only retained by five cables) .
Illustration 6
11
7. Disconnect the two Parallel Resonance

Inductor cables from the Inverter capacitor
assembly 12 .
Overhead View 12
8. Disconnect connector J4 on the Gate
Command board 13 .
13
Illustration 7-
5-5 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 7 2244773
9. For better access, pull the inverter slightly towards you to
partially disengage it (about 20 mm) 14 .
14
Pull
A
10. Using the philips screwdriver, disconnect the three resonance coils from the IGBTs 15 .
15
15
Dual
Snub
Board
A
5-6 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 7 2244773
11. Remove the cables and separate the Inverter Mid Power Assembly.
Resonance
Inductor
Gate Command Board
Inverter
Mid Power
Assembly
Dual Snub Board
5-7 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 7 2244773
6 REASSEMBLY
6–1 Mount the new Inverter Assembly
1. Present the new inverter assembly as indicated in Illustration 7,
To facilitate the operation,

1.Push to the left the two cables of the parallel resonant coil.
2.Raise the three cables from the serial resonant coil assembly in order to protect the components of the
Inverter assembly.
3.Retain the two other connectors that are to be mounted on the Inverter Gate Supply board on the Inverter
assembly.
Illustration 7
5-8 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 7 2244773

2. Attach the three cables from the serial resonant coil assembly to the Inverter assembly IGBTs using the philips
screwdriver; refer to 1 , and view A .

There is a locking washer between the screws and the cables. Tighten firmly to 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).
RESPECT THE ORIENTATION OF THE CABLES TO THE IGBTS CONNECTIONS

WARNING
TO AVOID Q100C CABLE CONTACT WITH TOP COVER.
1 1
3.
Connect the current measurement feedback connector (J4) to the Gate Command board (refer to Illustration
4, 10 ).
4. Engage the Inverter assembly into position (refer to Illustration 6, A ).
5-9 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 7 2244773
5. Pass the two cables from the parallel B
resonant coil as indicated 2 .

A
- Attach the shorter wire on the

pass through the current trans-
former with the 10 mm screw and
its washers A .
Tighten to torque 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).
- Attach the longer wire on the Overhead view

central capacitor of the capacitor 2 2
inverter with the 13 mm screws
and their washers, together with
the two primary HV transformer
flat wires (the two with a white
spot or ring mark).
Tighten to torque 10 N.m (approx. 100 kgf.cm).
B A

REV 7 2244773
6. Connect the flat cable from the HV tank to the Inverter Gate Command board (refer to Illustration 4 9 ).
7. Connect the DC bus connector to the Inverter Gate Command board (Refer to Illustration 6, 13 ).
Perform an overall inspection before proceeding.
6–2 Reassemble the Power unit
1. Remount the left lateral cover 1 .
Note: Don’t place any screws on 2 .
2. Remount the angled cover and only the right screws without 2 1
tightening them (refer to Illustration 1, 4 ).
3. Position the ”HV Tank-Inverter -kV Control” assembly while passing the two DC bus wires through the hole on
the AC/DC frame (refer to Illustration 3, 8 ).
4. Attach the six bolts through the accessible holes 3 . Tighten four of
them to torque 20 N.m (200 kg.cm).
4
Note: The short screws with the flat washers are
always towards the top 4 . The long ones 5
are located at the bottom 5 .
Rear View

REV 7 2244773
- + 6
5. Attach + and - wires of the DC bus to the AC/DC board.
- Insert the screw and grower washer, then tighten

to torque 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).
ENSURE POLARITY IS OBSERVED.

WARNING AN INVERSION WOULD DESTROY
THE INVERTER AND AC/DC BOARD
AT POWER-UP.
Illustration 8 AC/DC 3 Phases Mid Power

Assembly
6. Put the complete assembly in the vertical position.

- Insert the remaining bolts and tighten to torque 20 N.m (200 kg.cm).
7. Mount the top lifting bracket by fitting the fourteen 5.5 mm, 12 mm long screws and tighten all of them to 1.5 to
2 N.m (15 to 20kg.cm).
8. Reconnect the DC bus cable to the top of the AC/DC board (whichever connector) (refer to Illustration 8, 6 ).
9. Remount the AC/DC cover.
6–3 Reassembly to the Gantry

1. Lift the power unit back on to the gantry and attach it.
2. Reconnect all cables and remount the EMC cover.
3. Mount the front cover.

REV 7 2244773
7 VERIFY
1. Verify the operation
2. Run the INVERTER diagnostics:
•Inverter Gate Command Diagnostics

•Inverter in Short Circuit Diagnostics.

REV 7 2244773
5-2 I/F BOARD NP

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.

DANGER
Note: The I/F board NP may be replaced while the JEDI generator is on the gantry.

REV 7 2244773
5-2 I/F BOARD NP (CONTINUED)
4 PROCEDURE
4–1 Remove Cover (If not already done)

Unscrew the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws on three sides (4 screws on each side; top, right, left) and
remove the front cover.
4–2 Remove the Board
1. Disconnect the short ribbon cable that 2

connects the I/F Board NP to the KV Control
board 1 .
2. Unscrew the three 5.5 mm hex nut screws
that are directly on the flat surface of the
board 2 .
3. Then unscrew the four 4.5 mm hex head
screws of the connectors on the outside of
3
the chassis 3 .
4. Remove the board.
1
3
I/F Board NP
5 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the I/F Board NP.
Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
6 VERIFY
Reapply power and verify that the system functions correctly.
Put the cover back. Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).

blank

REV 33 2244773
SECTION 6 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - III
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
6-1 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773
6-1 KV CONTROL BOARD

Time: 0 h 30 min - Personnel: 1 field engineer
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS

DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
The KV Control board contains a saved memory Database with essentially the following parameters :
- Tube configuration parameters
- Filament ageing variable
- Error Log
- Recorded parameter data
If it is possible, backup database first. Else, the diagram below helps you to determine the action to take
for your situation. Refer to below to perform the backup.
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Saved RAM data Upload
Note: The KV Control Board may be replaced while the JEDI generator is on the gantry.
6-2 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773
6-1 KV CONTROL BOARD (CONTINUED)
Note: Possible Replacement:

Various software versions exist for KV Control boards. They are developed to have Backward
Compatibility. The table below shows the possible replacement of them.
Replacement for NP V1.5 (LX/i, DX/i, FX/i, NX/i)
KV control board in the field Possible replacement parts in GPO store
No. Part Softwar Databa 2230555 2230555-2 2230555-6 2265276 2230555-6 (Continued
No. e se (P5.4, NP with to below)
Version V3) 2255209-2
1 223055 P4.0 NP V1.5 OK OK - - OK (*1)

5
2 223055 P4.06 NP V1.5 - OK - - OK (*1)

5-2
3 223055 P5.4 NP V1.5 - - OK - OK

5-6
4 223055 P5.47 NP V1.5 - - - - -

5-7
No. Part Softwar Databa 2265276 2230555-7 2230555-7 - - -

No. e se (P5.4, NP with
Version V3) 2255209-4
with
2255209-2
1 223055 P4.0 NP V1.5 - OK (*1) - - - -

5
2 223055 P4.06 NP V1.5 - OK (*1) - - - -

5-2
3 223055 P5.4 NP V1.5 - OK (*1) - - - -

5-6
4 223055 P5.47 NP V1.5 - OK OK - - -

5-7
(Continued to next page)
6-3 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773
Replacement for NP ESR (CT/e, ProSpeed AI, FI) and NP V3 (HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i Pro)
KV control board in the field Possible replacement parts in GPO store
No. Part No. Softwar Databas 2230555-5 2214606-13 2230555-6 2265276 2230555-6 (Continued
e e (P5.4, NP with to below)
Version V3) 2255209-2
4 2230555 P5.2 NP ESR OK - - - OK (*1) (*2)

-5
5 2214606 P5.2 NP V3 - OK - - -
13
6 2230555 P5.4 NP ESR - - OK (*2) - OK (*1) (*2)

-6
7 2214606 P5.4 NP V3 - - - OK -
-16
8 2230557 P5.47 NP ESR - - - - -

-7
9 2214606 P5.47 NP V3 - - - - -
-19
No. Part No. Softwar Databas 2265276 2230555-7 2265276-2 2230555-7 - -

e e (P5.4, NP with with
Version V3) 2255209-4 2255209-4
with
2255209-2
4 2230555 P5.2 NP ESR - OK (*1) (*2) - - - -

-5
5 2214606 P5.2 NP V3 OK (*1) - OK (*1) - - -

13
6 2230555 P5.4 NP ESR - OK (*1) (*2) - - - -

-6
7 2214606 P5.4 NP V3 OK - OK (*1) - - -

-16
8 2230557 P5.47 NP ESR - OK (*2) - OK (*2) - -

-7
9 2214606 P5.47 NP V3 - - OK - - -
-19
OK: Possible replacement.

(*1): Need to update “ Error definition file ” and “ Tracking and Trending definition file ” using JEDI Service Tool
assy (Software CD-ROM: 2255209-x).
(*2): Need to download NP ESR database using JEDI Service tool, which attached to system as an accessory.
Because, NP V1.5 KV control board and NP ESR KV control board are common parts. Default database is set
as NP V1.5.
6-4 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

If the software version of the KV Control board to be replaced is earlier than or equal to that of the new KV Control
board, follow the procedure illustrated below; otherwise, proceed to next page.
NOTE: If the variation No. of the new board (xxxxxxx-yy) is larger than that of the board to be replaced (with the
same part No.), it indicates that the software version of the new board is later than that of the board to be replaced.
First Installation
Configura Calibration Save Non KV Control

tion Volatile RAM Out of Order
Database
Replace
KV Control
Yes SW
OK?
No
No System
Download = ESR?
Software
Yes
Download
CD-ROM
Database
Calibration
Reset
Database:
- Date
- Time
- Clear Error log SW
Version
Before=After?
Yes
Operational
Checks No
Update
Save Non Volatile Error Definition File
RAM Database TnT Definition File
END
6-5 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

If the software version of the KV Control board to be replaced is equal to that of the new KV Control board, follow
the procedure illustrated below.
NOTE: If the variation No. of the new board (xxxxxxx-yy) is larger than that of the board to be replaced (with the
same part No.), it indicates that the software version of the new board is later than that of the board to be replaced.
First Installation
Calibration Save Non KV Control

Configuration Volatile RAM Out of Order
Database
DB Is
Upload Yes Upload No original DB No
Database Possible? saved?
(*)
Yes Replace
KV Control
Replace Replace
KV Control KV Control
Yes SW
OK?
SW No Download Yes SW
Software No
OK? OK? No System
Download = ESR?
Yes No Software
Download Yes
Software
Download
CD-ROM
Database
Download
Download Original
Database Database
(*)
Calibrate if
applicable
Reset
Database: Operational Save Non Volatile
- Date Checks RAM Database
- Time
- Clear Error log
END
(*) or most recent backup
6-6 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773
5 DISASSEMBLY
5–1 Remove Cover (If not already done)
Unscrew the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws on three sides (4 screws on each side; top, right, left) and
remove the front cover.
5–2 Remove Cables
1. Disconnect the short ribbon cable 1 that

connects the KV Control board to the I/F Board
KV
NP. Control
Board
I/F Board NP 1 2 Non volatile

Parameters
RAM
2. Disconnect the short ribbon cable 2 that connects the KV Control board to the KV Measure board on the top
of the HV Tank.

Unscrew the seven 5.5 mm hex nut screws and
remove the board.
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the KV Control board.
Tighten all 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
6-7 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773
7 VERIFY
1. Reapply power and verify that the 8 LEDs on KV Control board are scrolling.
2. Refer to section 4 above for information concerning reload of the appropriate Data Base parameters in the Non
Volatile RAM.
3. Verify software version.
- If it corresponds to your system or is backward compatible, go to 4.
- If not, download software.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Do NOT download the old database or swap the chip (see the descriptions below), if the
software version of the new board is equal to or later than that of the old one (Before < After).
Because the new version software has improved default parameters to solve some
problems.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Download Data Base from operator console.
4-1.From Back-up Data Base
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Saved RAM data Download
- Up-to-date Data Base if available
- Most recent or originally saved Data Base if available
- Default Data Base.
Alternately, you may try to swap the NVRAM chip (U32) from the former to the new KV Control board to keep all
the parameters. Refer to NVRAM replacement procedure. If this chip is not involved in the failure or the cause for
replacement, it will allow to keep up-to-date data.
6-8 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

4-2. From JEDI Service Tool (CD-ROM)
console (OC).
c. Select Saved RAM data download.
d. Set : Filter /CDROM/*.mx (for Irix system) ([Enter])
Filter /mnt/cdrom/*.mx (for Linux system) ([Enter])
e. Select : Directories CDROM/cdrompx_x (for Irix system) ([Enter])
Directories mnt/cdrom/cdrompx_x (for Linux system) ([Enter])
*x_x: indicates software version
f. Select : Files npesrx_x.mx (*x_x: indicates software version Ex)
npesrxx.mx: Np ESR (CT/e, ProSpeed AI, FI database)
npv3xx.mx: Np V3 (HiSpeed ZX/i, NX/i Pro database)
npv15xx.mx: Np V1.5 (HiSpeed LX/i, DX/i, FX/i, NX/i database)
g. Click OK.
h. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately 10 minutes for download to finish.
i. Click Close.
j. Select Checksum saved RAM.
k. Click Confirm after a ‘successfully’ message appears.
l. Click Close.
m. Click Exit and Shutdown OC.
n. After the OC shutdown process finishes, remove the JEDI Service Tool CD-ROM from the drive.
5. Display the date and time set on the JEDI generator. Refer to below:
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generator Test → Set JEDI Time
6. Compare the date/time of JEDI and the date/time of the system which is displayed in the left column of the
screen.
- If both are the same, go to step 7.
- If both are not the same, set the JEDI date/time to the date/time of the system.
6-9 X-RAY GENERATOR

REV 33 2244773

7. Calibrate :
7-1.For Software Version < p5.2
- If up-to-date, run a few scans in various technique on both filament.
- If recent, to calibrate the filament, perform several scans at low mA then high mA of both large
and small focus with exposure time longer than 12.5 ms.
- If default Data Base was loaded, run several scans to allow filament ageing correction to
operate, on both large and small focus with exposure time longer than 12.5 ms.
7-1. For Software Version ≥ p5.2
- If original Data Base is loaded, no need to perform calibration.
- If default Data Base is loaded, run following exposure to allow filament aging correction.
For NP V3 & NP V1.5 (DX/i, FX/i, LX/i, ZX/i, NX/i, NX/i Plus, NX/i Pro)
- -Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA, small focus, 1 mm x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD
- -Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA, large focus, 10 mm x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD
For NP ESR (CT/e, ProSpeed AI, FI)

- -Stationary, 120 kV 30 mA x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD
- -Stationary, 140 kV 30 mA x 20 times 1 sec scan 1sec ISD

REV 33 2244773

8. Update JEDI Error Definition file and TnT Definition file.
The OC has Error Definition & TnT definition files for Generator. They are different depending on JEDI software
version. If the software version of the replaced KV Control board is higher than that of the previous one, Error
Definition and TnT Definition files need to be updated.
a. Insert the JEDI Service Tool (JEDI Software CD-ROM) into the CD-ROM drive of the operator console (OC).
c. Select “ Error Definition file update”
d. Set: Filter /CDROM/*.csv (for Irix system) ([Enter])
Filter /mnt/cdrom/*.csv (for Linux sytem) ([Enter])
e. Select: Directories CDROM/cdrompxx (for Irix system) ([Enter])
f. Select: Files efilexx.csv (*xx: indicates software version)
g. Click OK.
h. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately 10 seconds to complete update.
i. Click Close.
j. Select “ TnT Definition file update ”
k. Set: Filter /CDROM/*.csv (for Irix system) ([Enter])
l. Select: Directories CDROM/cdrompxx (for Irix system) ([Enter])
m. Select: Files tntpxx.csv (*xx: indicates software version)
n. Click OK.
o. Wait until a ‘successfully’ message appears. It will take approximately two seconds to complete update.
p. Click Close.
q. Click Exit and Shutdown OC.
r. After the OC shutdown process finishes, remove the JEDI Service Tool CD-ROM from the drive.

REV 33 2244773
6-2 EMC BOARD 3 PHASES

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
10 mm socket wrench with ratchet

DANGER
Note: The EMC board 3 Phases may be replaced while the JEDI generator is on the gantry.

REV 33 2244773
6-3 AC/DC 3 PHASE MID POWER ASSEMBLY

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm socket, with ratchet if possible (to remove cover and board)
10 mm socket with ratchet (to remove DC and rectifier cables)
Large Phillips screw driver (to remove cables from the rectifier block).
DANGER
1. Insure that the neon (orange) indicator light on the board has gone out.
2. Be careful touching components on this board; some become very hot.
3. To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.
Note: The AC/DC 3 Phases Mid Power Assembly may be replaced while the JEDI generator is on the
gantry.

REV 33 2244773
6-3 AC/DC 3 PHASE MID POWER ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
4 PROCEDURE
The AC/DC 3 Phase Mid Power Assembly is made up of two main elements: AC/DC Board, 3 Phases
and Rectifier Block, 3 Phases.
4–1 Remove Cover

The AC/DC 3 Phase board is under the right lateral cover on the opposite side from the HV Tank.
Remove the three 5.5 mm hex head screws on the front, loose the 3 on the side, and slide off the cover.
- 1
+
4–2 Remove Cables
1. Retain position of the cables terminals 1 and 2 .

2. First remove the two DC cables (-DC,+DC) fastened with 10
mm nuts on the board 1 .

3. Disconnect, at the board, the 2 cables to the Rectifier Block
2 . They are fastened with 10 mm nuts.

Remove the eight 5.5 mm hex head screws and lift out -
2
the board.
Rectifier Block
Illustration 1 AC/DC 3 Phases Mid Power Assembly

REV 33 2244773
6-3 AC/DC 3 PHASE MID POWER ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
4–4 Remove the Rectifier Block
1. Retain position of the cables terminals 1 .

The two AC/DC
2. With a Phillips head screw driver, disconnect the 3 Connections
cables 1 coming from the EMC Board 3 Phases.
3. With the Allen key 5 mm,unscrew the 2 screws 2

holding the rectifier to the chassis and remove the Rectifier Block
rectifier. The two
cables to the 2
AC/DC Board
CAUTION Be careful to preserve the special grease that is spread between the Rectifier
Block and the chassis. This grease, called: Conductive Surface Compound, pro-
vides both thermal and electrical conductivity that is important in reducing failure
of the rectifier.
5 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the AC/DC 3 Phase Mid Power Assembly. Tighten the 10 mm cable
retaining nuts to 3 N.m (30 kg.cm), and the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
CAUTION Ensure cables terminals are repositioned as noticed before.
Verify that the + and - DC Bus cables are not reversed before power on to prevent
CAUTION
damage to the Inverter. Refer to Illustration 1 , 1 .
CAUTION
Verify that the + and - from the rectifier block are not reversed. Refer to Illustra-
tion 1 , 2 .
6 VERIFY
Reapply power and verify that the system functions correctly.
Put the cover back.

REV 33 2244773
6-4 INVERTER COILS MID POWER ASSEMBLY, OR CAPACITOR INVERTER ASSEMBLY

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
10 mm allen wrench.
13 mm socket with ratchet.
Large phillips screwdriver.
Cutting pliers.

DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
three screws on the EMC cover must be removed before handling the Power unit.

REV 33 2244773
6-4 INVERTER COILS MID POWER ASSEMBLY, OR CAPACITOR INVERTER ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
Note: It is recommended to take the complete unit down to be able to replace the Inverter coil assem-
bly or the Inverter Capacitor assembly safely.
5–1 Separate Inverter / HV Tank Assembly

Follow instructions in Disassembly / Reassembly Procedure of ”Inverter Assembly” § 5-1 to §5-3-3 to
separate the Inverter / HV tank assembly from the Heat sink mounting bracket/EMC/ACDC assembly.
Proceed to § 5-2 for Inverter Coil Assembly Replacement or § 5-3 for Inverter capacitor Assembly
Replacement.
5–2 Inverter Coil Assembly Replacement

5–2–1 Disassembly
1. Cut the tie-wraps retaining the DC cable and Heater cable.
2. Disconnect the heater cable from the HV tank 1
Illustration 1- Front view

REV 33 2244773
3. Remove the 10 mm and 13 mm screws 1 ,2 ,3 from the Capacitor assembly. Retain the washers.
1 3 2 1
6
5
4 5
Illustration 7-
4. Remove the three 5.5 mm screws 4 to free the Inverter assembly and its cover.
5. Remove the screws to free the three cables from the IGBT (refer to Illustration 3, 2 )
6. Remove the left and right 5.5 mm screws 5 holding the coil assembly.
7. Remove the left and right 5.5 mm screws 6 holding the capacitor assembly, push and bend it slightly
downwards to leave room for the coil assembly.
8. Remove the coil assembly (refer to Illustration 3, 1 ).

REV 33 2244773
5–2–2 Reassembly
1. Present the new coil assembly 1 .
2. Mount the 5.5 mm screw in the middle hole on each side, to hold the assembly coil (refer to Illustration 2, 5 ).
A
3. Remount the three cables on the IGBT

2 , using the phillips screwdriver. A
There is a locking washer between the

screws and the cables.
Tighten firmly to 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).
WARNING
RESPECT THE ORIEN-
TATION OF THE
CABLES TO THE IGBTS
CONNECTIONS TO
AVOID Q100C CABLE
CONTACT WITH TOP
COVER.
Illustration 3-

REV 33 2244773
4. Mount the 5.5 mm screws in the middle hole on each side, to hold the Capacitor assembly (refer to Illustration
2, 6 ).
5. Reset the Inverter assembly and its cover, and mount the three 3
5.5 mm screws (refer to Illustration 2, 4 ).

6. Present the angle-shaped cover and mount the six lateral
5.5 mm screws on the frame and the HV tank 3 .
7. Present the coil cables,
- Remount them along with the DC bus cables with the 13 mm screws (refer to Illustration 2, 1 ).
Tighten to torque 10 N.m (approx. 100 kgf.cm).
- Remount with the 10 mm screw, the coil cable (refer to Illustration 2, 2 or Illustration 4, 4 )
and the remaining cable (refer to Illustration 2, 3 or Illustration 4, 4 ) on the current

transformer of the capacitor assembly. Tighten to torque 4 N.m (40 kg.cm).
4
Illustration 4-
8. Reconnect the heater cable on the HV tank (refer to Illustration 1, 1 ).

REV 33 2244773
9. Tighten all 5.5 mm screws between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm), (refer to Illustration 2, 4 , 5 , 6 ) to make
sure that the remaining threads are in the middle of the holes. (Position the front cover to ensure screw pass-
through, then remove it).
10. Reposition the DC cable and Heater cable and attach them with new tie-wraps from the first-aid spare bag.
11. Perform a final inspection, tighten all screws between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm) and go to §6 of this
procedure.

REV 33 2244773
5–3 Inverter Capacitor Assembly Replacement

5–3–1 Disassembly
1. Cut the tie-wraps retaining the DC cable and Heater cable.
2. Disconnect the Heater cable from the HV tank 1 .

3. Disconnect the Inverter current feedback cable (J1) from the Gate Command board
4. Remove the 10 mm and 13 mm screws 2 , 3 , 4 on the top side, and the three 13 mm screws 5 on the
lower side of the Capacitor assembly. Retain the washers.
5. Remove the four left and right 5.5 mm screws (refer to Illustration 2, 6 ) holding the Capacitor assembly.
6. Remove the Capacitor assembly 6 .
2 3 4 2
5–3–2 Reassembly
1. Present the Capacitor assembly.
2. Mount the four 5.5 mm screws (refer to Illustration 2, 6 ) on each side to maintain the Capacitor assembly.
Tighten them between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).

REV 33 2244773
3. Remount all cables that were removed (refer to section 5–3–1)
4. Pass the two cables from the B

parallel resonant coil as
indicated. A
A
- Attach the shorter wire on the
B
pass through the current
transformer with the 10 mm
screw and its washers A .

Tighten to torque 4 N.m (40
kg.cm).
- Attach the longer wire on the
central capacitor of the
capacitor inverter with the 13
mm screws and their washers,
together with the two primary
HV transformer flat wires (the Overhead view
two with a white spot or ring 2 2
mark).
Tighten to torque 10 N.m (approx.100 kgf.cm).
B A

REV 33 2244773
5. Reposition the DC cable and Heater cable, and attach them with new tie-wraps from the first-aid spare bag.
6. Reconnect the heater cable on the HV tank.
7. Perform the final inspection, tighten all screws.
6 REASSEMBLE THE POWER UNIT

Follow the instructions in Disassembly / Reassembly Procedure of ”Inverter Assembly”, §6-2 to §6-3 to reassemble
the Inverter / HV tank assembly to the Heat sink/mounting bracket/EMC/ACDC assembly.
7 VERIFY
It is recommended that you perform the ”Inverter in short circuit” diagnostics test on the Inverter.
Verify correct operation at all application ranges.

REV 7 2244773
SECTION 7 - X-RAY GENERATOR COMPONENTS - IV
7-1 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE BOARD

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm hex nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.
DANGER BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF.
1. Insure that the Neon (orange) indicator light on the board has gone out.
2. Be careful touching components on this board. Some become very hot.
4 PREREQUISITES
The LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board is in the Jedi Generator Auxiliary Unit (10 kg).
On the Auxiliary Unit, disconnect internal CAN cable, DC BUS, heater cable, 115V and Tube cable.
Remove the Auxiliary Unit from the gantry and place it on a flat surface.
7-1
REV 7 2244773
7-1 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE BOARD (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
5–1 Remove Cover
Unscrew the sixteen 5.5 mm hex head screws and

remove the cover on the Auxiliary Unit.
5–2 Remove Cables Auxiliary Unit
Disconnect the 3 cables from the LV Power Supply 3 Phase board 1 , 2 , 3 .
5–3 Remove the LV Power Supply

Board
Unscrew the six 5.5 mm hex head screws and
remove the LV Power Supply 3 Phase board.
1
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall
the LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board.
LV Power
CAUTION Verify that the following Supply 3
cables are not reversed Phases
Board
before power ON :
1. + and - DC BUS cable, 2 3 2

2. 160V and 0V cable, 3 .
7-2
REV 7 2244773
7-1 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE BOARD (CONTINUED)

Remount the auxiliary unit on the gantry.
7 VERIFY
Verify that the system functions correctly.
Remount the cover. Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
7-3
REV 7 2244773
7-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INVERTER

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet

DANGER
1. Insure that the Neon (orange) indicator light on the board has gone out.
2. Be careful touching components on this board. Some become very hot.
4 PREREQUISITES
The Filament board is in the Jedi Generator Auxiliary Unit (10 kg).
7-4
REV 7 2244773
7-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INVERTER (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
5–1 Remove Cover
Unscrew the sixteen 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the cover on the Auxiliary
Unit.

Auxiliary Unit
1. Disconnect the ribbon cable between the
Filament Board and the LVPS Board 1 .
2. Disconnect 2 .
1
3. Disconnect the J2 connector 3 .
5–3 Remove the Filament Board

Unscrew the six 5.5 mm hex head screws and
remove the board.
Filament
Board
1 Inverter
6 REASSEMBLY
2 3
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall
the Filament Board 1 Inv.
CAUTION
Verify that the 160V and 0V cable 2 is not reversed before power ON.
7 VERIFY
Run Heater Function Diagnostics.
7-5
REV 7 2244773
7-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet

DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
The Rotation board is in the Jedi Generator Auxiliary Unit (10 kg).
7-6
REV 7 2244773
7-3 7–3ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
5–1 Remove Cover
Unscrew the sixteen 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the cover on the
Auxiliary Unit.
Auxiliary Unit
ENSURE THAT POWER IS REMOVED, INCLUDING 115V FAN SUPPLY.

WARNING
3 4
1. Disconnect the ribbon cable 1 between the
LVPS board and the Rotation Board High Speed. Rotation
Board High 2
Speed
2. Disconnect the two wires from the capacitors 2 .
1
3. Disconnect 3
5–3 Remove the Rotation Board

1. Unscrew the eight 5.5 mm hex head screws
around the edges of the board,
2. Unscrew the two 5.5 mm hex head screws that are
in holes below the surface of the board 4 that

secure an IGBT.
3. Remove the board.
7-7
REV 7 2244773
7-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED (CONTINUED)
CAUTION
Be careful to preserve the special grease that is spread between the IGBT and a
heat sink under the Rotation Board. This grease, called: Conductive Surface
Compound, provides both thermal and electrical conductivity that is important in
reducing failure of the IGBT.
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the Rotation Board High Speed.
Ensure that cables 1 are correctly connected. Ensure that marks on the cables
CAUTION
match the marks on the board.
7 VERIFY
Run Heater Function Diagnostics.
7-8
REV 7 2244773
7-4 ROTATION CAPACITOR SET 23/23

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm hex nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.
Cutting pliers.
DANGER BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF.
4 PREREQUISITES
The Rotation Capacitors are in the Jedi Generator Auxiliary Unit (10 kg).
7-9
REV 7 2244773
7-4 ROTATION CAPACITORS SET 23/23 (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
5–1 Remove LV Power Supply Cover
Unscrew the sixteen 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the cover on the
Auxiliary Unit.
Auxiliary Unit
5–2 Remove the Rotation Capacitors
1
1. Cut the tie-wraps 1
2. Disconnect both capacitors 2 2

Rotation
3. Remove the two Rotor Capacitors. Capacitors 1
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to
reinstall the Rotor Capacitors.
Use the tie–wraps from the Accessory Spares Set to reattach the capacitors.
7-10
REV 7 2244773
7-4 ROTATION CAPACITORS SET 23/23 (CONTINUED)
1 2
Ensure that the capacitors are correctly connected :
- connect with cable 2215658 CF9 and CF10 to the below pins of the left capacitor 12.6 µF 1
- connect with cable 2215659 CF11 and CF12 to the upper pins of the right capacitor 10.5 µF 2
7 VERIFY
7-11
REV 7 2244773
7-5 REPLACE NONVOLATILE PARAMETERS RAM

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
Remove power from the system before beginning work.
Check that the power is off.
4 PREREQUISITES
Upload the database that is stored in the RAM before starting the replacement procedure.
7-12
REV 7 2244773
7-5 REPLACE NONVOLATILE PARAMETERS RAM (CONTINUED)
5 PROCEDURE
5–1 Remove Cover
Unscrew the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws on three sides (4 screws on each side;
top, right, left in photo) and remove the front cover of the Power Unit.
Front View
5–2 Remove and Replace the RAM
Note the direction that the RAM faces, then grasp it between your thumb and forefinger and pull it directly away from
its support on the board.
Insert the new Nonvolatile Parameters RAM in its place. Be careful to insert it facing in the same direction.
U32
kV
Control
Board
Nonvolatile kV Control Board

Parameters
RAM
Refer to the Central Listing for more details.
5–3 Download Database

Reapply power.
Download the database. Check that the system functions correctly.
5–4 Replace Cover

Replace front cover tightening the twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
7-13
blank
7-14
CT/e. CT ProSpeed AI/FI Series
REV 30 2244773
PDU
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - PDU1 (2247554-X / 2247557-X). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 FAN ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3 RMT CNT BOARD ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-4 CR ASSY (CR1 / CR2 / CR3 / CR4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-6 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB1 / CB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-7 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB3 / CB4 / CB5 / CB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-8 CONTACTOR (K1 / K2 / K3 / K4 / K21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-9 CONTACTOR (K5 / K6 / K7 / K9 / K19 / K24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-10 SOCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-11 FUSE (F1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-12 FUSE (F10-1, F10-2, F10-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-13 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
SECTION 2 - PDU2 (2298852/2298849) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 FAN ASSY (FOR 200V PDU ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 RMT CNT BOARD ASSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-5 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB1 / CB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-5-1 Circuit Breaker (CB1/CB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-5-2 400V Circuit Breaker_CB1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-6 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB2 / CB3 / CB4 / CB5 / CB6/ CB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2-7 CONTACTOR (K1 / K2 / K3 / K11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2-8 FUSE F1 (3 FUSES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2-9 INDICATOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
1 PDU
CT/e. CT ProSpeed AI/FI Series
2 PDU
REV 12 2244773
SECTION 1 - PDU1 (2247554-X / 2247557-X)
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
Illustration 1-1 Parts Location
RMT CNT Assy

Power Supply
CB1
LMP SW1
LED
Fhlder
CB5 CAP
CB6 F1
Clip
K21
CB2
K24 K9
K19
CB3
CB4
K3
K2
K5 K6 K7 K1
F10–1, F10–2, F10–3
1-1 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-1 FAN ASSY
Special Equipment
• Fan Assy
• Tie wraps
3. Remove the PDU rear cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
4. Disconnect the power cable leading from the Fan Assy.
5. Remove the Fan Assy from the PDU rear cover by unscrewing its 4 screws.
6. Install the new Fan Assy by referring to steps 5 through 4.
7. Restore the PDU to original configuration.
8. END
Illustration 1-2 Fan Assy
Rear Cover Fan Assy
Nut (x4)
Screw (x2)
1-2 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-2 POWER SUPPLY
Special Equipment
• Tie wraps
3. Remove the PDU front cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
4. Pop free and remove the plastic guard from the front of the Power Supply terminal.
6. Unscrew the three bottom support screws, and slide the Power Supply forward and out of the PDU.
8. Verify that wiring is correctly connected.
10. END
Illustration 1-3 Power Supply Removal
Power Supply
1-3 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-3 RMT CNT BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• RMT CNT Board Assy (2250079)
• Tie wraps
4. Disconnect the cable connectors (J1 ∼ J7) from the RMT CNT Board Assy.
5. Remove the RMT CNT Board Assy by unscrewing its 4 screws.
6. Install the new RMT CNT Board Assy by referring to steps 5 through 4.
7. Check the RMT CNT Board jumper configuration according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional check &
Adjustment, Switch/Jumper Setting of Boars/Devices.
9. END
Illustration 1-4 RMT CNT Board Assy Removal
RMT CNT Board Assy
1-4 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-4 CR ASSY (CR1 / CR2 / CR3 / CR4)
Special Equipment
• CR Assy
• Tie wraps
4. Unscrew the two screws, and disconnect the two wire from the relay socket terminal.
5. Cut the tie-wrap holding the CR Assy to the relay socket, and remove the CR Assy.
6. Install the new CR Assy by referring to steps 5 through 4.
7. Retie a tie-wrap which were removed in step 5.
9. END
Illustration 1-5 CR Assy
Wires
CR Assy
Tie – wrap
1-5 PDU
REV 12 2244773
Special Equipment
• Emergency Switch
4. Remove the PDU top cover by unscrewing its 2 nuts.
5. Disconnect the wires from the Emergency Switch.
6. Remove the switch (see illustration 1-6).
7. Remove the switch cover by unscrewing ring nut.
8. Install the new Emergency Switch by referring to steps 7 through 5.
10. END
Illustration 1-6 Emergency Switch Removal
Switch
Switch Cover
Ring Nut
1-6 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-6 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB1 / CB2)
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker
4. Remove the wires from the defective Circuit Breaker.
5. Remove the defective Circuit Breaker by unscrewing its 4 screws.
6. Install the new Circuit Breaker by referring to steps 5 through 4.
7. Verify that the wires are securely connected.
9. END
Illustration 1-7 Circuit Breaker (CB1 / CB2)
Wires
CR Assy
Tie –
wrap
1-7 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-7 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB3 / CB4 / CB5 / CB6)
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker
• Tie wraps
4. Mark and remove the wires from the defective Circuit Breaker.
5. Remove the defective Circuit Breaker from the support bracket by unscrewing its 4 screws.
7. Verify that wires are correctly connected.
9. END
Illustration 1-8 Circuit Breaker (CB3 / CB4 / CB5 / CB6)
CB3 / CB4
CB5 / CB6
Screw (x4)
Screw (x4)
1-8 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-8 CONTACTOR (K1 / K2 / K3 / K4 / K21)
Special Equipment
• Contactor
• Tie wraps
4. Mark and remove the wires from the defective Contactor.
5. Remove the defective Contactor by unscrewing its 4 screws.
6. Install the new Contactor by referring to steps 5 through 4.
9. END
Illustration 1-9 Contactor (K1 / K2 / K3 / K4 / K21)
Screw (x4)
1-9 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-9 CONTACTOR (K5 / K6 / K7 / K9 / K19 / K24)
Special Equipment
• Contactor
4. Unhook the two clips, and remove the defective contactor from the socket.
5. Insert the new contactor, and set the two clips.
7. END
Illustration 1-10 Contactor (K5 / K6 / K7 / K9 / K19 / K24)
Socket
CR Assy Clip
Contactor
(K5 / K6 / K7 / K9 / K19 / K24)
1-10 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-10 SOCKET
Special Equipment
• Socket
• CR Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refer to CR Assy
• Contactor (K5 ∼ K7, K9, K19, K24) . . . . . . . . Refer to Contactor K5 ∼ K7, K9, K19, K24
• Clip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refer to Clip
5. Mark and disconnect the wires from the Socket.
6. Remove the Socket by unscrewing its 2 screws.
7. Install the new Socket by referring to steps 6. through 4.
10. END
1-11 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-11 FUSE (F1)
Special Equipment
• F1 fuse
4. Twist the Fuse Holder cap, and pull.
5. Remove the cap and Fuse from the Fuse Holder.
6. Pull the defective Fuse out of the cap.
7. Insert the new Fuse into cap, and replace in Fuse Holder.
9. END
1-12 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-12 FUSE (F10-1, F10-2, F10-3)
Special Equipment
• F10-1, F10-2, F10-3 (cylindrical type)
4. Pull and open the Fuse Holder Front Cover.
5. Verify the blowout indicator has been protruding. And remove the Fuses from the Fuse Holder.
6. Replace the new Fuses in Fuse Holder.
Note
Even in case of that only one fuse is burnt, all fuses must be replaced at once.
The Fuses should be set as illustration below;
8. END
Illustration 1-11 Fuse F10-1, F10-2, F10-3 removal
Do NOT pinch
your finger!
Blowout
Indicator Top
Do NOT reverse
the direction
Fuse Holder
Front Cover
Bottom
1-13 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-12 FUSE (F10-1, F10-2, F10-3) (CONTINUED)
Special Equipment
• F10-1, F10-2, F10-3 (box type)
4. Remove the Fuse Holder Front Cover by unscrewing its 4 screws
5. Verify the blowout indicator has been protruding. And remove the Fuses from the Fuse Holder by unscrewing
its 2 allen screws.
6. Install the new Fuses in Fuse Holder.
Note
The Fuses should be set as illustration below;
8. END
Illustration 1-12 Fuse F10-1, F10-2, F10-3 removal
Allen Screw
Blowout
Screw Indicator
Do NOT reverse
the direction
Allen Screw
1-14 PDU
REV 12 2244773
1-13 LED
Special Equipment
• LED
4. Pull the LED cover from the LED Holder.
5. Remove the LED, and install the new LED.
6. Install the LED cover.
8. END
1-15 PDU
1-16 PDU
REV 30 2244773
SECTION 2 - PDU2 (2298852/2298849)
NOTICE
..........
..........
..........
Illustration 2-1 Parts Location
PDU2 400V PDU2 200V
EMERGENCY SW ?
F1
F1
SW LED
(Indicator
CB2 Ass.)
? ??
RMT CNT
CB2
CB1
K3
CB1
??
POWER
SUPPLY
CB7
CB6
K2 ?
CB5
CB4
K11 K1 CB3
2-1 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-1 FAN ASSY (FOR 200V PDU ONLY)
Special Equipment
• Fan Assy
• Tie wraps
3. Remove the PDU top cover by unscrewing its 2 screws, pulling the cover backward and lifting it up .
4. Remove the PDU rear cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
5. Disconnect the power cable leading from the Fan Assy.
6. Remove the Fan Assy from the frame by unscrewing its 4 screws.
7. Install the new Fan Assy by referring to steps 6 through 5.
9. END
Illustration 2-2 Fan Assy (PDU2 200V)

Long Screw (x2) Top Cover
Fan Assy
Rear Cover
Screw (x2)
Nut (x4)
2-2 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-2 POWER SUPPLY
Special Equipment
• Tie wraps
4. Remove the protective plastic guard from the side board by unscrewing 2 screws.
6. Unscrew the 4 support screws, take the Power Supply forward and out of the PDU.
8. Verify that wiring is correctly connected.
10. END
2-3 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-3 RMT CNT BOARD ASSY
Special Equipment
• RMT CNT Board Assy (2301670-2)
• Tie wraps
4. Disconnect the cable connectors (J1 ∼ J8) from the RMT CNT Board Assy.
5. Remove the RMT CNT Board Assy by unscrewing its 5 screws.
6. Install the new RMT CNT Board Assy by referring to steps 5 through 4.
7. Check the RMT CNT Board jumper configuration according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional check &
Adjustment, Switch/Jumper Setting of Boards/Devices.
9. END
Illustration 2-3 RMT CNT Board Assy Removal
Screw
Screws
Screws
2-4 PDU
REV 30 2244773
Special Equipment
• Emergency Switch
4. Remove the PDU top cover by unscrewing its 2 nuts.
5. Disconnect the wires from the Emergency Switch.
6. Remove the switch (see illustration 2-4).
7. Remove the switch cover by unscrewing ring nut.
8. Install the new Emergency Switch by referring to steps 8 through 5.
10. END
Illustration 2-4 Emergency Switch Removal
Switch
Switch Cover
Ring Nut
2-5 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-5 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB1 / CB2)
PDU Circuit Breaker Replacement Part Old Part Refer to
CB1 2298746 2298746 2-5-1

PDU2 200V
CB2 2298757 2298757 2-6
2249421 2249421 2-5-1
CB1 5224927 (Breaker Service Kit) 2249421 2-5-2
2249421-2 2249421-2 2-5-3

PDU2 400V
2315868 2315868 2-5-1
CB2 5224926 (Breaker Service Kit) 2315868 2-5-4
2315868-2 2315868-2 2-5-5
2-6 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-5-1 Circuit Breaker (CB1/CB2)

Note
Replacement procedure for CB2 of PDU2 200V, refer to 2-6 Circuit Braker (CB2 / CB3 / CB4 / CB5
/ CB6 / CB7) section.
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker
4. Remove the wires from the defective Circuit Breaker.
7. Verify that the wires are securely connected.
9. END
Illustration 2-5 Circuit Breaker (CB1/CB2)
Circuit Breaker (CB1 / CB2)
Screw (x4)
2-7 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-5-2 400V Circuit Breaker_CB1
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker: order 5224927 (Breaker Service Kit) to replace 2249421
• Hair Drier
4. Disconnect the cable connectors from the defective Circuit Breaker.
5. Disconnect the cable connectors from the K1 and scrap three cables (2298664, 2298665 and 2298666).
7. Install the Moeller Bracket (5189217) on the Board (2295895) by screwing its 4 screws (N9414JS) and 4 Wash-
ers (N9401WS).
Illustration 2-6 Install the Moeller Bracket on the Board_400V
Board_400V
Board_400V
Screw (x4) 2295895
nt N9414JS
Fro
Moeller Bracket
5189217
2-8 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-5-2 400V Circuit Breaker_CB1 (Continued)

8. Assemble the new CB1.
Illustration 2-7 CB1
For CB1
a. Remove barriers from the Circuit Breaker.

From the back of the Circuit Breaker, use thumb pressure to push or an appropriate tool to gently tap each
side of the barrier to help slide it out.
Illustration 2-8 Remove the Barrier from the Circuit Breaker
Barrier
(x2)
2-9 PDU
REV 30 2244773

b. Replace Pressure Clamp Connectors and install Connector Pads on the Circuit Breaker.
Illustration 2-9 Replace Pressure Clamp Connectors and Install Connector Pads
Remove Old Pressure

Clamp Connector (x6)
Install new Pressure

Clamp Connector (x6)
4 Install Connector
Pads (x6)
2-10 PDU
REV 30 2244773

9. Open the plastic protect cover on the Circuit Breaker, then set parameter of Breaker.
• CB1 parameter:
Irip: 7
Amps: 70
Illustration 2-10 Open the Plastic Protect Cover
10. Install the new CB1 and the Moeller Insulated Plate (5197964) by screwing its two screws.
The Moeller Insulated Plate (5197964) is installed between the Moeller Bracket and the Circuit Breaker.
11. Connect new cables (2298664-2, 2298665-2 and 2298666-2) between CB1 and K1.
Note
Add heat shrink pipes to every cable connector before connecting cable connectors to CB1. Then
heat up heat shrink pipes with Hair Drier to let them shrink and pack connector in full.
12. Connect the cable connectors to the CB1. (Illustration shown as below)
Illustration 2-11 Circuit Breaker Installation
Heat Shrink
Pipe (x6)
CB1 2298664-2 2298665-2 2298666-2

& 2298713 K1 & 2298715 & 2298718
2-11 PDU
REV 30 2244773

13. Verify that the cables are securely connected.
15. END
2-12 PDU
REV 30 2244773
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker: 2249421-2
• Hair Drier
4. Carefully rip off heat shrink pipes from the cable connectors, do not damage cable connector.
7. Refer to Section 2-5-2, Step 8 to Step 9 to set the new CB1.
9. Add heat shrink pipes to every cable connector before connecting cable connectors to CB1.
10. Connect cable connectors to the CB1. (See Illustration 2-11)
11. Heat up heat shrink pipes with Hair Drier to let them shrink and pack connector in full.
14. END
2-13 PDU
REV 30 2244773
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker: order 5224926 (Breaker Service Kit) to replace 2298721
6. Install the Moeller Bracket (5189217) on the Board (2295895) by screwing its 4 screws (N9414JS) and 4 Wash-
ers (N9401WS). (Refer to Illustration 2-6)
7. Assemble the new CB2.
For CB2
Auxiliary Contact
2-14 PDU
REV 30 2244773

a. Open the front cover of the Circuit Breaker by unscrewing its two screws.
b. Install the Auxiliary Contact on the Circuit Breaker.
• Cut the plastic patch of the left side of the Circuit Breaker with the plier.
Illustration 2-13 Cut the Plastic Patch from the Circuit Breaker
Screw (x2)
Cut this place
• Install the Auxiliary Contact refer to illustration shown as below.
Illustration 2-14 Install the Auxiliary Contact
Auxiliary
Contact
2-15 PDU
REV 30 2244773

c. Close the front cover of the Circuit Breaker by screwing its two screws.
Screw (x2)
Auxiliary
Contact
8. Open the plastic protect cover on the Circuit Breaker, then set parameter of Breaker. (Refer to Illustration 2-10)
• CB2 parameter:
Irip: 9.5
Amps: 40
10. Connect the cable connectors to the CB2. (Refer to Illustration 2-11)
13. END
2-16 PDU
REV 30 2244773
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker: 2315868-2
6. Refer to Section 2-5-4, Step 7 to Step 8 to set the new CB2.
8. Connect the cable connectors to the CB2. (See Illustration 2-11)
11. END
2-17 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-6 CIRCUIT BREAKER (CB2 / CB3 / CB4 / CB5 / CB6/ CB7)
Special Equipment
• Circuit Breaker
• Tie wraps
4. Mark and remove the wires from the defective Circuit Breaker by unscrewing its screws.
5. Remove the defective Circuit Breaker from the support bracket by tilting the Release Plectrum on the bottom.
9. END
Illustration 2-16 Circuit breaker
Release Plectrum
2-18 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-7 CONTACTOR (K1 / K2 / K3 / K11)
Special Equipment
• Contactor
• Tie wraps
4. Mark and remove the wires from the defective Contactor.
5. Remove the defective Contactor by unscrewing its 4 screws.
6. Install the new Contactor by referring to steps 5 through 4.
9. END
Illustration 2-17 Contactor (K1 / K2 / K3 / K11)
Screw (x4)
2-19 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-8 FUSE F1 (3 FUSES)
Special Equipment
• F1 (3 fuses)
4. Remove Fuse Protective Cover by unscrewing 4 screws.
Illustration 2-18 Fuse Protective Cover removal
Fuse F1
Fuse Protective Cover
Window for
Blowout Indicator
Screw
(x4)
2-20 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-8 FUSE F1 (3 FUSES) (CONTINUED)

5. Verify the blowout indicator has been protruding. And remove the Fuses from the Fuse Holder by unscrewing
2 screws.
6. Replace the new Fuses in Fuse Holder.
Illustration 2-19 Fuses F1 replacement
Do NOT reverse
the direction
Note:
M8 Allen screws x 6
Allen screws Torque:22.3Nm
(22.3Nm torque) (is not necessary to loose
when replacing the fuses)
Blowout
Indicator
F1 (X3)
Fuse F1
Allen screws
(22.3Nm torque)
Note
Fasten the Allen screws that hold the F1 fuses with 22.Nm torque.
Note
The Fuses should be set as illustration above.
8. END
2-21 PDU
REV 30 2244773
2-9 INDICATOR ASSEMBLY
Special Equipment
• Indicator assembly
4. Remove the indicator assembly, and install the new one.
6. END
2-22 PDU
REV 0 2244773
APPENDIX A - SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION
Symbol Publication Description

417-5032 Alternating Current
335-1 Three-phase Alternating Current

3
335-1 Three-phase Alternating Current with neutral

conductor
3N
Direct Current
417-5019 Protective Earth (Ground)
348 Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS
417-5008 OFF (Power: disconnection from the mains)
417-5007 ON (Power: connection to the mains)
Warning, HIGH VOLTAGE
Emergency Stop
A-1
REV 0 2244773
Symbol Publication Description
Type B
417-5339 X-ray Source Assembly Emitting
417-5009 Standby
Start
Table Set
Abort
Intercom
(on Operator Console)

Power On: light on
Standby: light off
Warning sign :
Radiation of Laser Apparatus
A-2
REV 0 2244773
Symbol Description
Microphone (Mic)
Contrast
Brightness
60°C System storage prior to installation:

Maintain storage temperature between -10° C and +60° C
-10°C
System storage prior to installation:

Maintain non-condensing storage
humidity below 90%
DO NOT store system longer than 90 days
Humidity 5-95%
Excluding Condensation
Air Pressure System storage and shipment:

Maintain Air Pressure between 700 and 1060hPa
700-1060hPa
A-3
REV 0 2244773
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
Any permanently installed equipment containing operator or patient accessible surfaces must provide backup
protection against electric shock,in case the BASIC INSULATION fails. In addition to BASIC INSULATION,Class1
equipment contains a direct connection to a PROTECTIVE(EARTH) CONDUCTOR which prevents shocks when a
person touches a broken piece of equipment or touches two different equipment surfaces simultaneously.
TYPE B EQUIPMENT
CLASS I, II, or III EQUIPMENT or EQUIPMENT with INTERNAL ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES provide an
adequate degree of protection against electric shock arising from (allowable) LEAKAGE CURRENTS or a
breakdown in the reliability of the protective earth connection.
ORDINARY EQUIPMENT
Enclosed EQUIPMENT without protection against the ingress of water.
OPERATION 0f EQUIPMENT
CONTINUOUS OPERATION WITH INTERMITTENT LOADING.
Operation in which EQUIPMENT is connected continuously to the SUPPLY MAINS.The stated permissible loading
time is so short that the long term on-load operating temperature is not attained.The ensuing interval in loading is,
however, not sufficiently long for cooling down to the long term no-load operating temperature.
EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH
OXYGEN or NITROUS OXIDE
CLEANING
The system is NOT WATERPROOF. It is NOT designed to protect internal components against the ingress of
liquids.Clean external system surfaces(Gantry,table,consoles and accessories)with a soft cloth dipped in hot water
and wrung DAMP/DRY. (NOT dripping!) IF NECESSARY, use only mild (dish washing liquid) soap to remove dirt.
NOTICE
Avoid damage to equipment! Some îspray and wipeîcleaners etch and permanently cloud
clear plastic surfaces!! Use only warm water and mild liquid soap to clean surfaces.
A-4
www.gehealthcare.com
Imagination at work

CT - e - CT Prospeed Ai - Fi Series Component Replacement - SM - 2244773 - 37

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CT - e - CT Prospeed Ai - Fi Series Component Replacement - SM - 2244773 - 37

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

CT/e, CT ProSpeed AI/FI Series

Copyright © 1999-2022 by General Electric Company

VÝSTRAHA • Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

ADVARSEL • Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

WAARSCHUWING • Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

WARNING • This Service Manual is available in English only.

HOIATUS • Käesolev teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.

VAROITUS • Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.

ATTENTION • Ce manuel de service n'est disponible qu'en anglais.

WARNUNG • Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in Englischer Sprache.

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ • Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται στα αγγλικά μόνο.

FIGYELMEZTETÉS • Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

AÐVÖRUN • Þessi þjónustuhandbók er eingöngu fáanleg á ensku.

AVVERTENZA • Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in inglese.

경고 • 본 서비스 지침서는 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .

BRDINJUMS • Šī apkalpes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

ĮSPĖJIMAS • Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra prieinamas tik anglų kalba.

ADVARSEL • Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

OSTRZEŻENIE • Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

ATENŢIE • Acest manual de service este disponibil numai în limba engleză.

ОСТОРОЖНО! • Данное руководство по обслуживанию предлагается только на английском

UPOZORENJE • Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

UPOZORNENIE • Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

ATENCION • Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

VARNING • Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.

DIKKAT • Bu servis kilavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕН • Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

UPOZORENJE • Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

OPOZORILO • Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Tab - Section Page REV GANTRY ROTATIONAL - III 8-1 to 8-27 6

Table Updated cradle potentiometer resistance from 500±100Ω to 125±50Ω.

Gantry Updated Gantry Tilt Potentiometer replacement procedure. (Sec. 5)

34 06/22/09 Gantry Add Collimator Assy replacement procedure. (Sec. 6)

32 04/30/08 OC Added Raw Data Disk (5166701) according to PQR13162167. (Sec. 2)

31 11/22/07 OC Added DVD-RAM Drive replacement. (Sec. 2)

30 07/09/07 OC Updated Peripheral Assy -> CD-RW Drive. (Sec. 2)

Gantry Updated error. (Sec. 3)

Table Added Cradle Potentiometer Pulley Metal Cable Replacement. (Sec. 2)

28 09/26/06 OC Added SATA HDD Cable replacement process. (Sec. 4)

27 04/05/06 OC Added Note for Fan Assy replacement.

26 03/06/06 OC Updated (IA) HOST COMPUTER ASSY according to PQR13068346. (Sec. 4)

Gantry Updated error. (Sec. 1)

DAS/Detector Added GDAS information. (Sec. 3)

Gantry Updated installation of Gantry Cover. (Sec. 1)

24 05/23/05 Cover Changed contact method of DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION.

Gantry Updated unit of the resistance. (Sec. 5)

23 11/02/04 Gantry Added contents of SP ROM Assy (Sec. 7)

22 09/20/04 Gantry Added contents of DCP Assy (Sec. 7)

DAS/Detector Added a Notice for Coverter Board Step 9 (Sec. 2)

19 04/20/03 OC Added Linux Computer information (Sec. 2, Sec. 3, Sec.4 )

Gantry Updated Slip Ring Replacement Kit (Sec. 9)

17 11/05/02 X-Ray Added: an important notice in Section 3 - X-Ray Tube (Sec. 3)

15 04/19/02 Table Added : Head Holder Rubber Sheet

14 02/28/02 OC Added : PCI Tray Notice

13 11/22/01 Table Updated: LCT Table, general